all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 |
|
User Guide | Users Manual | 3.01 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
User Guide 2 | Users Manual | 3.11 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
Users Guide BT | Users Manual | 916.95 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 2 3 | Internal Photos | / March 01 2010 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Internal Photos | / March 01 2010 | ||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 2 3 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 2 3 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos |
1 2 3 | User Guide | Users Manual | 3.01 MiB |
Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide With your wireless network card, you can access wireless networks, share files or printers, or even share your Internet connection. All of these features can be explored with a wireless network in your home or office. This wireless local area network (WLAN) solution is designed for both home and business use. Additional users and features can be added as your networking needs grow and change. Your Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter is compatible with 802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g wireless standards. Operating at 5 GHz or 2.4 GHz frequency at speeds of up to 54 Mbps you can now connect your computer to existing high-speed networks that use multiple access points within large or small environments. Your wireless adapter maintains automatic data rate control according to access point location to achieve the fastest possible connection. All of your wireless network connections are easily managed by Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless software. Profiles that are set up through the Intel PROSet/
Wireless software provide enhanced security measures with 802.1x network authentication. NOTE: The software is compatible with the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection and the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Table of Contents l Use Intel PROSet/Wireless Software l Connect to a Network l Use Profiles l Set up Security l Troubleshooting l Administrator Tool l Glossary l Wireless Network Overview l Security Overview l Specifications l Customer Support l Safety and Regulatory Information l Warranty l Adapter Registration Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 20042005 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 USA The copying or reproducing of any material in this document in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Intel Corporation is strictly forbidden. Intel(R) is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Intel disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein.
"Important Notice FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS!!!!
Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they are designated and/or marked to ship into. Since wireless LANs are generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars, satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage, channel scanning, and human exposure. For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties of the software provided in binary format with the wireless WLAN adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches, utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and (iii) Intel will not provide or be required to assist in providing support to any third parties for such modified products. Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be "modules", and accordingly, condition system-level regulatory approval upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be non-compliant."
November 2005 Back to Contents Use Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless Software: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide l Use Intel PROSet/Wireless as your Wireless Manager l Start Intel PROSet/Wireless l Start Intel PROSet/Wireless from the Taskbar m Taskbar Icons m Tool Tips and Desktop Alerts l Intel PROSet/Wireless Main Window m Wireless Networks List m Connection Status Icons m Network Properties m Connection Details m Profiles List l Intel PROSet/Wireless Menus l Tools Menu m Application Settings m Intel Wireless Troubleshooter m Administrator Tool l Advanced Menu m Adapter Settings m Advanced Statistics m Use Windows to Manage Wi-Fi l Profiles Menu m Manage Profiles m Manage Exclusions l Enable and Disable the Radio l Install and Uninstall the Software Use Intel PROSet/Wireless as your Wireless Manager Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless is used to setup, edit and manage network profiles to connect to a network. It also includes advanced settings such as power management and channel selection for setting up ad-hoc networks. If you use Microsoft(R) Windows(R) XP Wireless Zero Configuration as your wireless manager, you can disable it from the Microsoft Windows Wireless Network tab. To disable Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration as your wireless manager:
1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection. 4. Click Properties. 5. Click Wireless Networks. 6. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is not selected. If it is, clear it. 7. Click OK. This confirms that the Intel PROSet/Wireless utility is configured to manage your network profiles. NOTE: Check that the Application Settings option Notify when another application uses the wireless adapter is selected. This option prompts you when Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration starts to manage your network profiles. Start Intel PROSet/Wireless To start Intel PROSet/Wireless use one of the following methods:
l Click Start > Programs > Intel PROSet Wireless > Intel PROSet Wireless. l Right-click the Taskbar icon located in the lower right corner of your Windows Desktop to open the Taskbar menu. Click Open Intel PROSet/Wireless. l Double-click the Taskbar icon to open Intel PROSet/Wireless. Exit Intel PROSet/Wireless:
To close Intel PROSet/Wireless from the main window use one of the following:
l Select File > Exit from the main window. l Click Close. l Click the Close button (X) at the top right corner of the window. Start Intel PROSet/Wireless from the Taskbar To start Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless, double-click the Taskbar icon desktop or right-click the Taskbar icon and click Open Intel PROSet/Wireless. located in the lower right corner of your Windows Taskbar Menu Options The Intel PROSet/Wireless icon displays on the Taskbar located in the lower right corner of your Windows desktop. Right-
click the status icon to display the menu options. Menu Item Open Intel PROSet/Wireless Open Wireless Zero Configuration Wireless On Comments Click to start Intel PROSet/Wireless when Intel PROSet/Wireless is your wireless manager. If you select Use Windows to manage Wi-
Fi from the Taskbar menu, the menu option changes to Open Wireless Zero Configuration and Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration Service is used as your wireless manager. When you use Microsoft Windows, you cannot use your Intel profiles. If you have Intel PROSet/Wireless installed, the current state of the radio displays in the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window and on the Taskbar. Select Wireless On to turn the radio on. Select Wireless Off to turn the radio off. If your computer has an external switch installed, use it to switch the Wireless Off 802.11a Radio Off Open Intel Wireless Troubleshooter Connect to Profile Use Windows to manage Wi-Fi Use Intel PROSet/Wireless to manage Wi-
Fi Taskbar Icons radio on or off. Refer to your computer manufacturer's documentation for more information about this switch. This option is available only for wireless adapters that support 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g. Select to turn off the 802.11a radio. NOTE: This setting is unavailable unless it is set in the Administrator Tool or if your adapter is an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Opens an application that can assist you to resolve wireless network connection issues. When a connection issue is detected, a desktop alert appears at the bottom right corner of your desktop. See Intel Wireless Troubleshooter for more information. Displays the current profiles in the Profile list. Used also to connect to a profile. Toggles between the Intel PROSet/Wireless and Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration Service. When you use Microsoft Windows, you cannot use your Intel profiles. The Taskbar icon provides visual indication of the current wireless connection state. The connection status icon is located on the lower right corner of your Windows desktop. The Taskbar icon can be set to display or be hidden in the Tools Menu Application Settings. Icon Description Wireless Off: The wireless adapter is off. The wireless device does not transmit or receive while it is off. Click Wireless On to enable the adapter. The icon is white and static. Searching for wireless networks: The wireless adapter searches for any available wireless networks. The icon is white with animation. No wireless networks found: There are no available wireless networks found. Intel PROSet/Wireless periodically scans for available networks. If you want to force a scan, double-click the icon to launch Intel PROSet/
Wireless and click Refresh. The icon is red. Wireless network found: An available wireless network is found. Double-
click the icon to display the Wireless Networks list. Select the network. Click Connect. The icon is yellow. Authentication failed: Unable to authenticate with wireless network. The icon is green with a yellow warning triangle. Connecting to a wireless network: Flashes while an IP address is being obtained or an error occurs. Connected to a wireless network: Connected to a wireless network. A Tool Tip displays network name, speed, signal quality and IP address. The icon is green with waves that reflect signal quality. The more waves, the better the signal quality. Tool Tips and Desktop Alerts The Tool Tips and Desktop Alerts provide feedback and interaction. To display Tool Tips, move your mouse pointer over the icon. Desktop alerts are displayed when your wireless network changes state. For example, if you are out of range of any wireless networks, a desktop alert is displayed when you come into range. Select Show Information Notifications in the Application Settings to enable desktop alerts. Tool Tips Tool tips display when the mouse pointer rolls over the icon. The tool tips display text for each of the connection states. Desktop Alerts When user action is required, a desktop alert displays. If you click the alert, then an appropriate action is taken. For example when wireless networks are found, the following alert displays:
Action: Click the desktop alert to connect to network in the Wireless Networks list. Once connected, the alert displays the wireless network that you are connected to, the speed of the connection, signal quality and IP address. Desktop alerts are also used to indicate if there is a connection problem. Click the alert to open the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Intel PROSet/Wireless Main Window The Intel PROSet/Wireless Main Window allows you to:
l View the current connection status (signal quality, speed and current network name). l Scan for available wireless networks. l Manage profiles. l Auto-connect profiles to available networks in a specific order defined in the Profile list. l Connect to Infrastructure and Device to Device (ad hoc) networks. l Configure adapter settings. l Troubleshoot wireless connection problems. Use the Intel PROSet/Wireless to:
l View the current connection status (signal quality, speed and current network name). l Scan for available wireless networks. l Manage profiles. l Auto-connect profiles to available networks in a specific order defined in the Profiles list. l Connect to infrastructure and ad hoc networks. l Configure adapter power settings. Connection Status Icons The Intel PROSet/Wireless main window displays connection status icons which indicate the current connection status of your wireless adapter. The Taskbar icon also indicates the current connection status. Refer to Taskbar Icons for more information. Main Window Connection Status Description The icons are used to designate connection status. Icon Description Wireless Off: The radio is not associated to a network. Click the Wireless On button to enable the radio. Indicates connection problems including authentication failures. Searching for wireless networks: The wireless adapter is scanning for any available wireless networks. Animated Icons:
No wireless networks found: The adapter does not find any wireless networks. Wireless network found: An available wireless network is found. You can choose to connect to available networks displayed in the Wireless Networks list. Connecting to a wireless network. You are connecting to a wireless network. The crescent shaped curves switch between green and white until an IP Address is obtained or a connection error occurs. Connected to a wireless network: You are connected to a wireless network. The network name, speed, signal quality, and IP address display the current connection status. Click the Details button to display details of the current network connection. Network Name Network Name (SSID): This is the name of the network that the adapter is connected to. The Network Name SSID must be the same as the SSID of the access point. Signal Quality The signal quality icon bars indicate the quality of the transmit and receive signals between your wireless adapter and the nearest access point or computer in Device to Device (ad hoc) mode. The number of vertical green bars indicates the strength of the transmit and receive signals. The signal quality ranges from excellent to out of range. The following factors affect signal quality:
l Signal quality decreases with distance and is affected by metal and concrete barriers. l Metal objects can reflect signals and cause interference. l Other electrical devices can cause interference. Properties Provides adapter connection status information. See Properties Button for information. Wireless On (Off) Switch the radio off and on. Refer to Turn Wireless On or Off for more information. Help?
Close Provides help information for this page. Closes the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. Wireless Networks The Wireless Networks list displays a list of wireless networks within range of the adapter. Name Network Name Status Connect (Disconnect) Properties Refresh Description The signal strength of the wireless network access point or computer (Device to Device
[ad hoc] mode). The signal strength icon bars indicate that the wireless network or computer is available for connection but is still not is associated with an access point or computer (Device to Device [ad hoc] mode). Network Name (SSID): The name of the network that the adapter is connected to. The Network Name SSID must be the same as the SSID of the access point. Notification that the adapter is connecting to the wireless network. Once connected, the status is changed to Connected. Profiles: Identifies a network in the Wireless Networks list that is connected and has a profile in the profiles list. The wireless network uses Network (infrastructure) mode. The wireless network uses Device to Device (ad hoc) mode. The wireless network uses Security encryption. The band frequency being used by the wireless network (802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g). The wireless network is on the exclusion list or the profile is configured for manual connection. Click to connect to a wireless network. Once connected, the button changes to Disconnect. Provides detailed information about the connected network and its access points. See Network Properties for information. Refreshes the list of available networks. If any new networks are available within the adapter range, the list is updated to show the new network name. Wireless On (Wireless Off) Switch the radio off and on. Refer to Wireless Off (On) for more information. Close Help?
Closes the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. Provides help information for this page. Network Properties Click the Properties button on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window to display the security settings for the wireless adapter. You can also add profiles to be excluded from automatic connection. If network exclusion is enabled (see Application Settings) then the Network Properties also indicates if the network is excluded from automatic connection. Network Properties details Name Network Name Band Description Displays the wireless network name. Current band and frequency being used. Displays Out of Range if no band and frequency is displayed. The following bands are listed:
l 802.11a l 802.11b l 802.11g Operation Mode Displays the current operating mode:
l Network (Infrastructure) A wireless network centered around an access point. In this environment, the access point not only provides communication with the wired network, but also mediates wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. l Device to Device (ad hoc) A communication configuration in which every computer has the same capabilities, and any computer can initiate a communication session. Also known as a peer-to-peer network or a computer-to-computer network. Authentication Level Displays the current authentication security mode for the profile being used. The following network authentication levels are listed:
l Open l Shared l WPA-Enterprise l WPA2-Enterprise l WPA-Personal l WPA2-Personal l Unknown Data Encryption The following Data Encryption settings are listed:
Displays the 802.11 authentication used by the currently used profile. Refer to Security Settings for more information. l None l WEP l TKIP l CKIP l AES-CCMP Refer to Security Settings for more information. Access Points in this Network (0-50) l Signal Strength: The Signal strength icon bars indicate the strength of the transmit and receive signals between your wireless adapter and the nearest access point. l Displays one of the following icons:
. Indicates the band being used (802.11a, 802.11b, or 802.11g). l Channel: Displays the current transmit and receive channel being used for a particular wireless network. l BSSID (Infrastructure operating mode): Displays the twelve-digit MAC address of the access point of the selected network. Manage Exclusions Close Help?
Refer to Manage Exclusions for more information. Closes the Network Properties. Provides help information for this page. Connection Details When you are connected to a network, you can click the Details button on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window to display the Connection Details. Connection Details Description Name Profile Name Network Name IP Address Description Name of the profile. Network Name (SSID) of the current connection. Internet Protocol (IP) address for the current connection. Signal Quality A radio frequency (RF) signal can be assessed by two components:
l signal strength (quantity) l signal quality The quality of the signal is determined by a combination of factors. Primarily it is composed of signal strength and the ratio of the RF noise present. RF noise occurs both naturally and artificially by electrical equipment. If the amount of the RF noise is high, or the signal strength is low, it results in a lower signal to noise ratio which causes poorer signal quality. With a low signal to noise ratio, it is difficult for the radio receiver to discern the data information contained in the signal from the noise itself. The signal strength for all received packets. The more green bars displayed, the stronger the signal. Media Access Control (MAC) address for the wireless adapter. Indicates the wireless band of the current connection. Signal Strength Adapter MAC Address Band l 802.11a l 802.11b l 802.11g Supported Data Rates Rates at which the wireless adapter can send and receive data. Displays the speed in Mbps for the frequency being used. l 802.11g: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54 l 802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, and 11 l 802.11a: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54 Radio Frequency Displays the frequency of the current wireless connection. l 802.11a: 5.15 GHz to 5.85 GHz l 802.11b/g: 2.400 GHz to 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) Channel Number Network Authentication Displays the transmit and receive channel. Displays Open, Shared, WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal modes, WPA-Enterprise, and WPA2-
Enterprise. Displays the 802.11 authentication used by the currently used profile. Refer to Security Overview for more information. Data Encryption Displays None, WEP, TKIP or AES-CCMP. Refer to Security Overview for more information. 802.1x Authentication Type Displays None, MD5, EAP-SIM, TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, or EAP-FAST. Refer to Security Ovewrview for more information. 802.1x Authentication Protocol CCX Version Current TX Power Supported Power Levels Access Point MAC Address Mandatory Access Point Displays None, PAP, MD5, GTC, CHAP, MS-CHAP, MS-CHAP-V2 or TLS. Refer to Security Overview for more information. Version of the Cisco Compatible Extensions on this wireless connection. Cisco Compatible Extensions Power Levels. 1.0, 5.0, 20.0, 31.6, 50.1 mW The Media Access Control (MAC) address for the associated access point. Displays None, if not enabled. If enabled, from the Mandatory Access Point setting, the access point MAC address is displayed. This option directs the wireless adapter to connect to an access point that uses a specific MAC address (48-bit 12 hexadecimal digits, for example, 00:06:25:0E:9D:84). Repair Close Help?
Renews the IP Address. If you have trouble accessing the network, verify if the IP address is valid. If it is 0.0.0.0 or 169.x.x.x, then it is probably not valid. If your network is setup for automatic network address assignment, then click Repair and request a new IP address. Closes the page. Provides help information for this page. Profile Management The Profiles List displays the current user profiles in the order that they are to be applied. Use the up and down arrows to arrange profiles in a specific order to automatically connect to a wireless network. Use the Connect button to connect to a wireless network. Once connected, a profile is created in the Profiles list. You can also add, edit, and remove profiles from the Profiles 'list. Different profiles can be configured for each wireless network. Profile settings can include, the network name (SSID), operating mode, and security settings. See Profile Management for more information. Profiles list Name Profile Name Description Network settings that allow your wireless adapter to connect to a network access point (infrastructure mode) or computer (Device to Device [ad hoc]) mode which does not use an access point. Refer to Set up Profiles for more information. Network Name Connection Icons: The network profile status icons indicate the different connection states of the adapter with a wireless network, the type of operating mode being used, and whether network security is being used. Name of the wireless network (SSID) or computer. Blue circle: The wireless adapter is associated with an access point or computer
(Device to Device [ad hoc] mode). If a profile has 802.1x security enabled, this indicates that the wireless adapter is associated and authenticated. Indicates infrastructure mode. Indicates Device to Device (ad hoc) mode. Arrows Position profiles in a preferred order for auto-connection. Indicates an Administrator profile. The wireless network uses Security encryption. l Up-arrow: Move the position of a selected profile up in the Profiles list. l Down-arrow: Move the position of a selected profile down in the Profiles list. Connect Add Remove Properties Connect the selected profile for the wireless network. Use the Profile Wizard to create a new profile. Refer to Create a New Profile for more information. Removes a selected profile from the Profile list. Refer to Delete a Profile for more information. Used to edit the contents of an existing profile. You can also double-click a profile in the Profile list to edit the profile. Refer to Edit an Existing Profile for more information. Export/Import: Imports and exports user-based profiles to and from the Profile list. Wireless profiles can be automatically imported into the Profile list. See Import and Export Profiles for more information. Close Closes the profile management window. Intel PROSet/Wireless Menus Use the File, Tools, Advanced, Profiles and Help menus to configure your network settings. Name File Tools Advanced Description Exit: Close the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. Use one of these options to start the Intel PROSet/Wireless Software:
l Click Start > Programs > Intel PROSet Wireless > Intel PROSet Wireless. l Right-click the Taskbar icon located in the lower right corner of your Windows Desktop, and click Open Intel PROSet/Wireless. l Double-click the Taskbar icon to open Intel PROSet/Wireless. Application Settings: Use to set system wide connection preferences. Refer to Application Settings for information. Use Ctrl+P from your keyboard as an alternative to access this feature. Intel Wireless Troubleshooter: Use to resolve wireless network connection problems. Use Ctrl+W from your keyboard as an alternative to access this feature. Refer to Intel Wireless Troubleshooter for more information. Administrator Tool: Used by administrators or the person who has administrator privileges on this computer to configure shared profiles (Pre-logon, Persistent and Voice over IP (VoIP)). Refer to Administrator Tool for more information. Use Ctrl+T from your keyboard as an alternative to access this feature. NOTE: The Administrator Tool is available only if it installed during a custom installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Refer to Install or Uninstall the Software for more information on custom installation. Adapter Settings: Displays Adapter Settings which correlates to the settings in the Microsoft Windows Advanced settings. Refer to Adapter Settings for information. Use Ctrl+A from your keyboard as an alternative to access this feature. To access Adapter Settings from Microsoft Windows:
l Select Network Connections from the Windows Control Panel l Right-click the Wireless Network Connection. l Select Properties from the menu. l Click Configure to display the Advanced settings for the adapter. Advanced Statistics: Select to determine how the adapter communicates with an access point. Use Ctrl+S from your keyboard as an alternative to access this feature. Refer to Advanced Statistics for more information. Use Windows to manage Wi-Fi: Select to enable Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration as the wireless manager. Use F10 from your keyboard as an alternative to access this feature. Refer to Switch to Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration for more information. Profiles Help Manage Profiles: Select to create or edit profiles. Use Ctrl+R from your keyboard as an alternative to access this feature. Manage Exclusions: Select to exclude networks from automatic connection. Refer to Manage Exclusions for more information. Use Ctrl+M from your keyboard as an alternative to access this feature. Intel PROSet/Wireless Help: Starts the online help. Use F1 from your keyboard as an alternative to access this feature. To navigate the help window:
l Press F6 to toggle between the left and right pane. Use the up and down arrow as an alternative on your keyboard to move up and down within the pane. l To view information, click Contents in the left-side pane or use Alt+C on your keyboard as an alternative to access this feature. l Double-click on a book icon to open a Contents' topic. Use the up and down arrows to select a topic and press Enter as an alternative to open the sub-
topics. l Click Index or Search to look for a specific term. Use Alt+S on your keyboard as an alternative to access the Search feature. About: Displays version information for the currently installed application components. Application Settings (Tools menu) The settings on this page control the behavior of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Application Settings Description Name Adapter Description Lists the network adapter that are currently available. It may be either an Intel(R) PRO/
Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection, an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection or, an Intel(R) PRO/
Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Advanced Settings: The following settings control how Intel PROSet/Wireless behaves and displays information. Taskbar Show application icon on the taskbar: Select to display the Taskbar status icon. This icon resides on the Windows Taskbar (Notification Area). This icon provides the status of your wireless connection. Clear to not display the Taskbar status icon. The Taskbar Status Icon provides several functions:
l Visual feedback for the connection state and wireless activity of your wireless network. The icon changes color and animation for different wireless activity. See Taskbar Icons for more information. l Menu: A menu is displayed when you right click the icon. From this menu you perform tasks such as turn on or off the radio or launch the Intel PROSet/Wireless application. See Taskbar Menu Options for more information. l Tool tips and desktop alerts. See:Tool Tips and Desktop Alerts for more information. Notifications Show Alert Notifications: Select to display desktop alerts next to the taskbar icon. When your action is required, a message displays. Only events of high importance trigger a desktop alert. If the desktop alert is selected, then the appropriate action is taken. Clear to not display desktop alerts. Refer to Tool Tips and Desktop Alerts for more information. Select one of the following options:
Information Notifications: These desktop alerts are of lower importance. They do not require your interaction but can greatly improve the wireless experience. l Show Information Notifications: Selected by default. All informational desktop alerts are displayed next to the taskbar status icon. These desktop alerts improve your wireless experience with notifications when available wireless networks are in range. They also inform you when a wireless connection has been made or has been lost. Refer to Tool Tip and Desktop Alerts for more information. l Show a list of available networks in the area when not connected: When Show Information Notifications is cleared, you can select this item. When the desktop alerts are disabled, this option allows you to continue to be notified of available networks when the wireless adapter is not connected. Notify when another application uses the wireless adapter: When selected, a message is displayed when other applications are trying to manage your wireless adapter. This is helpful if you use software provided by a hotspot location (coffee shop, airport terminal). To take advantage of the Intel PROSet/Wireless features, disable this software when you leave the hotspot. Enable TLS rejected certificates notification: Select if you want a warning issued when a PEAP-TLS certificate is rejected by the authentication server. See Enterprise Security and Set up the Client for TLS authentication for more information. Auto Connect Connect to available network using profiles only: (Default) Connect the wireless adapter to an available network with a matching profile from the Profiles List. If no matching profile is found, you are notified (see Notifications). The wireless device remains disconnected until a matching profile is found or you configure a new matching profile. Manage Exclusions Connect to any available network if no matching profile found: Select to connect to a network automatically if you have not configured a profile and are at a location that has an open, unsecured wireless network. NOTE: Open networks have no security. You would need to provide your own security for this wireless connection. One way to secure an open wireless connection is with Virtual Private Networking (VPN) software. Connect to any network based on profiles only (Cisco mode): Select to try every profile in preferred order. This signifies that you are in the vicinity of an access point which has more than one SSID but only advertises one. Enable automatic exclude list feature: Select to enable the automatic exclude list feature. This feature provides a way to exclude access points from automatic connection. Refer to Manage Exclusions for more information. Enable manual exclude list feature: Select to enable the manual exclude list feature. This feature provides a way to exclude networks from automatic connection. Refer to Manage Exclusions for more information. Wireless Networks List OK Cancel Help?
Show column sort headers: Select to display the column names in the Wireless Networks list. Click on a column header to sort the column in either ascending or descending order. Save settings and return to the previous page. Closes and cancels changes. Provides help information for this page. Intel Wireless Troubleshooter (Tools menu) Intel Wireless Troubleshooter is an application that can help you resolve wireless network connection issues. When a connection issue is detected, a desktop alert appears at the bottom right corner of your desktop. Once you click the desktop alert, a diagnostic message displays the recommended steps to resolve the connection problem. For example, if a connection problem occurred because of an invalid password, the Profile Wizard application is launched when you click a displayed hyperlink. You can also launch Wireless Event Viewer and enable or disable alert notifications. The Intel Wireless Troubleshooter is supported under Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows 2000 The Intel Wireless Troubleshooter page contains two panes. Use your left mouse button on the left pane to display a list of available tools. The right pane displays the current connection issue in a section. Each section has two parts: the error message and the recommended action. The recommended action contains descriptions about available utilities and helps to resolve the associated connection issue. If you click a help link, the help text is displayed in a window. If you click the associated issue resolution link, a program is launched to resolve the connection issue. Refer to the Troubleshooting section for information on resolving errors. Name File Help Description Exit: Exits Intel Wireless Troubleshooter application. Intel(R) Wireless Troubleshooter Help: Displays online help on the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. About: Displays version information for the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Wireless Event Viewer Launches Wireless Event Viewer. Disable Notification Select to disable the alert notifications. Enable Notification Available Help Select to enable the alert notifications. Date Time error message:
l Description of error. l Link to resolve error (if available). See Resolve Errors for more information. l Link to recommended steps to resolve error. Administrator Tool (Tools menu) The Administrator tool is for administrators or the person who has administrator privileges on this computer. This tool allows the administrator to restrict what level of control the users of this computer have over their wireless connections. This tool is used also to configure common (shared) profiles. Users cannot modify Administrator settings or profiles unless they have the password for this tool. A password should be chosen that is secure and not easily guessed. You can export these settings and profiles as one package to other computers on your network. For more information, refer to the Administrator Tool section. Name Application Settings Description An administrator can select which level of control that users have over their wireless network connections. Refer to Administrator Tool Application Settings. Administrator Profiles Enable or disable Persistent, Pre-Logon and Voice over IP (VoIP) profiles on the computer. Refer to Administrator Tool Profiles. Adapter Settings An administrator can select which level of control that users have over their wireless network connections. Refer to Administrator Tool Adapter Settings. Software Administrator Packages Select which of the Intel PROSet/Wireless applications are installed on a user's computers. Refer to Administrator Tool Software. The Administrator Packages are used to save administrative profiles and other settings. You can copy or send this self-extracting executable to clients on your network. When it is run, the contents are installed and configured on the destination computer. Refer to Administrator Tool Packages. Change Password Close Help?
Change the password for the Administrator Tool. See Change Password for more information. Closes the page. Provides help information for this page. Adapter Settings (Advanced menu) The Adapter Settings displays the device properties for the wireless adapter installed on your computer. It may be either an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection or, an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Adapter Settings Description Name Description Ad Hoc Channel Unless the other computers in the ad hoc network use a different channel from the default channel, there is no need to change the channel. Value: Select the allowed operating channel from the list. l 802.11b/g: Select this option when 802.11b and 802.11g (2.4 GHz) ad hoc l 802.11a: Select this option when 802.11a (5 GHz) ad hoc band frequency is band frequency is used. used. Ad Hoc Power Management Set power saving features for Device to Device (ad hoc) networks. l Disable: Select when connecting to ad hoc networks that contain stations that do not support ad hoc power management l Maximum Power Savings: Select to optimize battery life. l Noisy Environment: Select to optimize performance or connecting with multiple clients. NOTE: This setting is unavailable if the adapter is an Intel PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection, an Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection, or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Ad Hoc QoS Mode Quality of Service (QoS) control in ad hoc networks. QoS provides prioritization of traffic from the access point over a wireless LAN based on traffic classification. WMM
(Wifi MultiMedia) is the QoS certification of the Wi-Fi Alliance (WFA). When WMM is enabled, the adapter uses WMM to support priority tagging and queuing capabilities for Wi-Fi networks. l WMM Enabled.(Default) l WMM Disabled Mixed mode protection Preamble Mode NOTE: This setting is unavailable if the adapter is an Intel PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection, Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection or an Intel PRO/
Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Use to avoid data collisions in a mixed 802.11b and 802.11g environment. Request to Send/Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) should be used in an environment where clients may not hear each other. CTS-to-self can be used to gain more throughput in an environment where clients are in close proximity and can hear each other. Changes the preamble length setting received by the access point during an initial connection. Always use a long preamble length to connect to an access point. Auto Tx Preamble allows automatic preamble detection. If supported, short preamble should be used. If not, use long preamble (Long Tx Preamble). Preferred Band NOTE: This setting is unavailable if the adapter is an Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection. Select the operating band. The selections are:
l 802.11g l 802.11a l 802.11b Roaming Aggressiveness NOTE: This setting is unavailable if the adapter is an Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection or Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. This setting allows you to define how aggressively your wireless client roams to improve connection to an access point. l Default: Balanced setting between not roaming and performance. l Lowest: Your wireless client will not roam. Only significant link quality degradation causes it to roam to another access point. Throughput Enhancement Changes the value of the Packet Burst Control. l Enable: Select to enable throughput enhancement. l Disable: (Default) Select to disable throughput enhancement. Transmit Power Default Setting: Highest power setting Lowest Minimum Coverage: Set the adapter to a lowest transmit power. Enable you to expand the number of coverage areas or confine a coverage area. Reduce the coverage area in high traffic areas to improve overall transmission quality and avoid congestion and interference with other devices. Highest Maximum Coverage: Set the adapter to a maximum transmit power level. Select for maximum performance and range in environments with limited additional radio devices. NOTE: The optimal setting is for a user to always set the transmit power at the lowest possible level still compatible with the quality of their communication. This allows the maximum number of wireless devices to operate in dense areas and reduce interference with other devices that this radio shares radio spectrum with. Wireless Mode NOTE: This setting takes effect when either Infrastructure or Ad hoc mode is used. Select which band to use for connection to a wireless network:
l 802.11a only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11a networks only l 802.11b only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11b networks only l 802.11g only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11g networks only. l 802.11a and 802.11g only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11a and l 802.11b and 802.11g only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11b and 802.11g networks only. 802.11g networks only l 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g: (Default) - Connect to either 802.11a, 802.11b or 802.11g wireless networks. NOTE: These wireless modes (Modulation type) determine the discovered access points displayed in the Wireless Networks list. OK Cancel Saves settings and returns to the previous page. Closes and cancels any changes. Advanced Statistics (Advanced menu) Provides current adapter connection information. The following describes information for the Advanced Statistics page. Name Statistics Description Advanced Statistics: This information pertains to how the adapter communicates with an access point. Association: If the adapter finds an access point to communicate with, the value is in range. Otherwise, the value is out of range. l AP MAC Address: The twelve digit MAC address (00:40:96:31:1C:05) of the AP. the adapter. adapter. l Number of associations: The number of times the access point has found l AP count: The number of available access points within range of the wireless l Number of full scans: The number of times the adapter has scanned all channels for receiving information. l Number of partial scans: The number of scans that have been terminated. Roaming: This information contains counters that are related to reasons for the adapter roaming. Roaming occurs when an adapter communicates with one access point and then communicates with another for better signal strength. l Roaming Count: The number of times that roaming occurred. l AP did not transmit: The adapter did not receive radio transmission from the access point. You may need to reset the access point. l Poor beacon quality: The signal quality is too low to sustain communication with the access point. You have moved the adapter outside the coverage area of the access point or the access point's device address information has been changed. l AP load balancing: The access point ended its association with the adapter based on the access point's inability to maintain communication with all its associated adapters. Too many adapters are trying to communicate with one access point. l AP RSSI too low: The Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) is too low to maintain an association with the adapter. You may have moved outside the coverage area of the access point or the access point could have increased its data rate. l Poor channel quality: The quality of the channel is low and caused the adapter to look for another access point. l AP dropped mobile unit: The access point dropped a computer from the list of recognizable mobile devices. The computer must re-associate with an access point. Miscellaneous: Use this information to determine if an association with a different access point increases performance and helps maintain the highest possible data rate. l Received Beacons: Number beacons received by the adapter. l Percent missed Beacons: Percent value for missed beacons. l Percent transmit errors: The percentage of data transmissions that had errors. l Signal Strength: Signal strength of the access point that the adapter communicates with displayed in decibels (dBm). Transmit/Receive (Tx/
Rx) Statistics Displays percent values for non-directed and directed packets. Total host packets: The sum total number of directed and non-directed packets counts. l Transmit - (Mbps) l Receive - (Mbps) Non-directed packets: The number of received packets broadcast to the wireless network. Directed packets: The number of received packets sent specifically to the wireless adapter. Total Bytes: The total number of bytes for packets received and sent by the wireless adapter. Resets the adapter statistical counters back to zero and begins taking new data measurements. Closes and returns to the main window. Provides help information for this page. Reset Statistics Close Help?
Use Windows to Manage Wi-Fi (Advanced menu) The Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration feature provides a built-in wireless configuration utility. This feature can be enabled and disabled within Intel PROSet/Wireless. Click Use Windows to manage Wi-Fi on the Advanced menu or the Taskbar menu. If Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration is enabled, the features in Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless are disabled. Manage Exclusions (Profiles menu) Exclude List Management is available when you either select Manage Exclusions from the Profiles menu or click the Properties button on the Wireless Networks list. IMPORTANT: You are not automatically connected to a network or an access point that is in this list. Use Exclude List Management to exclude entire wireless networks (SSID). For networks with more then one access point, you may exclude an individual wireless access point (BSSID). Name Description Exclude List Management l Network Name: Name (SSID) of the wireless network. l Radio: Displays the band if there is a DHCP error. l MAC Address: The Ethernet MAC address of the device. l Reason: Explains why this entry was excluded from automatic connection. l Details: Provides specific information on how the access point was excluded and how to remove it from exclusion. This network has been excluded from automatic connection for the following reasons.
-User has excluded this network manually. To make this network (or access points) eligible for automatic connection again, select it and click the Remove button. Note:
- The Reset button removes all entries except rogue access points from the list.
- Rogue access points are removed from the list when a connection is made to this access point using valid credentials.
- All excluded access points in a network (other than rogue) are removed from the list when a profile for that network is applied manually Add Remove NOTE: Entries that are dimmed are excluded rouge access points. A rogue access point is any access point unsanctioned by network administrators. These entries cannot be removed from the list. Add a network name (SSID) to the list. Remove an entry from the list. 1. Select the entry from the list. 2. Click Remove. 3. You are asked: Do you want to remove the selected item from the Exclude List?
4. Click Yes to remove the profile from the list. Reset list Close Help?
Removes all of the networks and access points from the Exclude List. Closes page and saves settings. Provides help information for this page. Enable or Disable the Radio To switch the wireless radio on or off, use one of the following:
l The optional hardware radio switch on your computer l Intel PROSet/Wireless software l Microsoft Windows NOTE: When your computer is switched on, the radio is constantly transmitting signals. In certain situations, as in an airplane, signals from the radio may cause interference. Use the following methods if you need to disable the radio and use your notebook without emitting radio signals. Use the Optional Computer Radio On or Off Switch If your computer has an external switch installed, use it to switch the radio on or off. Refer to the computer manufacturer for more information about this switch. If you have Intel PROSet/Wireless installed, the current state of the radio displays in the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window and on the Taskbar. Use Intel PROSet/Wireless to Switch the Radio On or Off From Intel PROSet/Wireless, the radio can be switched on or off. The status icon on Intel PROSet/Wireless displays the current state of the radio. From the Intel PROSet/Wireless main Window, click Wireless On or Wireless Off to toggle the radio on or off. Switch the Radio On or Off from the Taskbar Icon To switch the radio off or on, click the Taskbar icon and select Wireless On or Wireless Off. How to use the Device Manager to Disable the Radio The radio can be disabled (made non-functional) from the Microsoft Windows Device Manager. NOTE: If you disabled the radio from Microsoft Windows, then you must use Microsoft Windows to turn the radio on. You cannot use a hardware switch or Intel PROSet/Wireless to enable the radio again. Microsoft Windows XP 1. From your desktop, right-click My Computer 2. Click Properties. 3. Click Hardware. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click Network adapters. 6. Right-click the installed wireless adapter. 7. Choose Disable from the menu. 8. Click OK. Install and Uninstall the Software A Typical install includes the Wireless LAN adapter driver, the Intel PROSet/Wireless software, Intel(R) Smart Wireless Solutions, and the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. The follow features are installed during a Custom installation:
l The Administrator Tool l Wireless Management Instrumentation (WMI) Support l Single Sign On Pre-Logon Connect to establish a wireless connection prior to user logon to Windows To install these features, select Custom during installation. Follow the instructions below to install these features. If Intel PROSet/Wireless is already installed, see the post-installation instructions. NOTE: If you plan to use Novell(R) Client(TM) for Windows, it should be installed prior to installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. If Intel PROSet/Wireless is already installed, you should remove it prior to installation of Novell Client for Windows. To install the software:
1. Insert the Installation CD in your CD drive. 2. Click Install Software on the Intel PROSet/Wireless Installer screen. 3. Read the license agreement. 4. Select I accept the terms in the license agreement. 5. Click Next. 6. Click Custom. 7. Select from the list of features to install:
Intel PROSet/Wireless: The Intel PROSet Wireless application software. l Install: Click Intel PROSet Wireless. Select Install this feature and all subfeatures. Proceed to l Not install: Click This feature will not be available. A red x displays next to the option indicates step 8. that it is not to be installed. Intel Smart Wireless Solutions: Provides an easy configuration wizard for connection to a wireless router. l Install: Click Intel Smart Wireless Solutions. Select Install this feature and all subfeatures. l Not Install: Select This feature will not be available. A red x displays next to the option indicates Proceed to step 8. that it is not to be installed. Intel Wireless Troubleshooter: Helps you resolve wireless connection issues. l Install: Click Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Select Install this feature and all subfeatures. Click Next and proceed to step 8. l Not Install: Select This feature will not be available. A red x displays next to the option indicates that it is not to be installed. WMI Support: Wireless Management Instrumentation functionality allows administrators who do not have Intel PROSet/Wireless installed to manage remotely clients that do have Intel PROSet/Wireless installed. l Install: Click WMI Support. Select Install this feature and all subfeatures. Proceed to step 8. l Not install: Click This feature will not be available. A red x displays next to the option indicates that it is not be installed. Administrator Toolkit: Installs the Administrator Tool to the Tools menu. This tool is used to configure common (shared) profiles. The Administrator Tool is also used by an Information Technology department to enable or disable features within the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. l Install: Click Administrator Toolkit . Select Install this feature and all subfeatures. Click Next l Not Install: Select This feature will not be available. A red x displays next to the option indicates and proceed to step 8. that it is not to be installed. Single Sign On: Installs the Single Sign On features.This tool is used to configure common (shared) profiles with the Administrator Tool. The Fast User Switching and the Microsoft Windows XP Welcome Screen are disabled when Single Sign On support is installed. Single Sign On is targeted to the enterprise environment where users logon to their computer with a user name, password and typically a domain. Fast User Switching does not support domain log on. NOTE: Windows Fast User Switching is enabled by default if you use Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition. It is targeted for the home user; Fast User Switching is also available on Microsoft Windows XP Professional if you install it on a stand alone or workgroup-connected computer. If a computer running Microsoft Windows XP Professional is added to a domain, then Fast User Switching option is not available. Pre-Logon Connect: A Pre-Logon profile is active once a user logs onto the computer. l Install: Click Single Sign On. Select Install this feature and all subfeatures. Click Next and l Not Install: Select This feature will not be available. A red x displays next to the option indicates proceed to step 8. that it is not to be installed. 8. Click Install. The installed components are listed after the software is installed on your computer. 9. Click OK. NOTE: When Pre-Logon Connect is installed, you are asked to reboot after installation of the software. Add Post-Installation Features If Intel PROSet/Wireless is already installed, follow the instructions below to add the Administrator Tool, Intel Smart Wireless Solutions, Wireless Management Instrumentation functionality and Pre-Logon Connect:
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs > Intel PROSet/Wireless Software. 2. Click Change/Remove. 3. Click Modify. 4. Click Next. 5. Click the red X next to any of the feaures that are not currently installed. 6. Click Install this feature and any selected subfeatures. 7. Click Modify. After installation, the feature is listed as Installed on the Intel PROSet/Wireless Installer feature list. 8. Click OK. Uninstall Intel PROSet/Wireless Software To uninstall Intel PROSet/Wireless:
1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. 2. Click Intel PROSet/Wireless Software. 3. Click Change/Remove. 4. Click Remove. 5. Click Next. 6. You are asked what you would like to do with your current profiles and settings:
You have chosen to completely remove the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Select what to do with your current profiles and settings. l Do not save my profiles and settings. Select to completely remove all of your current profiles and settings. If you reinstall the software, the profiles and settings are no longer available. l Save my profiles and settings in the current format (Intel PROSet/Wireless 10.x). Select to save your current profiles and settings. If you reinstall the software, your current profiles and settings are available. l Convert and save my profiles and settings in Intel PROSet/Wireless 9.x format. If you need to revert to a previous version of Intel PROSet/Wireless software, select to save your settings. After you have reinstalled the software, your current profiles and settings are available. NOTE: Only settings applicable to the prior version of the software are available. 6. Make a selection and click OK. 7. Click Yes to restart your computer. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Connect to a Network: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide l Connect to a wireless network l First Time Connection l Other Wireless Managers Connect to a wireless network You can connect to a wireless network with one of the following methods. l Automatic Connection: If an existing profile matches an available network, you are automatically connected to that wireless network. l Configure a new profile: Select a wireless network from the list of wireless networks in the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. Click Connect. If you successfully connect, a profile is created in the Profiles list for future use. l Connect to a profile in the Profiles list: You can select a profile from the Profiles list. To activate it, click Profiles on the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless main window. Select the profile in the Profiles list. Click Connect. This allows you to connect to a network that is lower in the list (if it is available). l Right-click the Taskbar icon located in the lower right corner of your Windows Desktop. Right click Connect to Profiles. A list of previously configured profiles is listed. Select a profile. First Time Connection Intel PROSet/Wireless automatically detects wireless networks that are within range of your wireless adapter. When a network is found, a desktop alert notification displays: Wireless networks found. See Taskbar Icons for more information. 1. Double-click the desktop alert to open the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. Select a network from the wireless networks list. 3. Click Connect. If the network does not require security authentication, a desktop alert notifies you that you are connected to the network. Refer to Intel PROSet/
Wireless Main Window and Taskbar for more information about the taskbar menu and icons. If you need to add security authentication:
1. The Profile Wizard opens and guides you through the configuration process. 2. Specify a Profile Name. The Profile Name is your name for this network. It can be anything that helps you identify this network. For example, My Home Network, Coffee Shop on A Street. 3. Click Next. The Profile Wizard then attempts to detect the network settings of this network. 4. Continue through the Profile Wizard until completion. Refer to Profile Management and Security Settings for more information. 5. Click OK to connect to the wireless network. If you ignore the Wireless networks found desktop alert, Intel PROSet/Wireless displays a message that prompts: Do you want to connect to a wireless network? Click Yes. The Intel PROSet/Wireless main window opens. Follow the instructions above to connect to a wireless network. In addition to the Taskbar icon, Intel PROSet/Wireless also displays connection status and available networks. Refer to Intel PROSet/Wireless Main Window for more information. Other Wireless Managers If the Intel PROSet/Wireless detects another software application trying to communicate with the wireless device, you are notified of this behavior. Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration To switch from Intel PROSet/Wireless to the Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration, use either of the following methods:
l From the Taskbar Menu:
Click Use Windows to manage Wi-Fi to switch to Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration. Select this option to disable Intel PROSet/Wireless as your current wireless manager. You can then configure Microsoft Windows XP as your wireless manager. NOTE: Any wireless profiles created in Intel PROSet/Wireless are not visible in Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration. If you want to use your Intel wireless profiles you need to select Use Intel PROSet/Wireless to manage Wi-Fi from the Taskbar menu. l From Intel PROSet/Wireless:
From, the Advanced menu, click Use Windows to manage Wi-Fi in the Intel PROSet/
Wireless application. When you are finished using the Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration, you can switch back to Intel PROSet/Wireless. Click Enable Intel PROSet/
Wireless on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. To enable Intel PROSet/Wireless as your wireless manager, click Use Intel PROSet/
Wireless to manage Wi-Fi from the Taskbar menu. Third Party Wireless Software If you use software provided by a hotspot location (coffee shop, airport terminal), Intel PROSet/Wireless notifies you and then disables itself. It cannot manage the wireless device when another wireless manager communicates with the wireless device. To take advantage of the Intel PROSet/Wireless features, you want to disable or remove this software when you leave the hotspot. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Profile Management: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide l What is a Profile?
l Profiles List l Profiles List icons l Connect to a Profile l Create a New Profile l Edit an Existing Profile l Remove a Profile l Set a Profile Password l Export and Import Profiles What is a Profile?
A profile is a saved group of network settings. Profiles are displayed in the Profile List. Profiles are useful when moving from one wireless network to another. Different profiles can be configured for each wireless network. Profile settings include the network name (SSID), operating mode, and security settings. A profile is created when you connect to a wireless network. 1. Select a network from the Wireless Networks list. 2. Click Connect. 3. If the wireless network requires a WEP password or encryption key, enter the password. To change the security options, click Advanced to open the Profile Wizard Security Settings. 4. Click OK to connect. A profile is created and added to the Profiles list. The Profile Management Wizard guides you through the settings required to connect with the wireless network. At completion, the profile is saved and added to the Profiles list. Since these wireless settings are saved, the next time you are in range of this wireless network you are automatically connected. Profiles List The profile list displays a list of existing profiles. When you come in range of a wireless network, Intel PROSet/Wireless scans the Profile List to see if there is a match. If a match is found, you are automatically connected to the network. Profile List Priority Arrows l Use the up-arrow to move the position of a selected profile up in the profiles list. l Use the down-arrow to move the position of a selected profile down in the profiles list. Profiles List Icons The network profile status icons indicate if the adapter is associated with a network, the type of operating mode being used, and if security encryption is enabled. These icons display next to the profile name in the profile list. Name Profile Name Description Profiles are network settings that allow your wireless adapter to connect to a network access point (Infrastructure mode) or computer (device-to-
device [Ad hoc] mode) which does not use an access point. Name of the wireless network (SSID) or computer. Network Name Connection Icons - The network profile status icons indicate the different connection states of the adapter with a wireless network, the type of operating mode being used, and if network security is being used. Blue circle: The wireless adapter is associated with an access point or computer (Ad hoc mode). If a profile has 802.1x security enabled, this indicates that the wireless adapter is associated and authenticated. Indicates Network (Infrastructure) mode. Indicates Device to Device (ad hoc) mode. Indicates an Administrator profile. The wireless network uses Security encryption. Arrows Use the arrows to position profiles in a preferred order for auto-connection. l Up-arrow: Move the position of a selected profile up in the profile l Down-arrow: Move the position of a selected profile down in the list. profile list. Connect Add Remove Properties Connect the selected profile for the wireless network. Create a new profile using the Profile Wizard. Refer to Create a New Profile for more information. Remove a selected profile from the Profile List. Refer to Remove a Profile for more information. Edit the contents of an existing profile. You can also double-click a profile in the Profile List to edit the profile. Refer to Edit an Existing Profile for more information. Export/Import: Import and export user-based profiles to and from the Profiles list. Wireless profiles can be automatically imported into the Profiles list. See Import and Export Profiles for more information. Close Closes the profile management window. Connect to a Profile When you are in range of a wireless network that has a matching profile you are automatically connected to that network. If a network with a lower priority profile is also in range you can force the connection to that lower profile. This is achieved from Intel PROSet/Wireless or from the Taskbar icon. Manually connect to a profile from Intel PROSet/Wireless 1. Double-click the Taskbar icon to open the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. Click Profiles to open the Profiles list. 3. Select the profile from the Profile list. 4. Click Connect. Remember that the connection is only made if the wireless network is in range. Manually connect to a profile from the Taskbar 1. Right-click the Intel PROSet/Wireless connection Taskbar icon. 2. Click Connect to Profile. 3. Select a profile. 4. Click to start the connection. Create a New Profile Select a network from the Wireless Networks list. Click Connect. The Create Wireless Profile Wizard guides you through the necessary steps to create a profile and connect to the network. During this process, the Wizard attempts to detect the appropriate security settings for you. To create a new profile and connect to a wireless network:
1. From the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window, click Profiles. 2. On the Profiles page, click Add to open the Profile Wizard General Settings. 3. Use the General Settings to add the Profile Name, Wireless Network Name, select the Operating Mode, and access Advanced Settings. General Settings Description Name Profile Name Description Name of the wireless network profile. When you configure a wireless network that was selected from the Wireless Networks list, the profile name is the same as the Wireless Network Name (SSID). This name can be changed to be more descriptive or customized for your personal use. Examples: My Office Network, Bobs Home Network, ABC Company Network Wireless Network Name (SSID) Name of the wireless network access point used by the wireless adapter for connection. The SSID must match exactly the name of the wireless access point. It is case sensitive. When you configure a wireless network that was selected from the Wireless Networks list, the SSID is taken from the wireless network list. You cannot and should not change it. Blank SSID: If the wireless adapter receives a blank network name
(SSID) from a stealth access point, <SSID not broadcast> is displayed in the Wireless Networks list. Provide the actual SSID for the access point. After connection both the blank SSID and the associated SSID can be viewed in the available networks list. Network (Infrastructure): Connect to an access point. An infrastructure network consists of one or more access points and one or more computers with wireless adapters. This connection is the type used in home networks, corporate networks, hotels, and other areas that provide access to the network and/or the internet. Device to Device (ad hoc): Connect directly to other computers in an ad hoc wireless network. This type of connection is useful for connections between two or more computers only. It does not provide access to network resources or the internet. Click Advanced to access the Advanced Settings. The Advanced Settings allows you to set auto-connect or auto-import options, launch an application, set a profile password or specify a certain access point address for adapter connection (Mandatory access point). Refer to Advanced Settings for more information. Proceeds to the Security Settings page. Finishes creation of the new profile with the current settings. Closes the Profile Wizard and cancel any changes. Provides help information for this page. Operating Mode Advanced Next OK Cancel Help?
4. Click Advanced for the following options:
l Auto-Connect: Select to automatically or manually connect to a profile. l Auto-Import this profile (for network administrators only). l Mandatory Access Point: Select to associate the wireless adapter with a specific access point. l Password Protection: Select to password protect a profile. l Start Application: Specify a program to be started when a wireless connection is made. Advanced Settings Description Name Auto Connect Description Automatic (Default): Select to have Intel PROSet/Wireless automatically connect to this profile when it is in range. On Demand: Select to prevent automatic connection of a profile when the network is in range. For example, if there is a cost for a wireless connection and you did not want to connect automatically when in range. To connect to the network:
1. Select the network from the Wireless Networks list 2. Click Connect. Auto Import Allows a network administrator to easily move the selected profile to other computers. When the exported file is placed in the Wireless
\AutoImport directory on another computer, Intel PROSet/Wireless automatically imports the profile. Mandatory Access Point Mandatory Access Point: Forces the wireless adapter to connect to an access point that uses a specific MAC address. Type the MAC address of the access point (BSSID); 48-bit 12 hexadecimal digits. For example, 00:06:25:0E:9D:84. This feature is not available when ad hoc operating mode is used. Clear: Clear current address. Password Protection 1. Password protect this profile (max. 10 characters): Select to enable a password for the profile. The default setting is cleared for no profile password. 2. Password: Enter a password. The entered password characters display as asterisks. 3. Confirm New Password: Reenter the password. Start Application Automatically starts a batch file, executable file, or script whenever you connect to the profile. For example, start a Virtual Private Network (VPN) session automatically whenever you connect to a wireless network. 1. Click Enable Start Application. 2. Enter the name of the program that you want to start or click Browse to locate the file on your hard disk. 3. Click OK to close the Advanced Settings. OK Cancel Help?
Close and save the settings. Close and cancel any changes. Help information for this page. 5. From the General Settings, click Next to open the Security Settings. 6. Select the Network Authentication and Data Encryption options. Enter the encryption key settings and configure the 802.1x settings as required. Refer to Security Settings for more information. 7. Click OK when you have completed the profile settings. The Profile Wizard ends and you are returned to the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. To change or verify the profile settings, click Back. 8. If you are not currently connected to a network, Intel PROSet/Wireless detects that a new profile has been added and automatically attempts to connect to this new profile. 9. If you want to manually connect to this profile, click Connect. The connection icon displays the current connection status. The network name, transmit and receive speeds, and signal quality are also displayed. Edit an Existing Profile To edit an existing profile:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. Select the profile to edit in the Profiles list. 3. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 4. Click Next and Back to navigate through the General and Security Settings:
m General Settings. Refer to General Settings for more information. m Security Settings. Refer to Security Settings for more information. 5. Click OK to save the current settings and exit. Click Cancel to exit without saving changes. Remove a Profile To remove a profile:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. Select the profile from the list. 3. Click Remove. You are notified that Selected profiles will be permanently removed. Do you want to continue?
4. Click Yes. The profile is removed from the Profiles list. If you are still connected to the network:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. Select the profile from the list. 3. Click Remove. You are notified that Selected profiles will be permanently removed. Do you want to continue?
4. Click Yes. You are notified that <profile name> is active and will be permanently removed. Do you want to continue?
5. Click Yes. The profile is removed from the Profiles list. Set a Profile Password To password protect an existing profile:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. Select the profile from the list. 3. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 4. Click Advanced to open the the Advanced Settings. 5. Click Password Protection to open the Password Protection settings. 6. Click Password protect this profile (maximum 10 characters) 7. Password: Type the password 8. Confirm Password: Reenter the password. 9. Click OK to save the setting and return to the General Settings page. 10. Click OK to return to the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. Export or Import Profiles Allows you to export and import user-based profiles to and from the Profiles list. Wireless profiles can be automatically imported into the Profiles list. NOTE: To export Administrator profiles, refer to Administrator Packages for more information. Export Profiles from the Profiles List 1. Select individual or multiple profiles from the list. 2. Select Export to export one or more profiles from the Profiles list. 3. Select the destination folder. Click Browse to search your hard disk for the destination directory. The C:\ drive is the default directory. 4. Click OK to export the selected profile. You are notified: Successfully exported selected profiles to the destination folder: C:\. To select multiple profiles:
1. Use your mouse to highlight a profile. 2. Press Ctrl. 3. Click each profile that you want selected. Follow the instructions from Step 2 above to export multiple profiles. Import Profiles into the Profiles List To import profiles manually:
1. Click Import on the Profiles page. 2. Select the profile files to import. 3. Click Import. 4. You are notified that the profile has been successfully imported. 5. Click OK. 6. Click Close to return to the Intel PROSet/Wireless Main Window. An administrator can set profiles to be imported automatically into the Profiles list. Intel PROSet/Wireless monitors the import folder on your hard disk for new profile files. Only profiles that have been enabled through Enable Auto-Import in the Advanced Settings are automatically imported. If a profile of the same name already exists in the Profiles list, you are notified to either reject the imported profile or accept it. If accepted, the existing profile is replaced. All imported user-based profiles are placed at the bottom of the Profiles List. Password Protected Profiles Import and export password-protected user-based profiles automatically to remote systems. If a profile is password protected, the assigned password must be entered before it can be edited. Refer to Set a Profile Password for more information. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Set Up Profile Security: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide Use Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless Software Personal Security Personal Security Settings Set up Data Encryption and Authentication l Configure Profiles for Device to Device (Ad Hoc) Networks m Set up a Client with Open Authentication and No Data Encryption (None) m Set up a Client with WEP 64-bit or WEP 128-bit Data Encryption l Configure Profiles for Infrastructure Networks m Set up a Client with No Data Encryption and No Network Authentication (None) m Set up a Client with WEP 64-bit or WEP 128-bit Data Encryption m Set up a Client with WPA-Personal (TKIP) or WPA2-Personal (TKIP) Security Settings m Set up a Client with WPA-Personal (AES-CCMP) or WPA2-Personal (AES-CCMP) Security Settings Enterprise Security Enterprise Security Settings l Configure Profiles for Device to Device (Ad Hoc) Networks m Set up a Client with Open Network Authentication and No Data Encryption (None) m Set up a Client with Open Network Authentication and WEP Data Encryption l Configure Profiles for Infrastructure Networks m Network Authentication n Set up a Client with Shared Network Authentication n Set up a Client with WPA-Personal or WPA2 Personal Network Authentication n Set up a Client with WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise Network Authentication m 802.1x Authentication Types n Set up a Client with MD5 Network Authentication n Set up a Client with WEP Data Encryption and EAP-SIM Network Authentication n Set up a Client with TLS Network Authentication n Set up a Client with TTLS Network Authentication n Set up a Client with PEAP Network Authentication n Set up a Client with LEAP Network Authentication n Set up a Client with EAP-FAST Network Authentication Use Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless Software The following sections describe how to use Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless to set up the required security settings for your wireless adapter. Refer to Personal Security. It also provides information about how to configure advanced security settings for your wireless adapter. This requires information from a systems administrator (corporate environment) or advanced security settings on your access point (for home users). Refer to Enterprise Security. For general information about security settings, refer to Security Overview. Personal Security Use Personal Security if you are a home or small business user who can use a variety of simple security procedures to protect your wireless connection. Select from the list of security settings that do not require extensive infrastructure setup for your wireless network. A RADIUS or AAA server is not required. l Review the Set up Data Encryption and Authentication information to learn about the different security types. l To add or change the required security settings, click Security Settings for information to set security for the selected wireless network. l See Profile Management for a description of when to use the Profile Wizard. l See Security Overview for more information about the different security options for wireless networks. l If you want to verify the security settings, select a wireless network in the Wireless Networks list. Click Details to review the operating mode, authentication level and data encryption. l See Enterprise Security to set 802.1x authentication security. Personal Security Settings Personal Security Settings Description None WEP CKIP TKIP AES-CCMP Setting Name Personal Security Select to open the Personal Security settings. The security settings that are available are dependent on the Operating Mode selected in the Profile Wizard: Device to Device
(ad hoc) or Network (Infrastructure). Data Encryption If you configure a profile for a Device to Device (ad hoc) network, select l None: No authentication required. l WEP-64 bit or WEP-128 bit: A network key or password is used for encryption. If you configure an profile for an Infrastructure network, select:
l None: No authentication required. l WEP-64 bit or WEP-128 bit: A network key or password is used for encryption. l WPA-Personal (TKIP) or WPA2-Personal (TKIP): WPA-Personal utilizes the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for data encryption. l WPA-Personal (AES-CCMP) or WPA2-Personal (AES-CCMP): WPA-Personal utilizes a new method for privacy protection of wireless transmissions specified in the IEEE 802.11i standard, AES-CCMP Advanced Select to access the Advanced Settings to configure the following options:
l Auto-Connect: Select to automatically or manually connect to a profile. l Auto-Import this profile (for network administrators only). l Password Protection: Select to password protect a profile. l Mandatory Access Point: Select to associate the wireless adapter with a specific access point. l Start application: Specify a program to be started when a wireless connection is made. Back OK Cancel Help?
View the prior page in the Profile Wizard. Closes the Profile Wizard and saves the profile. Closes the Profile Wizard and cancels any changes made. Provides the help information for the current page. Set up Data Encryption and Authentication In a home wireless network, you can use a variety of simple security procedures to protect your wireless connection. These include:
l Enable Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) l Change your password l Change the network name (SSID) Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) encryption provides protection for your data on the network. WPA uses an encryption key called a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) to encrypt data before transmission. Enter the same password in all of the computers and access points in your home or small business network. Only devices that use the same encryption key can access the network or decrypt the encrypted data transmitted by other computers. The password automatically initiates the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for the data encryption process. Network Keys WEP encryption provides two levels of security:
l 64-bit key (sometimes referred to as 40-bit) l 128-bit key (also known as 104-bit) For improved security, use a 128-bit key. If you use encryption, all wireless devices on your wireless network must use the same encryption keys. You can create the key yourself and specify the key length (64- or 128-bit) and key index (the location that a specific key is stored). The greater the key length, the more secure the key. Key Length: 64-bit Pass phrase (64-bit): Enter five (5) alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z or A-Z. Hex key (64-bit): Enter 10 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. Key Length: 128-bit Pass phrase (128-bit): Enter 13 alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z or A-Z. Hex key (128-bit): Enter 26 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. With 802.11, a wireless station can be configured with up to four keys (the key index values are 1, 2, 3, and 4). When an access point or a wireless station transmits an encrypted message that uses a key stored in a specific key index, the transmitted message indicates the key index that was used to encrypt the message body. The receiving access point or wireless station can then retrieve the key that is stored at the key index and use it to decode the encrypted message body. Personal Security: Configure Profiles for Device to Device (Ad Hoc) Networks Set up a Client with Open Authentication and No Data Encryption (None) In device to device mode, also called ad hoc mode, wireless computers send information directly to other wireless computers. You can use ad hoc mode to network multiple computers in a home or small office, or to set up a temporary wireless network for a meeting. On the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless main window, select one of the following methods to connect to a device to device network:
l Double-click a ad hoc network in the Wireless Networks list. l Select a network in the Wireless Networks list. Click Connect. The Intel PROSet/Wireless software automatically detects the security settings for the wireless adapter. l Create a device to device (ad hoc) network profile as described below. NOTE: Device to Device (ad hoc) networks are identified with a notebook image (
Wireless Networks and Profiles list.
) in the To create a profile for a wireless network connection with no encryption:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Device to Device (ad hoc). 6. Click Next. 7. Click Personal Security to open the Security Settings. 8. Data Encryption: The default setting is None, which indicates that there is no security on this wireless network. 9. Click OK. The profile is added to the Profiles list and connects to the wireless network. Set up a Client with WEP 64-bit or WEP 128-bit Data Encryption When WEP data encryption is enabled, a network key or password is used for encryption. You must enter the key and specify the length (64- or 128-bit) and key index (the location that a specific key is stored). The more complex the key (mixed letters and numbers), the more secure the key. To add a network key to a device to device network connection:
1. On the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window, double-click a Device to Device (ad hoc) network in the Wireless Networks list or select the network and click Connect. When connected, a profile is added to the Profiles list. NOTE: Device to Device (ad hoc) networks are identified with a notebook image (
Wireless Networks and Profiles list.
) in the 2. Click Profiles to access the Profiles list. Select the network that you connected to in Step 1. 3. Click Properties to open the Wireless Profile Properties' General Settings. The Profile name and Wireless Network Name (SSID) display. Device to Device (ad hoc) should be selected as the Operating Mode. 4. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 5. Click Personal Security. 6. Security Settings: The default setting is None, which indicates that there is no security on this wireless network. To add a password or network key:
1. Security Settings: Select either WEP 64-bit or WEP 128-bit to configure WEP data encryption with a 64- or 128-bit key. When WEP encryption is enabled on a device, the WEP key is used to verify access to the network. If the wireless device does not have the correct WEP key, even though authentication is successful, the device is unable to transmit data. 2. Password: Enter the Wireless Security Password (Encryption Key). m Pass phrase (64-bit): Enter five (5) alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z or A-Z. m WEP key (64-bit): Enter 10 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. m Pass phrase (128-bit): Enter 13 alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z or A-Z. m WEP key (128-bit): Enter 26 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. 3. Key Index: Up to four passwords may be specified by changing the Key Index. 4. To add more than one password:
m Select the Key Index number: 1, 2, 3, or 4. m Enter the Wireless Security Password. m Select another Key Index number. m Enter another Wireless Security Password. 5. Click OK to return to the Profiles list. Personal Security: Configure Profiles for Infrastructure Networks An infrastructure network consists of one or more access points and one or more computers with wireless adapters installed. Each access point must have a wired connection to a wireless network. For home users, this is usually a broadband or cable network. Set up a Client with No (None) Data Encryption On the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless main window, select one of the following methods to connect to an Infrastructure network:
l Double-click an Infrastructure network in the Wireless Networks list l Select an Infrastructure network in the Wireless Networks list. Click Connect. The Intel PROSet/Wireless software automatically detects the security settings for the wireless adapter. NOTE: Infrastructure networks are identified with an access point image (
Profiles list.
) in the Wireless Networks and Set up a Client with WEP 64-bit or WEP 128-bit Data Encryption When WEP data encryption is enabled, a network key or password is used for encryption. A network key is provided for you automatically (for example, it might be provided by your wireless network adapter manufacturer), or you can enter it yourself and specify the key length (64- or 128-bit), key format
(ASCII characters or hexadecimal digits), and key index (the location where a specific key is stored). The greater the key length, the more secure the key. To add a network key for an Infrastructure network connection:
1. On the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window, double-click an Infrastructure network in the Wireless Networks list or select the network and click Connect. NOTE: Infrastructure networks are identified with an access point image (
Networks and Profiles list.
) in the Wireless 2. Click Profiles to access the Profiles list. 3. Click Properties to open the Wireless Profile Properties' General Settings. The Profile name and Wireless Network Name (SSID) display. Network (Infrastructure) should be selected as the Operating Mode. 4. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 5. Security Settings: The default setting is None, which indicates that there is no security on this wireless network. To add a password or network key:
1. Security Settings: Select either WEP 64-bit or WEP 128-bit to configure WEP data encryption with a 64- or 128-bit key. When WEP encryption is enabled on an access point, the WEP key is used to verify access to the network. If the wireless device does not have the correct WEP key, even though authentication is successful, the device is unable to transmit data through the access point or decrypt data received from the access point. 2. Password: Enter the Wireless Security Password (Pass phrase) or Encryption Key (WEP key). m Pass phrase (64-bit): Enter five (5) alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z or A-Z. m WEP key (64-bit): Enter 10 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. m Pass phrase (128-bit): Enter 13 alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z or A-Z. m WEP key (128-bit): Enter 26 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A- F. 3. Key Index: Change the Key Index to set up to four passwords. To add more than one password:
l Select the Key Index number: 1, 2, 3, or 4. l Enter the Wireless Security Password. l Select another Key Index number. l Enter another Wireless Security Password. 4. Click OK to return to the Profiles list. Set up a Client with WPA-Personal (TKIP) or WPA2-Personal (TKIP) Security Settings WPA Personal Mode requires manual configuration of a pre-shared key (PSK) on the access point and clients. This PSK authenticates users a password or identifying code, on both the client station and the access point. An authentication server is not needed. WPA Personal Mode is targeted to home and small business environments. WPA2 is the second generation of WPA security that provides enterprise and consumer wireless users with a high level of assurance that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. WPA2 provides a stronger encryption mechanism through Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), which is a requirement for some corporate and government users. To configure a profile with WPA-Personal network authentication and TKIP data encryption:
1. On the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window, double-click an Infrastructure network in the Wireless Networks list or select the network and click Connect. NOTE: Infrastructure networks are identified with an access point image (
Networks and Profiles list.
) in the Wireless 2. Click Profiles to access the Profiles list. 3. Click Properties to open the Wireless Profile Properties' General Settings. The Profile name and Wireless Network Name (SSID) display. Network (Infrastructure) should be selected as the Operating Mode. 4. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 5. Security Settings: Select WPA-Personal (TKIP) to provide security to a small business network or home environment. A password, called a pre-shared key (PSK), is used. The longer the password, the stronger the security of the wireless network. If your wireless access point or router supports WPA2-Personal then you should enable it on the access point and provide a long, strong password. The longer the password, the stronger the security of the wireless network. The same password entered in the access point needs to be used on this computer and all other wireless devices that access the wireless network. NOTE: WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal are not interoperable. 6. Wireless Security Password (Encryption Key): Enter a text phrase with eight to 63 characters. Verify that the network key matches the password in the wireless access point. 7. Click OK to return to the Profiles list. Set up a Client with WPA-Personal (AES-CCMP) or WPA2-Personal (AES-CCMP) Security Settings Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a security enhancement that strongly increases the level of data protection and access control to a wireless network. WPA enforces 802.1x authentication and key-exchange and only works with dynamic encryption keys. For a home user or small business, WPA-Personal utilizes either Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol (AES-CCMP) or Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). To configure a profile with WPA2-Personal network authentication and AES-CCMP data encryption:
1. On the Profile page, select a profile. 2. Click Properties to open the Wireless Profile Properties' General Settings. The Profile name and Wireless Network Name (SSID) display. Network (Infrastructure) should be selected as the Operating Mode. 3. Click Next. The Security Settings page opens. 4. Security Settings: Select WPA-Personal (AES-CCMP) to provide this level of security in the small network or home environment. It uses a password also called a pre-shared key (PSK). The longer the password, the stronger the security of the wireless network. AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is the new method for privacy protection of wireless transmissions specified in the IEEE 802.11i standard. AES-CCMP provides a stronger encryption method than TKIP. Choose AES-CCMP as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. If your Wireless access point or router supports WPA2-Personal then you should enable it on the access point and provide a long, strong password. The same password entered into access point needs to be used on this computer and all other wireless devices that access the wireless network. NOTE: WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal are not interoperable. Some security solutions may not be supported by your computer's operating system. You may require additional software or hardware as well as wireless LAN infrastructure support. Contact your computer manufacturer for details. Set Password:
1. Wireless Security Password (Encryption Key). Enter a text phrase (length is between eight and 63 characters). Verify that the network key used matches the wireless access point key. 2. Click OK to return to the Profiles list. Back to Top Back to Contents Enterprise Security From the Security Settings page you can enter the required security settings for the selected wireless network. Use Enterprise Security if your network environment requires 802.1x authentication. l 802.1x authentication methods, include passwords, certificates and smart cards. l 802.1x authentication types are: MD5, EAP-SIM, LEAP, TLS, TTLS, PEAP, EAP-FAST. l See Profile Management for a description of when the Profile Wizard is launched. l See Security Overview for more information on the different security options for wireless networks. l See Personal Security to set basic WEP or WPA security in a non-enterprise environment (home, small business). Enterprise Security Settings Enterprise Security Settings Description Name Enterprise Security Network Authentication Setting Select to open the Enterprise Security settings. The security settings that are available are dependent on the Operating Mode selected:
Device to Device (ad hoc) or Network (Infrastructure). If you configure a Device to Device (ad hoc) profile, the default is Open authentication. If you configure an Infrastructure profile, select:
l Open authentication: Any wireless station can request authentication. l Shared authentication: Uses an encryption key known only to the receiver and sender of data. l WPA-Personal or WPA2 Personal: Uses a password also called a pre-shared key (PSK). l WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise: Use on enterprise networks with an 802.1x RADIUS server. Data Encryption l None: No encryption. l WEP l CKIP l TKIP l AES-CCMP Enable 802.1x (Authentication Type) Click to open the following 802.11x authentication types:
l MD5 l EAP-SIM l TLS l TTLS l PEAP l LEAP l EAP-FAST Cisco Options Click to view the Cisco Compatible Extensions. Advanced button NOTE: Cisco Compatible Extensions are automatically enabled for CKIP and LEAP profiles. Select to access the Advanced Settings to configure the following options:
l Auto-Connect: Select to automatically or manually connect to a profile. l Auto-Import this profile (for network administrators only). l Mandatory Access Point: Select to associate the wireless adapter with a specific access point. l Password Protection: Select to password protect a profile. l Start application: Specify a program to be started when a wireless connection is made. Back View the prior page in the Profile Wizard. Next OK Cancel Help?
View the next page in the Profile Wizard. If more security information is required then the next Step of the Security page is displayed. Closes the Profile Wizard and saves the profile. Closes the Profile Wizard and cancels any changes made. Provides the help information for the current page. Enterprise Security: Configure Profiles for Device to Device (Ad Hoc) Networks Set up a Client with Open Network Authentication and No (None) Data Encryption When Open authentication is used, any wireless station can request authentication. The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending station. The receiving station grants any request for authentication. Open authentication allows any device network access. If no encryption is enabled on the network, any device that knows the SSID can gain access to the network. In Device to Device (ad hoc) mode, wireless computers send information directly to other wireless computers. You can use ad hoc mode to network multiple computers in a home or small office, or to set up a temporary wireless network for a meeting. 1. On the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless main window, select one of the following methods to connect to a device to device network:
l Double-click a Device to Device (ad hoc) network in the Wireless Networks list. l Select a Device to Device (ad hoc) network in the Wireless Networks list. Click Connect. The Intel PROSet/Wireless software automatically detects the security settings for the wireless adapter. NOTE: Device to Device (ad hoc) networks are identified with a notebook image (
Networks and Profiles list.
) in the Wireless m Authentication:
n If no authentication is required, the network connects without a prompt to enter any log-on credentials. Any wireless device with the correct network name (SSID) is able to associate with the network devices. n If Data Encryption is required, select WEP. You are asked to select either a 64-bit or 128-bit encryption level Security Password (Encryption Key) and a Key Index. These values must match the various devices in your ad hoc network, or data is not transferred. NOTE: If you need to edit or change the wireless network settings, refer to Profile Management for more information. To create a profile for a wireless network connection with no encryption:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 4. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 5. Operating Mode: Click Device to Device (ad hoc). 6. Click Next 7. Click Enterprise Security to open the Security Settings. 8. Network Authentication: Open (Selected). When Open authentication is used, any wireless station can request authentication. The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending station. T he receiving station grants any request for authentication. Open authentication allows any device network access. If no encryption is enabled on the network, any device that knows the SSID can gain access to the network. Device to Device (ad hoc) networks always operate with Open authentication. 9. Data Encryption: None is the default. 10. Click OK. The profile is added to the Profiles list and connects to the wireless network. Set up a Client with Open Network Authentication and WEP Data Encryption On the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window, select one of the following methods to connect to a device to device network:
1. Double-click a Device to Device (ad hoc) network in the Wireless Networks list. 2. Select a Device to Device (ad hoc) network in the Wireless Networks list. Click Connect. The Intel PROSet/
Wireless software automatically detects the security settings for the wireless adapter. NOTE: Device to Device (ad hoc) networks are identified with a notebook image (
Wireless Networks and Profiles list.
) in the 3. If Data Encryption is required, you may select WEP. You are asked to select either a 64-bit or 128-bit encryption level Security Password (Encryption Key) and a Key Index. These values must match the various devices in your device to device (ad hoc) network, or data is not transferred. NOTE: If you need to edit or change the wireless network settings, refer to Profile Management for more information. To create a profile for a wireless network connection with WEP encryption:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile Wizard's General Settings. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 4. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 5. Operating Mode: Click Device to Device (ad hoc). 6. Click Next. 7. Click Enterprise Security to open the Security Settings. 8. Network Authentication: Open is selected (Default). Ad hoc networks only use Open authentication. 9. Data Encryption: Select WEP. WEP data encryption can be configured with 64- or 128-bit key.If the wireless device does not have the correct WEP key, the device is unable to transmit or decrypt data. 10. Encryption Level: Select 64- or 128-bit. 11. Wireless Security Password (Encryption Key): Enter the wireless network Password (WEP Key). The Password is the same value used by the wireless access point or router. Contact your administrator for this password. l Pass phrase (64-bit): Enter five (5) alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z, or A-Z. l Hex key (64-bit): Enter 10 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. l Pass phrase (128-bit): Enter 13 alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z, or A-Z. l Hex key (128-bit): Enter 26 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. 12. Key Index: Select 1, 2, 3, or 4. Up to four passwords may be specified by changing the Key Index. To change the security settings:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. The network that you just connected to is listed in the Profiles list. 2. Select the wireless network. 3. Click Properties to open the Wireless Profile Properties General Settings. The Wireless Network Name
(SSID) and Profile Name are already defined. Device to Device (ad hoc) is selected as the operating mode. 4. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 5. Click Enterprise Security. 6. Network Authentication: Open is the default. No authentication is used. 7. Data Encryption: WEP is selected. You can change the WEP key, key index or encryption level. 8. Click OK to return to the Profiles list after you have completed your changes. Enterprise Security: Configure Profiles for Infrastructure Networks An infrastructure network consists of one or more access points and one or more computers with wireless adapters installed. Each access point must have a wired connection to a wireless network. Set up a Client with No Authentication or Data Encryption (None) On the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless main page, select one of the following methods to connect to an Infrastructure network:
l Double-click an Infrastructure network in the Wireless Networks list. l Select an Infrastructure network in the Wireless Networks list. Click Connect. The Intel PROSet/Wireless software automatically detects the security settings for the wireless adapter. If there is no authentication required, the network connects without a prompt to enter any log-on credentials. Any wireless device with the correct network name (SSID) is able to associate with other devices in the network. To create a profile for a wireless network connection with no encryption:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure) 6. Click Next. 7. Click Enterprise Security to open the Security Settings. 8. Network Authentication: Open (Selected). Open authentication allows a wireless device access to the network without 802.11 authentication. If no encryption is enabled on the network, any wireless device with the correct network name (SSID) can associate with an access point and gain access to the network. 9. Data Encryption: None is the default. 10. Click OK. The profile is added to the Profiles list and connects to the wireless network . Set up a Client with Shared Network Authentication When Shared Key authentication is used, each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802.11 wireless network communications channel. Shared key authentication requires that the client configure a static WEP or CKIP key. The client access is granted only if it passes a challenge-based authentication. CKIP provides stronger data encryption than WEP, but not all operating systems and access points support it. NOTE: While shared key would appear to be the better option for a higher level of security, a known weakness is created by the clear text transmission of the challenge string to the client. Once an invader finds the challenge string, the shared authentication key can be easily reverse engineered. Therefore, open authentication is actually, and counter intuitively, more secure. To create a profile with shared authentication:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile Page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 7. Click Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select Shared. Shared authentication is accomplished with a pre-configured WEP key. 9. Data Encryption: Select None, WEP (64- or 128-bit), or CKIP (64- or 128-bit). 10. Enable 802.1x: Disabled. 11. Encryption Level: 64- or 128-bit: When switching between 64- and 128-bit encryption, the previous settings are erased and a new key must be entered. 12. Key Index: Select 1,2, 3, or 4. Change the Key Index to specify up to four passwords. 13. Wireless Security Password (Encryption Key): Enter the wireless network password (WEP Encryption Key). This password is the same value used by the wireless AP or router. Contact your administrator for this password. l Pass phrase (64-bit): Enter five (5) alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z or A-Z. l Hex key (64-bit): Enter 10 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. l Pass phrase (128-bit): Enter 13 alphanumeric characters, 0-9, a-z or A-Z. l Hex key (128-bit): Enter 26 hexadecimal characters, 0-9, A-F. Set up a Client with WPA-Personal or WPA2-Personal Network Authentication Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a security enhancement that strongly increases the level of data protection and access control to a wireless network. WPA enforces key-exchange and only works with dynamic encryption keys. If your wireless AP or router supports WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal then you should enable it on the AP and provide a long, strong password. For personal or home networks without a RADIUS or AAA server, use Wi-Fi Protected Access Personal. l WPA-Personal: A wireless security method that provides strong data protection and prevents unauthorized network access for small networks. It uses Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) encryption or AES-CCMP and protects against unauthorized network access through the use of a pre-shared key (PSK). l WPA2-Personal: A follow-on wireless security method to WPA that provides stronger data protection and prevents unauthorized network access for small networks. NOTE: WPA-Personal or WPA2 Personal are not interoperable. Some security solutions may not be supported by your computer's operating system and may require additional software or certain hardware as well as wireless LAN infrastructure support. Check with your computer manufacturer for details. To add a profile with WPA-Personal or WPA2-Personal network authentication:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Profile Wizard's General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 7. Click Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Personal or WPA2-Personal. See Security Overview. 9. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:
l TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. l AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. 10. Password: Enter a text phrase from 8 to 63 characters. The longer the password, the stronger the security of the wireless network. The same password entered into an access points needs to be used on this computer and all other wireless devices that access the wireless network. Set up a Client with WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise Network Authentication WPA2-Enterprise requires an authentication server. l WPA-Enterprise: A wireless security method that provides strong data protection for multiple users and large managed networks. It uses the 802.1X authentication framework with TKIP encryption and prevents unauthorized network access by verifying network users through an authentication server. l WPA2-Enterprise: The follow-on wireless security method to WPA that provides stronger data protection for multiple users and large managed networks. It prevents unauthorized network access by verifying network users through an authentication server. NOTE: WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise are not interoperable. To add a profile that uses WPA - Enterprise or WPA2 - Enterprise authentication:
1. Obtain a user name and password on the RADIUS server from your administrator. 2. Certain Authentication Types require that obtain and install a client certificate. Refer to Setting up the Client for TLS authentication or consult your administrator. 3. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 4. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Profile Wizard's General Settings. 5. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 6. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 7. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 8. Click Next. 9. Click Enterprise Security. 10. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 11. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:
m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 12. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 13. Authentication Type: Select one of the following: EAP-SIM, LEAP, TLS, TTLS, PEAP, EAP-FAST. Set up a Client with WEP Data Encryption and MD5 Network Authentication MD5 authentication is a one-way authentication method that uses user names and passwords. This method does not support key management, but does require a pre-configured key if data encryption is used. To add WEP and MD5 authentication to a new profile:
NOTE: Before you begin, you need to know the user name and password on the RADIUS server that grants access to the network. 1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Profile Wizard's General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next. 7. Click Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select Open (Recommended). 9. Data Encryption: Select WEP. 10. Click 802.1x Enabled. 11. Authentication type: Select MD5. Step 1 of 2: Password 1. Encryption Level: Select either 64- or 128-bit. 2. Wireless Security Password (Encryption Key): Enter your network key (wireless security password) for your wireless network. Verify that the network key matches the wireless AP. m Use pass phrase: Enter a text phrase, up to 5 (64-bit) or 13 (128-bit) alphanumeric characters (0-
9, a-z or A-Z). m Use hex key: Enter up to 10 alphanumeric characters (64-bit, 0-9, A-F) or 26 alphanumeric characters (128-bit, 0-9, A-F). 3. Key Index: Select 1, 2, 3 or 4. (Default key is 1.) 4. Click Next. Step 2 of 2: MD5 User 1. Select one of the following credential methods:
m Use Windows logon user name and password: The 802.1x credentials match your Windows user name and password. Before connection, you are prompted for your Windows logon credentials. NOTE: This option is unavailable if Pre-Logon Connect is not selected during installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Refer to Install or Uninstall the Single Sign On Feature. m Prompt for the user name and password: Prompt for your user name and password every time you log onto the wireless network. m Use the following user name and password: Use your saved credentials to log onto the network. n User Name: This user name must match the user name that is set in the authentication server by the administrator prior to client authentication. The user name is case-sensitive. This name specifies the identity supplied to the authenticator by the authentication protocol operating over the TLS tunnel. This identity is securely transmitted to the server only after an encrypted channel has been established. n Domain: Name of the domain on the authentication server. The server name identifies a domain or one of its sub-domains (for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry. zeelans.com). NOTE: Contact your administrator to obtain the domain name. n Password: Specifies the user password. The password characters appear as asterisks. This password must match the password that is set in the authentication server. n Confirm Password: Reenter the user password. 2. Click OK to save the credentials. 3. Click Connect to connect to the selected wireless network. If you did not select Use Windows logon on the Security Settings page and also did not configure user credentials, an Enter Credentials message appears when you attempt to connect to this profile. Enter your user name, domain, and password. Click OK to access the profile. 4. Click OK to close Intel PROSet/Wireless. Set up a Client with WEP Data Encryption and EAP-SIM NetworK Authentication EAP-SIM uses a dynamic session-based WEP key, which is derived from the client adapter and RADIUS server, to encrypt data. EAP-SIM requires you to enter a user verification code, or Personal Identification Number (PIN), for communication with the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card. A SIM card is a special smart card that is used by Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) based digital cellular networks. To add a profile with EAP-SIM authentication:
1. On the Profile page, click Add to open General Settings. 2. Profile Name: Enter a profile name. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 4. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 5. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 6. Click Enterprise Security. 7. Network Authentication: Select Open (Recommended). 8. Data Encryption: Select WEP. 9. Click Enable 802.1x. 10. Authentication type: Select EAP-SIM. EAP-SIM authentication can be used with:
l Network Authentication types: Open, Shared, WPA - Enterprise and WPA2 - Enterprise l Data Encryption types: None, WEP, TKIP, AES-CCMP and CKIP EAP-SIM User (optional) 1. Specify user name (identity): Click to specify the user name. l User Name: Enter the user name assigned to the SIM card. 2. Click OK. Set up a Client with TLS Network Authentication These settings define the protocol and the credentials used to authenticate a user. Transport Layer Security (TLS) authentication is a two-way authentication method that exclusively uses digital certificates to verify the identity of a client and a server. To add a profile with TLS authentication:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Profile Wizard's General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Type the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 7. Click Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select AES-CCMP (Recommended). 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select TLS to be used with this connection. Step 1 of 2: TLS User 1. Obtain and install a client certificate, refer to Set up the Client for TLS authentication or consult your system administrator. 2. Select one of the following to obtain a certificate:
l Use my smart card: Select if the certificate resides on a smart card. l Use the certificate issued to this computer. l Use a user certificate on this computer: Click Select to choose a certificate that resides on this computer. 3. Click Next. Step 2 of 2: TLS Server Select one of the following:
1. Select one of the following options:
n Validate Server Certificate: Select to verify the server certificate. Certificate Issuer: Click Any Trusted CA as the default or select a certificate issuer from the list. n Specify Server or Certificate Name:
Server or Certificate Name: Enter the server name. The server name or domain to which the server belongs, depends on which of the two options below has been selected. Server name must match the specified entry exactly: When selected, the server name must match exactly the server name found on the certificate. The server name should include the complete domain name (for example, Servername.Domain name). Domain name must end with the specified entry: When selected, the server name identifies a domain, and the certificate must have a server name that belongs to this domain or to one of its subdomains (for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry.zeelans.com). NOTE: These parameters should be obtained from the administrator. NOTE: These parameters should be obtained from the administrator. 2. Click OK to save the setting and close the page. Set up a Client with TTLS Network Authentication TTLS authentication: These settings define the protocol and credentials used to authenticate a user. The client uses EAP-TLS to validate the server and create a TLS-encrypted channel between the client and server. The client can use another authentication protocol, typically password-based protocols (for example, MD5 Challenge over this encrypted channel to enable server validation). The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-
exposed TLS encrypted channel. The following example describes how to use WPA with AES-CCMP encryption with TTLS authentication. To set up a client with TTLS Network Authentication:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Profile Wizard's General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 7. Click Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:
m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select TTLS to be used with this connection. Step 1 of 2: TTLS User 1. Authentication Protocol: This parameter specifies the authentication protocol operating over the TTLS tunnel. The protocols are: PAP (Default), CHAP, MD5, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP-V2. See Security Overview for more information. For PAP, CHAP, MD5, MS-CHAP, and MS-CHAP-V2 protocols, select one of these authentication methods:
l Use the Windows logon: Select to retrieve the user's credentials from the user's Windows logon process. NOTE: This option is unavailable if Pre-Logon Connect is not selected during installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Refer to Install or Uninstall the Single Sign On Feature. l Prompt each time I connect: Select to prompt for user name and password before you connect to the wireless network. The user name and password must be first set in the authentication server by the administrator. l Use the following: The user name and password are securely (encrypted) saved in the profile. m User Name: This user name must match the user name that is set in the authentication server. m Domain: Name of the domain on the authentication server. The server name identifies a domain or one of its subdomains (for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry.zeelans.com). NOTE: Contact your administrator to obtain the domain name. m Password: This password must match the password that is set in the authentication server. The entered password characters display as asterisks. m Confirm Password: Reenter the user password. 2. Roaming Identity: If the Roaming Identity is cleared, %domain%\%username% is the default. When 802.1x MS RADIUS is used as an authentication server, the server authenticates the device that uses the Roaming Identity user name from Intel PROSet/Wireless software, and ignores the Authentication Protocol MS-CHAP-V2 user name. This feature is the 802.1x identity supplied to the authenticator. Microsoft IAS RADIUS accepts only a valid user name (dotNet user) for EAP clients. When 802.1x MS RADIUS is used, enter a valid user name. For all other servers, this is optional. Therefore, it is recommended to use the desired realm (for example, anonymous@myrealm) instead of a true identity. Step 2 of 2: TTLS Server l Validate Server Certificate: Selected. l Certificate Issuer: The server certificate received during the TTLS message exchange must have been issued by this certificate authority (CA). Trusted intermediate certificate authorities and root authorities whose certificates exist in the system store are available for selection. If Any Trusted CA is selected, any CA in the list is acceptable. l Specify Server or Certificate Name: The server name or domain to which the server belongs, whichever of the following has been selected. l Server name must match exactly: When selected, the server name entered must match exactly the server name found on the certificate. The server name should include the complete domain name (for example, Servername.Domain name). l Domain name must end in specified name: When selected, the server name identifies a domain and the certificate must have a server name belonging to this domain or to one of its subdomains
(for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry.zeelans.com) NOTE: These parameters should be obtained from the administrator. 3. Click OK to save the setting and close the page. Set up a Client with PEAP Network Authentication PEAP authentication: PEAP settings are required for the authentication of the client to the authentication server. The client uses EAP-TLS to validate the server and create a TLS-encrypted channel between client and server. The client can use another EAP mechanism (for example, Microsoft Challenge Authentication Protocol (MS-
CHAP) Version 2), over this encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. The following example describes how to use WPA with AES-
CCMP or TKIP encryption with PEAP authentication. To set up a client with PEAP Authentication:
Obtain and install a client certificate. Refer to Set up the Client for TLS authentication or consult your administrator. 1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Profile Wizard's General Settings. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 7. Click Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:
m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select PEAP to be used with this connection. Step 1 of 2: PEAP User PEAP relies on Transport Layer Security (TLS) to allow unencrypted authentication types (for example, EAP-
Generic Token Card (GTC) and One-Time Password (OTP) support). 1. Authentication Protocol: Select either GTC, MS-CHAP-V2 (Default), or TLS. Refer to Authentication Protocols. 2. User Credentials: Select one of the following:
n Use Windows Logon: Allows the 802.1x credentials to match your Windows user name and password. Before connection, you are prompted for your Windows logon credentials. n Prompt each time I connect: Prompts for user name and password every time you n Use the following: The user name and password are securely (encrypted) saved in the log onto the network. profile. n User Name: This user name must match the user name that is set in the authentication server. n Domain: Name of the domain on the authentication server. The server name identifies a domain or one of its subdomains (for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry.zeelans.com). NOTE: Contact your administrator to obtain the domain name. n Password: This password must match the password that is set in the authentication server. The entered password characters display as asterisks. n Confirm Password: Reenter the user password. n Roaming Identity: If the Roaming Identity is cleared, %domain%\%username% is the default. When 802.1x MS RADIUS is used as an authentication server, the authentication server authenticates the device with the Roaming Identity user name from the Intel PROSet/
Wireless utility and ignores the Authentication Protocol MS-CHAP-V2 user name. This feature is the 802.1x identity supplied to the authenticator. Microsoft IAS RADIUS accepts only a valid user name (dotNet user) for EAP clients. Enter a valid user name whenever 802.1x MS RADIUS is used. For all other servers, this is optional, therefore, it is recommended that you no use a true identity, but instead the desired realm (for example, anonymous@myrealm). Configure Roaming Identity to support multiple users:
If you use a Pre-Logon or Common connection profile that requires the roaming identity to be based on the Windows logon credentials, the creator of the profile can add a roaming identity that uses %username% and %domain%. The roaming identity is parsed and the appropriate log on information is substituted for the keywords. This allows maximum flexibility in configuring the roaming identity while allowing multiple users to share the profile. Please refer to your authentication server user guide for directions about how to format a suitable roaming identity. Possible formats are:
%domain%\%username%
%username%@%domain%
%username%@%domain%.com
%username%@mynetwork.com If Roaming Identity is cleared, %domain%\%username% is the default. Notes about the credentials: This user name and domain must match the user name that is set in the authentication server by the administrator prior to client authentication. The user name is case-sensitive. This name specifies the identity supplied to the authenticator by the authentication protocol operating over the TLS tunnel. This user identity is securely transmitted to the server only after an encrypted channel has been verified and established. Authentication Protocols: These parameter specifies the authentication protocols that can operate over the TTLS tunnel. Below are instructions on how to configure a profile that uses PEAP authentication with GTC, MS-CHAP-V2 (Default), or TLS authentication protocols. Generic Token Card (GTC) To configure a one-time password:
1. Authentication Protocol: Select GTC (Generic Token Card). 2. User Credentials: Select Prompt each time I connect 3. On connection prompt for: Select one of the following:
n Static password: On connection, enter the user credentials. n One-time password (OTP): Obtain the password from a hardware token device. n PIN (Soft Token): Obtain the password from a soft token program. 4. Click OK. 5. Select the profile on the Wireless Networks list. 6. Click Connect. When prompted, enter the user name, domain and one-time password (OTP). 7. Click OK. You are asked to verify your log in information. NOTE: The Prompt each time I connect option is unavailable if an Administrator has cleared the Cache Credentials setting in the the Administrator Tool. Refer to Administrator Settings for more information. MS-CHAP-V2. This parameter specifies the authentication protocol operating over the PEAP tunnel. 1. User Credentials: Select one of the following options:
n Use Windows Logon: Allows the 802.1x credentials to match your Windows user name and password. Before connection, you are prompted for your Windows logon credentials. n Prompt each time I connect: Prompts for user name and password every time you log onto the network. n Use the following user name and password: The user name and password are securely (encrypted) saved in the profile. n User Name: This user name must match the user name that is set in the authentication server. n Domain: Name of the domain on the authentication server. The server name identifies a domain or one of its subdomains (for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry.zeelans.com). NOTE: Contact your administrator to obtain the domain name. n Password: This password must match the password that is set in the authentication server. The entered password characters display as asterisks. n Confirm Password: Reenter the user password. NOTE:This option is unavailable if Pre-Logon Connect is not selected during installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Refer to Install or Uninstall the Single Sign On Feature. TLS: Transport Layer Security authentication is a two-way authentication method that exclusively uses digital certificates to verify the identity of a client and a server. 1. Obtain and install a client certificate, refer to Set up the Client for TLS authentication or consult your system administrator. 2. Select one of the following to obtain a certificate:
n Use my smart card: Select if the certificate resides on a smart card. n Use the certificate issued to this computer: Click Select to choose a certificate that resides in the machine store. n Use a user certificate on this computer. Click Select to choose a certificate that resides on this computer. 3. Click Next. Step 2 of 2: PEAP Server 1. Select one of the following options:
n Validate Server Certificate: Select to verify the server certificate. Certificate Issuer: Click Any Trusted CA as the default or select a certificate issuer from the list. n Specify Server or Certificate Name:
Server or Certificate Name: Enter the server name. The server name or domain to which the server belongs, depends on which of the two options below has been selected. Server name must match the specified entry exactly: When selected, the server name must match exactly the server name found on the certificate. The server name should include the complete domain name (for example, Servername.Domain name). Domain name must end with the specified entry: When selected, the server name identifies a domain, and the certificate must have a server name that belongs to this domain or to one of its subdomains (for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry.zeelans.com). NOTE: These parameters should be obtained from the administrator. Notes about Certificates: The specified identity should match the Issued to identity in the certificate and should be registered on the authentication server (for example, RADIUS server) that is used by the authenticator. Your certificate must be valid with respect to the authentication server. This requirement depends on the authentication server and generally means that the authentication server must know the issuer of your certificate as a Certificate Authority. Use the same user name you used to log in when the certificate was installed. 2. Click OK. The profile is added to the Profiles list. 3. Click the new profile at the end of the Profiles list. Use the up and down arrows to change the priority of the new profile. 4. Click Connect to connect to the selected wireless network. If you did not select Use Windows logon on the Security Settings page and also did not configure user credentials, no credentials are saved for this profile. Please enter your credentials to authenticate to the network. 5. Click OK to close Intel PROSet/Wireless. PEAP-TLS Certificate Auto Enrollment In the Application Settings (Advanced Settings), select Intel(R) PROSet TLS Certificate Rejected Warning if you want a warning issued when a PEAP-TLS certificate is rejected.When a certificate has an invalid field expiration date, you are notified that you must take one of the following actions:A potential authentication problem for profile <profile name> has been detected. The expiration date in the associated certificate may be invalid. Choose one of the following options:
Control Continue with current parameters. Update certificate manually. Update certificate automatically based on the certificates in the local store. Log off to obtain certificate during log on process
(this does not update the profile and only applies to certificates configured for auto enrollment). Auto enrollment Description Continue with the current certificate. The Select Certificate page opens for you to choose another certificate. This option is enabled only when the local store holds one or more certificates for which the "issued to" and "issued by" fields match the current certificate and for which the
"expiration date" has not expired. If you choose this option, the application selects the first valid certificate. Logs off the user, who must obtain a proper certificate during the next log on process. The profile must be updated to select the new certificate. You are notified to: Please wait while the system is trying to obtain the certificate automatically. Click Cancel to end the certificate retrieval. Do not show this message again. A user is able to avoid this step in subsequent sessions. The choice selected is remembered for future sessions. Set up a Client with LEAP Network Authentication Cisco LEAP (Light Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an 802.1X authentication type that supports strong mutual authentication between the client and a RADIUS server. The LEAP profiles settings include LEAP, CKIP with Rogue AP detection integration. To set up a client with LEAP Authentication:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add. The Create Wireless Profile General Settings opens. 3. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 7. Click Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:
m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select LEAP to be used with this connection. 12. Click Cisco Options. 13. Click Enable Cisco Compatible Extensions to enable Cisco Compatible Extensions (CCX) security (Allow Fast Roaming (CCKM), Enable Radio Management Support, Enable Mixed Cells Mode.). 15. Click Enable Radio Management Support. Use Radio Management to detect rogue access points. 16. Click OK to return to the Security Settings. LEAP User:
1. Select one of the following authentication methods:
m Use the Windows logon user name and password: Allows the 802.1x credentials to match your Windows user name and password. The user's credentials are retrieved from the user's Windows log-
on process. The credentials are only used if the user has no password defined in the Windows log-on credentials or if there is a problem capturing the Windows log-on credentials. NOTE: This option is unavailable if Pre-Logon Connect is not selected during installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Refer to Install or Uninstall the Single Sign On Feature. m Prompt for the user name and password: Select to prompt for the user name and password before you connect to the wireless network. The user name and password must be first set in the authentication server by the administrator. m Use the following user name and password: Select to save your user name and password for future use when an 802.1x authentication profile is used. n User Name: This user name must match the user name that is set in the authentication server by the administrator prior to client authentication. The user name is case-sensitive. This name specifies the identity supplied to the authenticator by the authentication protocol. This user's identity is securely transmitted to the server only after an encrypted channel has been established. n Domain: Name of the domain on the authentication server. The server name identifies a domain or one of its sub-domains (for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry. zeelans.com). NOTE: The domain name should be obtained from the administrator. n Password: Specifies the user password. The password characters are seen as asterisks. This password must match the password that is set in the authentication server. n Confirm Password: Reenter the user password. 2. Click OK to save the setting and close the page. Cisco Compatible Extensions Options Cisco Options: Use to enable or disable Radio Management and Mixed Cells Mode or Allow Fast Roaming
(CCKM). NOTE: Cisco Compatible Extensions are automatically enabled for CKIP, LEAP or EAP-FAST profiles. To override this behavior, select or clear options on this page. l Allow Fast Roaming (CCKM): Select to enable the client wireless adapter for fast-secure roaming. When a wireless LAN is configured for fast reconnection, an EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, PEAP-GTC, PEAP-MSCHAPv2 or LEAP-enabled client device can roam from one access point to another without involving the main server. Use Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM), an access point configured to provide Wireless Domain Services (WDS), to take the place of the RADIUS server and authenticate the client without perceptible delay in voice or other time-sensitive applications. Enable Cisco Compatible Options: Select to enable Cisco Compatible Extensions for this wireless connection profile. l Enable Radio Management Support: Select to have your wireless adapter provide radio management to the Cisco infrastructure. If the Cisco Radio Management utility is used on the infrastructure, it configures radio parameters, detects interference and rogue access points. Default setting is selected. l Enable Mixed Cells Mode: Select to allow the wireless adapter to communicate with mixed cells. A mixed cell is a wireless network in which there are both devices that use WEP and devices that do not. Refer to Mixed Cells Mode for more information. The default setting is cleared. Set up a Client with EAP-FAST Network Authentication In Cisco Compatible Extensions, Version 3 (CCXv3), Cisco added support for EAP-FAST (Extensible Authentication Protocol-Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling), which uses protected access credentials (PACs) to establish an authenticated tunnel between a client and a server. Cisco Compatible Extensions, Version 4 (CCXv4) improves the provisioning methods for enhanced security and provides innovations for enhanced security, mobility, quality of service, and network management. Cisco Compatible Extensions, Version 3 (CCXv3) To set up a client with EAP-FAST authentication with Cisco Compatible Extensions, version 3 (CCXv3):
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile Wizard's General Settings. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 4. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to open the Security Settings. 7. Click Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:
m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select EAP-FAST to be used with this connection. NOTE: If CCXv4 Application Setting was not installed through an Administrator Package, only EAP-
FAST User settings are available for configuration. Refer to EAP-FAST User Settings. Step 1 of 2: EAP-FAST Provisioning 1. Click Disable EAP-FAST Enhancements (CCXv4) to allow provisioning inside a server-unauthenticated TLS tunnel (Unauthenticated-TLS-Server Provisioning Mode). 2. Click Select server to view any unauthenticated PACs that have already been provisioned and reside on this computer. NOTE: If the provisioned PAC is valid, Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless does not prompt the user for acceptance of the PAC. If the PAC is invalid, Intel PROSet/Wireless fails the provisioning automatically. A status message is displayed in the Wireless Event Viewer that an administrator can review on the user's computer. To import a PAC:
l Click Select server to open the Protected Access Credentials (PAC) list. l Click Import to import a PAC that resides on this computer or a server. l Select the PAC and click Open. l Enter the PAC password (optional). l Click OK to close this page. The selected PAC is added to PAC list. 3. Click Next to select the credential retrieval method or click OK to save the EAP-FAST settings and return to the Profiles list. The PAC is used for this wireless profile. Step 2 of 2: EAP-FAST Additional Information To perform client authentication in the established tunnel, a client sends a user name and password to authenticate and establish client authorization policy. 1. Click User Credentials to select the credentials retrieval method:
m Use the Windows logon user name and password: The user credentials are retrieved from the Windows log on process. NOTE: This option is unavailable if Pre-Logon Connect is not selected during installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Refer to Install or Uninstall the Single Sign On Feature. m Prompt for the user name and password: Prompts for user name and password before you connect to the wireless network. The user name and password must first be set in the authentication server by the administrator. m Use the following user name and password: The user name and password must be first set in the authentication server by the administrator. n User Name: This user name must match the user name that is set in the authentication server. n Domain: Name of the domain on the authentication server. The server name identifies a domain or one of its sub-domains (for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry.zeelans.com). NOTE: Contact your administrator to obtain the domain name. n Password: This password must match the password that is set in the authentication server. The entered password characters display as asterisks. n Confirm Password: Reenter the user password. 2. Click OK to save the settings and close the page. Server verification is not required. Cisco Compatible Extensions, Version 4 (CCXv4) To set up a client with EAP-FAST authentication with Cisco Compatible Extensions, version 4 (CCXv4):
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile Wizard's General Settings. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 4. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to open the Security Settings. 7. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 8. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:
m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 9. Data Encryption: Select AES-CCMP. 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select EAP-FAST to be used with this connection. Step 1 of 3: EAP-FAST Provisioning With CCXv4, EAP-FAST supports two modes for provisioning:
l Server-Authenticated Mode: Provisioning inside a server authenticated (TLS) tunnel. l Server-Unauthenticated Mode: Provisioning inside an unauthenticated (TLS) tunnel. NOTE: Server-Authenticated Mode provides significant security advantages over Server-
Unauthenticated Mode even when EAP-MSCHAPv2 is being used as an inner method. This mode protects the EAP-MSCHAPv2 exchanges from potential Man-in-the-Middle attacks by verifying the servers authenticity before exchanging MSCHAPv2. Therefore, Server-Authenticated Mode is preferred whenever it is possible. EAP-FAST peer must use Server-Authenticated Mode whenever a certificate or public key is available to authenticate the server and ensure the best security practices. Provisioning of Protected Access Credentials (PAC):
EAP-FAST uses a PAC key to protect the user credentials that are exchanged. All EAP-FAST authenticators are identified by an authority identity (A-ID). The local authenticator sends its AID to an authenticating client, and the client checks its database for a matching AID. If the client does not recognize the AID, it requests a new PAC. NOTE: If the provisioned Protected Access Credential (PAC) is valid, Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless does not prompt the user for acceptance of the PAC. If the PAC is invalid, Intel PROSet/Wireless fails the provisioning automatically. A status message is displayed in the Wireless Event Viewer that an administrator can review on the user's computer. 1. Verify that Disable EAP-FAST Enhancements (CCXv4) is not selected. Allow unauthenticated provisioning and Allow authenticated provisioning are selected by default. Once a PAC is selected from the Default Server, you can deselect any of these provisioning methods. 2. Default Server: None is selected as the default. Click Select Server to select a PAC from the default PAC authority server or select a server from the Server group list. The EAP-FAST Default Server (PAC Authority) selection page opens. NOTE: Server groups are only listed if you have installed an Administrator Package that contains EAP-FAST Authority ID (A-ID) Group settings. PAC distribution can also be completed manually (out-of-band). Manual provisioning enables you to create a PAC for a user on an ACS server and then import it into a user's computer. A PAC file can be protected with a password, which the user needs to enter during a PAC import. To import a PAC:
1. Click Import to import a PAC from the PAC server. 2. Click Open. 3. Enter the PAC password. (Optional) 4. Click OK closes this page. The selected PAC is used for this wireless profile. EAP-FAST CCXv4 enables support for the provisioning of other credentials beyond the PAC currently provisioned for tunnel establishment. The credential types supported include trusted CA certificate, machine credentials for machine authentication, and temporary user credentials used to bypass user authentication. Use a certificate (TLS Authentication) 1. Click Use a certificate (TLS Authentication) 2. Click Identity Protection when the tunnel is protected. 3. Select one of the following:
m Use a user certificate on this computer. Click Select to choose the user certificate. Click OK. Proceed to Step 4. m Use the certificate issued to this computer. Proceed to Step 5. m Use my smart card. Select if the certificate resides on a smart card. Proceed to Step 5. 4. User Name: Enter the user name assigned to the user certificate. 5. Click Next. Step 2 of 3: EAP-FAST Additional Information If you selected Use a certificate (TLS Authentication) and Use a user certificate on this computer, click Next (no roaming identity is required) and proceed to Step 3 to configure EAP-FAST Server certificate settings. If you do not need to configure EAP-FAST server settings, click OK to save your settings and return to the Profiles page. If you selected to use a smart card, add the roaming identity, if required. Click OK to save your settings and return to the Profiles page. If you did not select Use a certificate (TLS Authentication), click Next to select an Authentication Protocol. CCXv4 permits additional credentials or TLS cipher suites to establish the tunnel. Authentication Protocol: Select either GTC, or MS-CHAP-V2 (Default) Generic Token Card (GTC) GTC may be used with Server-Authenticated Mode . This enable peers using other user databases as Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) and one-time password (OTP) technology to be provisioned in-band. However, the replacement may only be achieved when used with the TLS cipher suites that ensure server authentication. To configure a one-time password:
1. Authentication Protocol: Select GTC (Generic Token Card). 2. User Credentials: Select Prompt each time I connect 3. On connection prompt for: Select one of the following:
m Static Password: On connection, enter the user credentials. m One-time password (OTP): Obtain the password from a hardware token device. m PIN (Soft Token): Obtain the password from a soft token program. 4. Click OK. 5. Select the profile on the Wireless Networks list. 6. Click Connect. When prompted, enter the user name, domain and one-time password (OTP). 7. Click OK. MS-CHAP-V2. This parameter specifies the authentication protocol operating over the PEAP tunnel. 1. User Credentials: Select one of the following options:
m Use Windows Logon: Allows the 802.1x credentials to match your Windows user name and password. Before connection, you are prompted for your Windows logon credentials. NOTE: This option is unavailable if Pre-Logon Connect is not selected during installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Refer to Install or Uninstall the Single Sign On Feature.
(encrypted) saved in the profile. network. server. m Prompt each time I connect: Prompts for user name and password every time you log onto the m Use the following user name and password: The user name and password are securely n User Name: This user name must match the user name that is set in the authentication n Domain: Name of the domain on the authentication server. The server name identifies a domain or one of its subdomains (for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry. zeelans.com). NOTE: Contact your administrator to obtain the domain name. n Password: This password must match the password that is set in the authentication server. The entered password characters display as asterisks. n Confirm Password: Reenter the user password. 2. Roaming Identity: If the Roaming Identity is cleared, %domain%\%username% is the default. When 802.1x MS RADIUS is used as an authentication server, the server authenticates the device that uses the Roaming Identity user name from Intel PROSet/Wireless software, and ignores the Authentication Protocol MS-CHAP-V2 user name. This feature is the 802.1x identity supplied to the authenticator. Microsoft IAS RADIUS accepts only a valid user name (dotNet user) for EAP clients. When 802.1x MS RADIUS is used, enter a valid user name. For all other servers, this is optional. Therefore, it is recommended to use the desired realm (for example, anonymous@myrealm) instead of a true identity. Step 3 of 3: EAP-FAST Server Authenticated-TLS-Server Provisioning Mode is supported using a trusted CA certificate, a self-signed server certificate, or server public keys and GTC as the inner EAP method. Validate Server Certificate:
l Validate Server Certificate:
l Certificate Issuer: The server certificate received during TLS message exchange must be issued by this certificate authority (CA). Trusted intermediate certificate authorities and root authorities whose certificates exist in the system store are available for selection. If Any Trusted CA is selected, any CA in the list is acceptable. l Allow intermediate certificates: The server certificate received during negotiation may have been issued directly by the CA or additionally by one of its intermediate certificate authorities. Select to allow a number of unspecified certificates to be in the server certificate chain between the server certificate and the specified CA. If cleared, then the specified CA must have been directly issued by the server certificate. l Specify Server or Certificate Name: Select if you want to specify your server or certificate name. The server name or a domain to which the server belongs, depends on which of the two options below has been selected. l Server name must match exactly: When selected, the server name entered must match exactly the server name found on the certificate. The server name should include the fully qualified domain name (for example, Servername.Domain name). l Domain name must end in specified name: When selected, the server name identifies a domain and the certificate must have a server name belonging to this domain or to one of its sub-domains
(for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry.zeelans.com). NOTE: These parameters should be obtained from the administrator. 3. Click OK to close the security settings. EAP-FAST User Settings NOTE: If an Administrator Package was installed on a user' computer that did not apply the Cisco Compatible Extensions, Version 4 Application Setting, only EAP-FAST User settings are available for configuration. To set up a client with EAP-FAST authentication:
1. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 2. On the Profile page, click Add to open the Create Wireless Profile Wizard's General Settings. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 4. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 5. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 6. Click Next to open the Security Settings. 7. Click Enterprise Security. 8. Network Authentication: Select WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. 9. Data Encryption: Select one of the following:
m TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism. m AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) is used as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. AES-CCMP is recommended. 10. Enable 802.1x: Selected. 11. Authentication Type: Select EAP-FAST to be used with this connection. 12. Click Cisco Options to select Allow Fast Roaming (CCKM) which enables the client wireless adapter for fast secure roaming. EAP-FAST User:
Select the credential retrieval method:
1. Select the user credentials Windows log on process. l Use the Windows logon user name and password: The user credentials are retrieved from the NOTE: This option is unavailable if Pre-Logon Connect is not selected during installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Refer to Install or Uninstall the Single Sign On Feature. l Prompt for the user name and password: Prompts for user name and password before you connect to the wireless network. The user name and password must first be set in the authentication server by the administrator. l Use the following user name and password: The user name and password must be first set in the authentication server by the administrator. n User Name: This user name must match the user name that is set in the authentication server. n Domain: Name of the domain on the authentication server. The server name identifies a domain or one of its sub-domains (for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry. zeelans.com). NOTE: Contact your administrator to obtain the domain name. n Password: This password must match the password that is set in the authentication server. The entered password characters display as asterisks. n Confirm Password: Reenter the user password. 2. Allow automatic provisioning of Protected Access Credentials (PAC):
EAP-FAST uses a PAC key to protect the user credentials that are exchanged. All EAP-FAST authenticators are identified by an authority identity (A-ID). The local authenticator sends its AID to an authenticating client, and the client checks its database for a matching AID. If the client does not recognize the AID, it requests a new PAC. Click PACs to view any PACs that have already been provisioned and reside on this computer. A PAC must have already been obtained to clear Allow automatic provisioning on the Security Settings. NOTE: If the provisioned Protected Access Credential (PAC) is valid, Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless does not prompt the user for acceptance of the PAC. If the PAC is invalid, Intel PROSet/Wireless fails the provisioning automatically. A status message is displayed in the Wireless Event Viewer that an administrator can review on the user's computer. PAC distribution can also be completed manually (out-of-band). Manual provisioning enables you to create a PAC for a user on an ACS server and then import it into a user's computer. A PAC file can be protected with a password, which the user needs to enter during a PAC import. To import a PAC:
1. Click PACs to open the Protected Access Credentials (PAC) list. 2. Click Import to import a PAC that resides on this computer or a server. 3. Select the PAC and click Open. 4. Enter the PAC password (optional). 5. Click OK to close this page. The selected PAC is added to PAC list. 6. Click OK to save the EAP-FAST settings and return to the Profiles list. The PAC is used for this wireless profile. Back to Top Back to Contents l Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Troubleshooting: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide l Intel(R) Wireless Troubleshooter l Wireless Event Viewer l Resolve Errors Intel Wireless Troubleshooter The Intel Wireless Troubleshooter is an application that can help you resolve wireless network connection issues. When a connection issue is detected, a desktop alert appears at the bottom right corner of your desktop screen. Once you click on the desktop alert, a diagnostic message displays the steps recommended to resolve the connection issue. For example, if a connection issue occurred because of an invalid password, the Profile Wizard application is launched when you click on a displayed hyperlink. You can also launch Wireless Event Viewer and enable or disable alert notifications. The Intel Wireless Troubleshooter is supported under Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows 2000. Intel Wireless Troubleshooter Description The Intel Wireless Troubleshooter contains two panes. The left pane displays a list of available tools. The right pane displays the current connection issue. This pane is divided into two sections: the error message and the recommended action. The recommended action contains descriptions about available utilities and helps to resolve the associated connection issue. If you click on a help link, the help text is displayed in a window. If you click on the associated issue resolution link, a program is launched to resolve the connection issue. Available Help Date Time error message:
l Description of error. l Link to resolve error (if available). See Resolve Errors below. l Link to recommended steps to resolve error. Wireless Event Viewer Launches Wireless Event Viewer. Disable Notification/Enable Notification Menu Options Wireless Event Viewer Select to disable or enable alert notifications. File Help Exit: Click to exit the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter application. Intel(R) Wireless Troubleshooter Help: Displays online help on the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. About: Displays version information for the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. The Wireless Event Viewer program displays a list of error log records. You can save all available log records to a binary format file for sending to customer support. To launch Wireless Event Viewer, from the Tools menu, click Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Click Wireless Event Viewer. Wireless Event Viewer Description Name File Help?
Wireless Event Viewer Information Save As Clear Resolve Errors Description To change the storage location of the log file. 1. Click Settings to open the Wireless Event Viewer Settings. 2. Specify the default folder for saved log files: The current folder is displayed. The default location is the desktop. Click Browse to specify a new folder location. 3. Click OK to close and apply the new changes. Click Cancel to close without applying any changes. Exit: Click to exit Wireless Event Viewer and return to the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Provides help information for this page. About: Displays version information for the Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Level: The severity level of the connection issue is indicated by an icon. The severity levels are:
l Information l Error l Warning Description: Brief description of the connection issue. Date and Time: Date and time of the detected connection issue. This column can be sorted in ascending or descending order. Click the column header to sort the displayed events. Saves the available log. Use the suggested name or change it. Removes the information in the Wireless Event Viewer. Use the following recommendations to resolve network connection issues detected by Intel Wireless Troubleshooter. Authentication failed due to invalid user credentials Authentication failed due to invalid user name Authentication failed due to an invalid server certificate Authentication failed due to invalid server credentials Authentication failed due to invalid server identity Authentication failed due to an invalid user certificate Incorrect PIN for retrieving certificate Authentication failed because the AAA server is unavailable The wireless adapter failed to get a valid IP address Authentication failed because timer expired Smart Card was unexpectedly removed Disconnection from an Access Point GSM adapter was unexpectedly removed The AAA Server Rejected the EAP Method Administrator Profile Failed to Authenticate Administrator Profile Failed to Obtain an IP Address from the DHCP Server The Application Failed to Start Authentication failed due to invalid user credentials: Reenter credentials This authentication error can be caused by invalid user credentials (could be user name, password or other form of user credentials). Use the following steps to resolve this error:
1. Select a TTLS, PEAP, LEAP or EAP-FAST profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. The 802.1x Authentication Type should be selected. 5. Select Use the following for User Credentials. 6. Verify the User Name, Domain, and password information. l If Use Windows logon or Prompt each time I connect is selected, verify that you use the correct user credentials information when you connect to the wireless network. 7. Click OK to save the settings. Authentication failed due to invalid user name: Reenter user name This authentication error can be caused by an invalid user name. Use the following steps to resolve this error:
1. Select the appropriate profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. Select the appropriate 802.1x Authentication Type. m For TTLS, PEAP, LEAP or EAP-FAST profiles: Use the following option should be selected. m Verify the User Name information. 5. Click OK to save the settings. Authentication failed due to an invalid server certificate: Select another certificate This authentication error can be caused by an invalid server certificate. Use the following steps to resolve this error:
1. Select the appropriate profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. The appropriate 802.1x Authentication Type is selected. l For TTLS and PEAP profiles: Verify that the correct Authentication Type is selected from the list. Click Next to select another certificate from the list of installed certificates or specify another server or certificate name. Click OK. m For TLS profiles: Click Select and choose another certificate from the list of installed certificates and click OK. Notes about certificates: The specified identity should match who the certificate is issued to and should be registered on the authentication server (for example, RADIUS server) that is used by the authenticator. Your certificate must be valid with respect to the authentication server. This requirement depends on the authentication server and generally means that the authentication server must know the issuer of your certificate as a Certificate Authority. You should be logged in with the same user name you used when the certificate was installed. 5. Click Close. 6. Click OK to save the settings. Authentication failed due to invalid server credentials: Reenter server credentials This authentication error can be caused by an invalid server (domain) credential. Use the following steps to resolve this error:
1. Select the appropriate profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. Select the appropriate 802.1x Authentication Type. l For TTLS and PEAP profiles: Select Use the following for user credentials. n Verify the domain information. n If Use Windows logon or Prompt each time I connect is selected, verify that the correct domain credentials information is used when you connect to the wireless network. 5. Click OK to save the settings. Authentication failed due to invalid server identity: Reenter server name This authentication error can be caused by invalid server identity information. Use the following steps to resolve this error:
1. Select the appropriate profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. Select the appropriate 802.1x Authentication Type. 5. For TTLS and PEAP profiles: Verify that the Roaming Identity server name is correct. 6. Click OK to save the settings. Authentication failed due to an invalid user certificate: Reenter user credentials This authentication error can be caused by invalid server (domain) credentials. Use the following steps to resolve this error:
1. Select the appropriate profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. Select the appropriate 802.1x Authentication Type. 5. For TTLS and PEAP profiles: Verify that the correct Authentication Type is selected. 6. Click Select and choose another certificate from the list of installed certificates. 7. Click OK. 8. For TLS profiles: Click Select and choose another certificate from the list of installed certificates. 9. Click OK. Notes about Certificates: The specified identity should match who the certificate is issued to and should be registered on the authentication server (for example, RADIUS server) that is used by the authenticator. Your certificate must be valid with respect to the authentication server. This requirement depends on the authentication server and generally means that the authentication server must know the issuer of your certificate as a Certificate Authority. You should be logged in with the same user name you used when the certificate was installed. 9. Click Close. 10. Click OK to save the settings. Incorrect PIN for retrieving certificate: Reenter PIN The certificate retrieval failed because of an incorrect PIN. Recommended action: Enter the correct PIN. Authentication failed because the AAA server is unavailable The wireless adapter is associated to the access point, but the 802.1x authentication cannot be completed because of a response from the authentication server. Use the following steps to resolve this error:
1. Select the profile 2. Click Connect and attempt to associate with the network and authenticate with the server. The wireless adapter failed to get a valid IP address This error can be due to an authentication failure with the network, incorrect encryption keys, or because of a DHCP server malfunction. Use the following steps to resolve this error:
1. Select the appropriate profile from the Profiles list. 2. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 3. Click Next to open the Security Settings. Enterprise Security is selected. 4. Enter the encryption key. 5. Click OK to save the security settings for the profile. Authentication failed because timer expired Authentication failed because the authentication timer expired while this mobile station was authenticating. A rogue access point or a problem with the RADIUS server could have been the reason for the problem. Recommended action:
l If a rogue access point is suspected, consider adding this access point to the excluded access point list to prevent the wireless adapter from connecting to this access point in the future. l If a rogue access point is not suspected, click the profile in the profile list. Click Connect to associate with the network and attempt to authenticate with the server. Smart Card was unexpectedly removed This error occurred because the Smart Card was unexpectedly removed. Use the following a steps to resolve this error:
1. Insert the Smart Card. 2. Select the 802.1x EAP-SIM authentication profile. 3. Click Connect to try to associate with the network. Disconnection from an Access Point The following error messages display when the wireless adapter is disconnected from the network access point. Disconnect from access point due to failed associations. Disconnect from access point due to authentication failures. Disconnect from access point due to TKIP Michael Integrity check failure. Disconnect from access point due to Class 2 frame non-authentication failure. Disconnect from access point due to Class 3 frame non-association failure. Disconnect from access point due to reassociation failure. Disconnect from access point due to Information Element failure. Disconnect from access point due to EAPOL-Key protocol four-way handshake failure. Disconnect from access point due to 802.1x authentication failure. Recommended action: Select the profile. Click Connect and try to associate with the network. GSM adapter was unexpectedly removed See Smart Card was unexpectedly removed The AAA Server Rejected the EAP Method This error occurs when the AAA Server does not accept the configured authentication. Use the following steps to resolve this error:
1. Double-click the Taskbar icon to open Intel PROSet/Wireless. 2. Click Profiles on the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window. 3. Select the associated or last-used profile from the Profiles list. 4. Click Properties to open the General Settings. 5. Click Next to open the Security Settings. 6. Verify that Enable 802.1x is selected. 7. Verify that the correct authentication type is selected. 8. Enter the required security information. 9. Click OK. The profile is now reapplied. Intel PROSet/Wireless attempts to connect to the wireless network. Error Occurred Because the GSM Adapter Was Unexpectedly Removed This error occurs when the GSM adapter is not fully inserted or is unexpectedly removed from the mobile station. Use the following steps to resolve this error:
1. Reinsert the GSM adapter. 2. Double-click the Intel PROSet/Wireless Software icon at the bottom right of the screen. 3. Select the associated or last-used profile from the profiles list. 4. Click Connect. The profile is now re-applied. Intel PROSet/Wireless Software attempts to connect to the wireless network. An Administrator Profile Failed to Authenticate This error occurs when the credentials in the profile are not accepted by the authenticator (for example, an access point or AAA server). Please contact your Administrator to resolve this problem. Administrator Profile Failed to Obtain an IP Address from the DHCP Server This error can occur due to an authentication failure with the network, incorrect encryption keys, or because of a DHCP server malfunction. Please contact your Administrator to resolve this problem. The Application Failed to Start The application that you specified to start when this profile connected, could not be found. Verify the path and file name in the Profile Wizard Advanced Settings. To verify the path and file name:
1. From the Intel PROSet/Wireless main window, click Profiles. 2. Select the Profile. 3. Click Properties. 4. Click Advanced. 5. Click Enable Start Application. Verify that the file name and file location path are correct. 6. Click OK to close the Advanced Settings. 7. Click OK to close the General Settings and return to the Profiles list. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Administrator Tool: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide l Set Administrator Password l Administrator Packages l Administrator Profiles m Persistent m Pre-Logon m Voice over IP (VoIP) l Administrator Tool Settings l Application Settings l Adapter Settings l Software l EAP-FAST A-ID Groups l Administrator Tasks The Administrator Tool is used by the person who has administrator privileges on this computer. This tool is used to configure common (shared) profiles, pre-logon profiles, and persistent connection profiles.The Administrator Tool can also be used by an Information Technology department to configure user settings within the Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless software and to create custom install packages to export to other systems. The Administrator Tool is located on the Tools menu. It must be selected during installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software or the feature is not displayed in the Tools menu. Set Administrator Password Users cannot modify Administrator settings or profiles unless they have the password for this tool. When you first access the Administrator Tool, you are required to enter a password. The password must not exceed 100 characters. Null passwords are not allowed. 1. Enter password: Create a password (maximum 100 characters). 2. Confirm Password: Reenter the password. 3. Click OK. The Open Administrator Package displays. To change the existing password:
1. Click Administrator Tool from the Tools menu. 2. Click Change Password on the password entry form. 3. Old Password: Enter the existing password. 4. New Password: Enter the new password. 5. Confirm Password: Reenter the new password again. 6. Click OK to save the new password and enter the Administrator Tool. Administrator Packages The Administrator Packages are used to save administrative profiles and other settings. You can copy or send this self-extracting executable to clients on your network. When the executable runs, the contents are installed and configured on the destination computer. To create a new package:
1. On the Tools menu, click Administrator Tool. 2. Enter your password to the Administrator Tool. 3. Administrator Package: Click Create a new package. 4. Click OK. 5. Select Include Settings on the Profiles, Application Settings, Adapter Settings, or Software pages to configure the options to be included in the package. 6. Click Close. 7. You are notified: The current package is changed. Would you like to save the changes?
8. Click Yes. Save the executable file to a directory on the local disk drive. 9. Click Save. The file is created. NOTE: This process may take several minutes. 10. Click Finished to view the package contents. m Click Apply this file to this computer if you want to use the package configuration on the Administrator's computer. m Copy the executable file to any user's computer to install the configuration that has been saved in the package. It is a silent install. NOTE: You can also select Save Package on the Administrator Tool File Menu to save the package. To edit a package:
1. Access the Administrator Tool. 2. On the Open Administrator Package page, click Open to edit an existing package. 3. Click Browse. Locate the package's executable file. 4. Click Open. Make your updates. 5. Click Close. 6. You are notified: The current package is changed. Would you like to save the changes?
7. Click Yes. Save the executable file to a directory on the local disk drive. NOTE: You can also select Open Package on the Administrator Tool File menu to edit an Administrator Package. Administrator Profiles Administrator Profiles are owned and managed by the network administrator or the administrator of this computer. These profiles are common or shared by all users on this computer. However, end users cannot modify these profiles. They can only be modified from the Administrator Tool, which is password protected. There are three types of Administrator Profiles: Persistent, Pre-Logon/Common and Voice over IP (VoIP). Persistent Connection Persistent profiles are applied at boot time or whenever no one is logged on the computer. After a user logs off, a Persistent profile maintains a wireless connection either until the computer is turned off or a different user logs on. Persistent Connect key points:
l The following types of profiles can be created as Persistent profiles:
m All profiles that do not require 802.1x authentication (for example, Open authentication with WEP encryption, Open authentication with no encryption). m All profiles with 802.1x authentication that have the credentials saved: MD5, LEAP, EAP-FAST. m Profiles with security settings that include the "Use the following user name and password" option. m Profiles that use the machine certificate to authenticate. NOTE: Intel PROSet/Wireless supports machine certificates. However, they are not displayed in the certificate listings. m WPA-Enterprise profiles that do not use a user certificate. m WPA-Personal profiles. l Persistent profiles are applied at system power up and after a user logs off. To create a Persistent Profile:
1. Click Include Profiles. 2. Click Persistent. 3. Click Add to open the General Settings. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 6. Operating Mode: Network (Infrastructure) is selected. 7. Administrator Profile Type: Persistent: Active when no users are logged on is selected. 8. Click Next. 9. Click Enterprise Security to open the Security Settings. See Enterprise Settings for 802.1x security configuration information. 10. Click OK. Pre-Logon Connection Pre-Logon/Common profiles are applied prior to a user log on. If Single Sign On support is installed, the profile is applied and connection is made prior to the the Windows log on sequence (pre-logon). If Single Sign On support is not installed, the profile is applied once the user session is active. Pre-logon/Common profiles always appear at the top of a the Profiles list. A user can still prioritize their own profiles that they have created but they cannot reprioritize Pre-logon/
Common Profiles. Since these profiles appear at the top of the profiles list, Intel PROSet/
Wireless automatically attempts to connect to the Administrator profiles first before any user created profiles. NOTE: Only administrators can create or export Pre-Logon/Common profiles. Pre-Logon Connect key points are:
l Pre-Logon Connect is active only at the Windows log on. l The following types of profiles can be created as Pre-Logon profiles:
m 802.1x MD5, LEAP, EAP-FAST profiles that use either the "Use the Windows logon user name and password" or "Use the following user name and password"
credentials when configuring the profile's security settings. m 802.1x PEAP or TTLS profiles with user or machine certificates (the user must have administrative rights to use machine certificates). m TLS profiles that use digital certificates to verify the identity of a client and a server. m EAP-SIM profiles that use a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card to validate your credentials with the network. m All non-802.1x (Open and WEP) Common or User Based profiles. l A Pre-Logon profile is applied at Windows user log-on time. Pre-Logon/Common Connection Status Pre-Logon support is installed during a Custom install of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. Refer to Install and Uninstall the Software for more information. NOTE: If the Single Sign On or Pre-Logon Connect features are not installed, an administrator is still able to create Pre-Logon/Common profiles for export to a user's computer. The following describes how the Pre-Logon Connect feature functions from system power-up. The assumption is that there is a saved profile with valid security settings marked with "Use Windows Logon user name and password" that are applied at the time of Windows log on. 1. After a system power-up, enter your Windows log on domain, user name, and password. 2. Click OK. The Pre-Logon profile Status page displays the progress of the network connection. After the wireless adapter is connected to the network access point, the Status page closes and the Windows user logs on. l If the corresponding access point rejects your credentials during the Pre-Logon connect, the profile credentials prompts you for your user credentials. l Enter your credentials. l Click OK. The profile is applied and the Status page displays the progress of the connection status until you are logged onto Windows. l Click Cancel on the Credentials page to select another profile. NOTE: A user certificate can only be accessed by a user that has been authenticated on the computer. Therefore, a user should log onto the computer once (using either a wired connection, alternate profile or local log in) before using a pre-logon profile that authenticates with a user certificate When a user logs off, any wireless connection is disconnected and a persistent profile (if one is available) is applied. Under certain circumstances it is desirable to maintain the current connection (for example, if user specific data needs to be uploaded to the server post-log off or when roaming profiles are used). Create a profile which is marked as both pre-logon and persistent to achieve this functionality. If such a profile is active when the user logs off, the connection is maintained. To create a Pre-Logon/Common Profile:
1. Click Include Profiles. 2. Click Pre-Logon/Common. 3. Click Add to open the General Settings. 4. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 5. Profile Name: Enter a descriptive profile name. 6. Operating Mode: Network (Infrastructure) is selected. 7. Administrator Profile Type: Pre-logon/Common: Active when a user is logged on. This profile is shared by all users. This profile type is already selected. 8. Click Next. 9. Click Advanced to open the Advanced Settings. Use the Advanced Settings to set the following:
m Auto-Connect: Select to automatically or manually connect to a profile. m Auto-Import this profile (for network administrators only). m Mandatory Access Point: Select to associate the wireless adapter with a specific access point. m Password Protection: Select to password protect a profile. m Start application: Specify a program to be started when a wireless connection is made. m User Name Format:
An administrator can select the user name format for the authentication server. The choices are:
m user (default) m user@domain m user@domain.com m DOMAIN\user 10. Click OK to close the Advanced Settings. 11. Click Enterprise Security to open the Security Settings. See Enterprise Security for 802.1x security configuration information. 12. Click OK to save the profile and add it to the Administrator profiles list. NOTE: If a Persistent connection was already established, a Pre-Login/Common profile is ignored if the profile is configured with both Pre-Logon/Common and Persistent connection options. Voice over IP (VoIP) Profiles Intel PROSet/Wireless software supports VoIP third-party soft-phone applications. Third party VoIP applications support Voice Codecs. Codecs are used to encode voice for transmission across IP networks. Codecs generally provide a compression capability to save network bandwidth. Intel PROSet/Wireless software supports the following International Telecommunications Union
(ITU) codec standards:
Codec Algorithm Data Rate
(Kbps) Comments ITU G.711 ITU G.722 ITU G.723 ITU G.726 ITU G.728 ITU G.729 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) 64 G.711 with mu-law used in North America and Japan, while G.711 with A-law used in the rest of the world. SBADPCM (Sub-Band Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation) Multi-rate Coder ADPCM (Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation) LD-CELP (Low-Delay Code Excited Linear Prediction) CS-ACELP (Conjugate Structure Algebraic-Code Excited Linear Prediction) 48, 56 and 64 5.3 and 6.4 16, 24, 32, and 40 16 8 An administrator can create profiles that use pre-existing VoIP profiles to configure various codec data rates and frame rates to improve voice quality in VoIP transmissions. To create a VoIP profile:
NOTE: Ensure Voice over IP is not disabled in the Administrator Tool Application Settings. It is enabled by default. 1. Click Include Profiles. 2. Select a profile from the list. 3. Click Properties to open the Create VoIP Profiles page. 4. Select the Codec bandwidth, application usage and Frame Rate. Codec Usage Frame Rate l 10 l 20 l 30 l Interactive Voice l Audio Conference l Voice Data l Video l Streaming Audio l G711_64kbps l G711_56kbps l G711_48kbps l G722_64kbps l G722_56kbps l G722_48kbps l G722_1_32kbps l G722_1_24kbps l G722_1_16kbps l G723_1_6_4kbps l G723_1_5_3kbps l G726_16kbps l G726_24kbps l G726_32kbps l G726_40kbps l G728_12_8kbps l G728_16kbps l G729_8kbps l G729a_8kbps l G729b_8kbps l G729ab_8kbps l G729d_6_4kbps l G729e_8kbps l G729e_11_8kbps l GIPS_iPCM_VARIABLE l G722_2_VARIABLE l SPEEX_VARIABLE l GIPS_iSAC_VARIABLE 5. Click OK to return to the Profiles list. 6. Click Close to save the profile settings to a package. Administrator Tool Settings An Administrator can determine which order Administrator profiles are placed in the Administrator Tool's Profiles list. 1. Click the Administrator Tool Tools menu. 2. Click Settings to open the Administrator Tool Settings. m Select Insert on Top to always place Administrator profiles at the top of the Administrator Tool's Profiles list. m Select Insert on Bottom to always place Administrator profiles at the bottom the Administrator Tool's Profiles list. 3. Click OK to close and return to the Administrator Tool. Application Settings An administrator can select which level of control that users have over their wireless network connections. To configure Application Settings:
1. Click Include settings. 2. Enable or disable each setting listed in the table below. Name Description 802.11a Radio On/Off Control Select Add 802.11a Radio On/Off Selection to allow a user to turn on or off the 802.11a radio on their computer. This adds the 802.11a Radio Off control to the Taskbar menu and the Intel PROSet/
Wireless main window on a user's computer. Once this feature is installed on a user's computer, follow the instructions below to turn on or off the 802.11a radio control. To turn off the 802.11a Radio:
1. On the Intel PROSet/Wireless Main window, click the Wireless On button. The list of radio options are displayed. 2. Select 802.11a Radio Off. The 802.11a radio is now inactive. To turn on the 802.11a Radio:
1. On the Intel PROSet/Wireless Main window, click the 802.11a Radio Off button. The list of radio options are displayed. 2. Select Wireless On. The 802.11a radio is now active. 802.1x Authentication Administrator Tool NOTE: This option is available only for wireless adapters that support 802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g. This feature is not installed through an Administrator Package when a user's computer has an Intel(R) PRO/
Wireless 3945BG Network Connection or an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Enable a user to create or connect to profiles that support different 802.1x authentication EAP types. Select which 802.1x authentication EAP types you want enabled on a users computer: MD5, EAP-SIM, LEAP, TLS, TTLS, PEAP, EAP-FAST. Disable access to the Administrator Tool on a users computer. Application Auto Launch Application On Radio Toggle CCXv4 Select to start a batch file, executable file, or script automatically when a specific profile connects to the network. For example, start a Virtual Private Network
(VPN) session automatically whenever a user connects to a wireless network. Enables a third-party application to disable the Intel PROSet/Wireless Wireless On or Wireless Off switch. Select Enable CCSv4 to Enable Cisco Compatible Extensions, version 4 (CCXv4) features for EAP-FAST profiles. NOTE: The EAP-FAST A-ID (Authority Identifier) Groups feature in the Administrator Tool is unavailable if CCXv4 is not enabled. Select which of the following prompts to enable or disable on a user's computer for EAP-FAST PAC provisioning:
Turn on prompt and warnings for unauthenticated provisioning: Option to turn off prompts and warnings for PAC auto-provisioning if there is no PAC or there is no PAC that matches the A-
ID sent by the server that it is connected to. Turn off prompts when switching default server
(A-ID): Option to turn off prompts when a client encounters a server that has provisioned a PAC before but is not currently selected as the default server. Turn off unauthenticated provisioning after PAC is provisioned: Option to turn off auto-provisioning automatically after a PAC for that A-ID has been provisioned. NOTE: This feature is not installed through an Administrator Package when a user's computer has an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection, an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection, or an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Cache Credentials Device to Device (ad hoc) Import and Export Message On Radio Toggle Select to save credentials after a user logs on. If the wireless connection temporarily disconnects, the saved credentials are used upon reconnection. The credentials are cleared when the user logs off. NOTE: if cleared, The Prompt each time I connect option is unavailable when creating profiles Enable or disable whether a user is able to either create ad hoc profiles or join ad hoc networks. Select one of the following to enable or disable whether the user can connect to device to device networks:
l Enable device to device networking. l Enable secure device to device networking only. l Disable device to device networking. Select to either allow a user to configure profiles with device to device (ad hoc) settings or prevent configuration of device to device (ad hoc) profiles. l Show device to device application settings l Hide device to device application settings. To remove the Device to device (Ad hoc) operating mode from the Profile Wizard General Settings, select both Disable device to device networking and Hide device to device application settings. This prevents a user from creating profiles that support Device to device (Ad hoc) network. Select to import to or export profiles from a users computer. Enable permits auto import of user profiles when copied to an auto import folder. Enables a third-party application to notify a user that the Intel PROSet/Wireless radio is either on or off. Microsoft Windows XP Coexistence Select Enable Microsoft Wireless Zero Configuration and Intel PROSet/Wireless to coexist on this system. Enable this option to allow Microsoft Wireless Zero Configuration and Intel PROSet/Wireless to exist together on this system. When you select this option, you prevent Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration Service from being disabled when Intel PROset/Wireless is enabled. Pre-Logon Cisco Mode Enable Cisco Mode during a pre-logon connection. Profile Connectivity Cisco access points have the capability to support multiple wireless network names (SSIDs) but only broadcast one. In order to connect to such an access point, an attempt is made to connect with each profile. This is referred to as Cisco Mode. NOTE: The pre-logon connection may take longer to connect. Select the profile connectivity level on a users computer?
Disable Intel Profile Switching. Users are only able to connect with the first Pre-Logon (Common) profile or connect with Pre-Logon profiles only. l Allow the user to connect to all administrator profiles. l Allow the user to only connect to the first administrator profile. Security Level Select the security level on a user's computer?
Users are able to connect to profiles only with this security level. l Allow the user to connect to networks with Personal Security only. l Allow the user to connect to networks with Enterprise Security. Single Sign On Select which Administrator Profile types are enabled on a user computer?
l Persistent Connection: Profiles are active during start up and when no user is logged onto the computer. l Pre-Logon or Common Connection: Profiles are active immediately once a user logs onto the computer. Common profiles are enabled if Pre-
Logon features are not installed on a users computer. Common profiles are active after a user has logged on and the Voice over IP Wi-Fi Manager session becomes active. Persistent and Pre-Logon or Common profiles are placed at the top of the users profiles list. They cannot be changed or deleted by a user. Enables a third-party software to use the VoIP application on a user's computer. The default setting enables this feature. Select which Wi-Fi manager controls a users wireless connections. Use either the previous logged on users Wi-Fi manager or allow each user to select their preferred Wi-Fi manager. l Allow all users to switch between Intel PROSet/
Wireless and Microsoft Windows XP Wireless Zero Configuration after log on. l Wi-Fi manager at log on is determined by the active Wi-Fi manager when the last user logged off Close Help?
Closes the Administrator Tool. Provides help information for this page. Adapter Settings To configure Adapter Settings:
1. Click Include settings. 2. For each setting listed in the table below, select one of the following options:
m Use default value: Resets the setting on the user machine to the default value. m No change: Maintains the user selected value. The administrator decides not to enforce all the settings on a user's computer. The user can change the adapter setting values from the Intel PROSet/Wireless Advanced menu. m Select the value: The administrator selects the value that is to be used on the user's computer. Name Description Ad Hoc Channel There is no need to change the channel unless the other computers in the ad hoc network use a different channel from the default channel. Value: Select the allowed operating channel from the list. l 802.11b/g: Select this option when 802.11b and 802.11b (2.4 GHz) ad hoc band frequency is used. l 802.11a: Select this option when 802.11a (5 GHz) ad hoc band frequency is used. Ad Hoc Power Management Set power saving features for Device to Device (ad hoc) networks. l Disable: Select when connecting to ad hoc networks that contain stations that do not support ad hoc power management l Maximum Power Savings: Select to optimize battery life. l Noisy Environment: Select to optimize performance or connecting with multiple clients. Ad Hoc QoS Mode NOTE: This feature is not installed through an Administrator Package when a user's computer has an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection, an Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection, or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Quality of Service (QoS) control in ad hoc networks. QoS provides prioritization of traffic from the access point over a wireless LAN based on traffic classification. WMM (Wi-Fi MultiMedia) is the QoS certification of the Wi-Fi Alliance
(WFA). When WMM is enabled, the adapter uses WMM to support priority tagging and queuing capabilities for Wi-Fi networks. l WMM Enabled.(Default) l WMM Disabled NOTE: This feature is not installed through an Administrator Package when a user's computer has an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection, an Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection, or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection. Mixed Mode Protection Preamble Mode Power Management Use to avoid data collisions in a mixed 802.11b and 802.11g environment. Request to Send/Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) should be used in an environment where clients may not hear each other. CTS-to-self can be used to gain more throughput in an environment where clients are in close proximity and can hear each other. Changes the preamble length setting received by the access point during an initial connection. Always use a long preamble length to connect to an access point. Auto Tx Preamble allows automatic preamble detection. If supported, short preamble should be used. If not, use long preamble (Long Tx Preamble). NOTE: This feature is not installed through an Administrator Package when a user's computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection. Power Management: Allows you to select a balance between power consumption and adapter performance. The wireless adapter power settings slider sets a balance between the computer's power source and the battery. Select a balance between power consumption and adapter performance. PSP - Power Saving Mode CAM - Constantly Awake Mode Select one of the Power Saving Mode levels:
PSP CAM: The client adapter is powered up continuously. PSP Level 1: PSP set at maximum power. PSP Levels 2-4: PSP set to maximize power. PSP Level 5: PSP set to maximize battery life. PSP Auto: Default in PSP Level 6: Balances between power consumption and battery life. NOTE: Power consumption savings vary based on infrastructure settings. Roaming Aggressiveness This setting allows you to define how aggressively a wireless client roams to improve connection to an access point. Click Use default value to balance between not roaming and performance or select a value from the list. Values:
0: No Roaming: Your wireless client does not roam. Only significant link quality degradation causes it to roam to another access point 1-3: Allow Roaming 2: Default: Balances between not roaming and performance. Click Use default value to select. 4: Maximum Roaming. Throughput Enhancement Change the value of the Packet Burst Control. l Enable: Select to enable throughput enhancement. l Disable: (Default) - Select to disable throughput enhancement. Transmit Power If you decrease the transmit power, you reduce the radio coverage. Default Setting: Highest power setting Values:
TX Minimum: Lowest Minimum Coverage: Set the adapter to a lowest transmit power. Enable you to expand the number of coverage areas or confine a coverage area. Reduce the coverage area in high traffic areas to improve overall transmission quality and avoid congestion and interference with other devices. TX Level 1 TX Level 2 TX Level 3 TX Maximum: Highest Maximum Coverage:
Set the adapter to a maximum transmit power level. Select for maximum performance and range in environments with limited additional radio devices. NOTE: The optimal setting is for a user to always set the transmit power at the lowest possible level still compatible with the quality of their communication. This allows the maximum number of wireless devices to operate in dense areas and reduce interference with other devices that this radio shares radio spectrum with. Wireless Mode NOTE: This setting takes effect when either Infrastructure or Ad hoc mode is used. Select which band to use for connection to a wireless network:
l 802.11a only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11a networks only. l 802.11b only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11b networks only. l 802.11g only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11g networks only. l 802.11a and 802.11g only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11a and 802.11g networks only. l 802.11b and 802.11g only: Connect the wireless adapter to 802.11b and 802.11g networks only. l 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g: (Default) - Connect to either 802.11a, 802.11b or 802.11g wireless networks. NOTE: These wireless modes (modulation types) determine the discovered access points displayed in the Wireless Networks list. Saves settings and return to the previous page. Closes the page and cancels any changes. Provides help information for this page. OK Close Help?
Software Select which of the Intel PROSet/Wireless applications are installed on a user's computers. 1. Select Include Software. 2. Place the Intel PROSet/Wireless installation CD in the CD drive. 3. Specify the Intel PROSet/Wireless Software Installation program: Click Browse to locate the Autorun.exe file. 4. Click OK. 5. Specify which components you want to export: Select which applications to install on a user's computer. m Intel Wireless Troubleshooter: Helps you resolve wireless connection issues m Administrator Tool: Installs the Administrator Tool to the Tools menu. m Intel Smart Wireless Solutions: Provides an easy configuration wizard for m Single Sign On: Installs the Single Sign On features.This tool is used to configure connection to a wireless router. common (shared) profiles. m Wireless Management Instrumentation: Allows administrators who do not have Intel PROSet/Wireless installed to remotely manage clients that do have Intel PROSet/Wireless installed. NOTE: If you plan to use Novell(R) Client(TM) for Windows, it should be installed prior to installation of the Intel PROSet/Wireless software. If Intel PROSet/Wireless is already installed, you should remove it prior to installation of Novell Client for Windows. EAP-FAST A-ID Groups NOTE: This feature is unavailable if CCXv4 is not selected in the Administrator Tool Application Settings An Authority Identifier (A-ID) is the radius server that provisions Protected Access Credential
(PACs) A-ID groups. A-ID groups are shared by all users of the computer and allow EAP-FAST profiles to support multiple PACs from multiple A-IDs. The A-ID groups can be pre-configured by the administrator and set up through an Administrator Package on a user's computer. When a wireless network profile encounters a server with an A-ID within the same group, it uses this PAC without a prompt to the user. To add an A-ID Group:
1. Select Include A-ID Groups. 2. Click Add. Enter a new A-ID group name. 3. Click OK. The A-ID group is added to the A-ID Group list. If the A-ID group is locked, then additional A-IDs cannot be added to the group. To add an A-ID to an A-ID group. 1. Select a group from the A-ID Groups list. 2. Click Add in the A-IDs section. 3. Enter a new A-ID. 4. Click OK. The A-ID is added to the list. Administrator Tasks How to Obtain a Client Certificate If you do not have any certificates for EAP-TLS (TLS) or EAP-TTLS (TTLS) you must obtain a client certificate to allow authentication. Certificates are managed from either Internet Explorer or the Microsoft Windows Control Panel. Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows 2000: When a client certificate is obtained, do not enable strong private key protection. If you enable strong private key protection for a certificate, you need to enter an access password for the certificate every time this certificate is used. You must disable strong private key protection for the certificate if you configure the service for TLS or TTLS authentication. Otherwise, the 802.1x service fails authentication because there is no logged in user to provide the required password. Notes about Smart Cards After a Smart Card is installed, the certificate is automatically installed on your computer and is chosen from the personal certificate store and root certificate store. Set up the Client for TLS authentication Step 1: Obtain a certificate To allow TLS authentication, you need a valid client certificate in the local repository for the logged-in user's account. You also need a trusted CA certificate in the root store. The following information provides two methods for obtaining a certificate:
l From a corporate certification authority (CA) implemented on a Windows 2000 server. l Import a certificate from a file with Internet Explorer's certificate import wizard. If you do not know how to obtain a user certificate from the CA, consult your administrator for the procedure. To install the CA on the local machine:
1. Obtain the CA and store it on your local drive. 2. Click Import. The Certificate Import Wizard opens. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Browse to locate the certificate on your local drive. 5. Click the exported certificate. 6. Click Open. 7. Click Next. 8. Click Place all certificates in the following store. 9. Click Browse to open the Select Certificate Store. 10. Click Show physical stores. 11. Click OK. 12. From the list of stores, scroll up and expand Trusted Root Certificate Authorities. 13. Click Local Computer. 14. Click OK. 15. Click Next. 16. Click Finish to complete the process. 17. Reboot after a certificate is installed. Use Microsoft Management Console (MMC) to verify that the CA is installed in the machine store. 1. In the Start menu, click Run. 2. Enter MMC. 3. Click OK to open The Microsoft Management Console. 4. Click File. 5. Click Add/Remove Snap-in. 6. Click Add to open the Add Standalone Snap-in page. 7. Click Certificates. 8. Click Add. 9. Click Computer account. 10. Click Next. 11. Click Finish. 12. Click Close. 13. Click OK. 14. In the console, click Certificates (Local Computer). 15. Click Trusted Root Certificate Authorities. 16. Click Certificates. 17. Verify that the CA you just installed is listed. 18. Click File. 19. Click Exit to close the console. Obtain a certificate from a Microsoft Windows 2000 CA:
1. Start Internet Explorer and browse to the Certificate Authority HTTP Service (use an URL such as http://yourdomainserver.yourdomain/certsrv with certsrv being the command that brings you to the certificate authority. You can also use the IP address of the server machine. For example, "192.0.2.12/certsrv."
2. Logon to the CA with the name and password of the user account you created on the authentication server. The name and password do not have to be the same as the Windows log on name and password of the current user. 3. On the Welcome page of the CA, select Request a certificate task and submit the form. 4. Choose Request Type: Select Advanced request. 5. Click Next. 6. Advanced Certificate Requests: Select Submit a certificate request to this CA using a form. 7. Click Submit. 8. Advanced Certificate Request: Select User certificate template. 9. Click Mark keys as exportable. 10. Click Next. Use the provided defaults. 11. Certificate Issued: Click Install this certificate. NOTE: If this is the first certificate you have obtained, the CA first asks you if it should install a trusted CA certificate in the root store. This is not a trusted CA certificate. The name on the certificate is that of the host of the CA. Click Yes. You need this certificate for both TLS and TTLS. 12. If your certificate was successfully installed, you see the message, "Your new certificate has been successfully installed."
13. To verify the installation, click Internet Explorer > Tools > Internet Options >
Content > Certificates. The new certificate should be installed in the Personal folder. Import a Certificate from a File 1. Open Internet Properties (right-click on the Internet Explorer icon on the desktop. 2. Select Properties. 3. Content: Click Certificates. The list of installed certificates appears. 4. Click Import to open the Certificate Import Wizard. 5. Select the file. 6. Specify your access password for the file. Clear Enable strong private key protection. 7. Certificate store: Click Automatically select certificate store based on the type of certificate (the certificate must be in the user accounts personal store to be accessible). 8. Proceed to Completing the Certificate Import and click Finish. To configure a profile with WPA authentication with WEP or TKIP encryption that uses TLS authentication:
NOTE: Obtain and install a client certificate, refer to Step 1 or consult your administrator. Specify the certificate used by Intel PROSet/Wireless 1. On the Profile page, click Add to open General Settings. 2. Profile Name: Enter a profile name. 3. Wireless Network Name (SSID): Enter the network identifier. 4. Operating Mode: Click Network (Infrastructure). 5. Click Next to access the Security Settings. 6. Click Enterprise Security. 7. Network Authentication: Select Open (Recommended). 8. Data Encryption: Select WEP. 9. 802.1x Enabled: Selected. 10. Authentication Type: Select TLS. Step 1 of 2: TLS User 1. Obtain and install a client certificate. 2. Select one of the following to obtain a certificate:
l Use my smart card: Select if the certificate resides on a smart card. l Use the certificate issued to this computer: Click Select to choose a certificate that resides in the machine store. l Use a user certificate on this computer. Click Select to choose a certificate that resides on this computer. 3. Click Next. Step 2 of 2: TLS Server 1. Select one of the following options:
n Validate Server Certificate: Select to verify the server certificate. Certificate Issuer: The server certificate received during TLS message exchange must be issued by this certificate authority
(CA). Trusted intermediate certificate authorities and root authorities whose certificates exist in the system store are available for selection. If Any Trusted CA is selected, any CA in the list is acceptable. Click Any Trusted CA as the default or select a certificate issuer from the list. n Specify Server or Certificate Name:
Server or Certificate Name: Enter the server name. The server name or domain to which the server belongs, depends on which of the two options below has been selected. Server name must match the specified entry exactly:
When selected, the server name must match exactly the server name found on the certificate. The server name should include the complete domain name (for example, Servername.Domain name). Domain name must end with the specified entry: When selected, the server name identifies a domain, and the certificate must have a server name that belongs to this domain or to one of its subdomains (for example, zeelans.com, where the server is blueberry.zeelans.com). NOTE: These parameters should be obtained from the administrator. Notes about Certificates: The specified identity should match the Issued to identity in the certificate and should be registered on the authentication server (for example, RADIUS server) that is used by the authenticator. Your certificate must be valid with respect to the authentication server. This requirement depends on the authentication server and generally means that the authentication server must know the issuer of your certificate as a Certificate Authority. Use the same user name you used to log in when the certificate was installed. 2. Click OK. The profile is added to the Profiles list. 3. Click the new profile at the end of the Profiles list. Use the up and down arrows to change the priority of the new profile. 4. Click Connect to connect to the selected wireless network. 5. Click OK to close Intel PROSet/Wireless. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Glossary of Terms: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide Glossary Numerical A B C D E F G H I L M N O P R S T W Term 802.11 802.11a 802.11b 802.11g 802.1x AAA Server Access Point ad hoc network Definition The 802.11 standard refers to a family of specifications developed by the IEEE for wireless LAN technology. The 802.11 specifies an over-the-air interface between a wireless client and a base station or between two wireless clients and provides 1 or 2 Mbps transmission in the 2.4 GHz band using either frequency hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) or direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS). The 802.11a standard specifies a maximum data transfer rate of 54 Mbps and an operating frequency of 5 GHz. The 802.11a standard uses the Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) transmission method. Additionally, the 802.11a standard supports 802.11 features such as WEP encryption for security. 802.11b is an extension to 802.11 that applies to wireless LANS and provides 11 Mbps transmission (with a fallback to 5.5, 2 and 1 Mbps) in the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b uses only DSSS. Throughput data rate 5+
Mbps in the 2.4 GHz band. The 802.11g standard specifies a maximum data transfer rate of 54 Mbps, an operating frequency of 2.4GHz, and WEP encryption for security. 802.11g networks are also referred to as Wi-Fi networks. 802.1x is the IEEE Standard for Port-Based Network Access Control. This is used in conjunction with EAP methods to provide access control to wired and wireless networks. Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Server. A system to control access to computer resources and track user activity. Access point (AP). A stand-alone wireless hub that allows any computer that has a wireless network adapter to communicate with another computer and to connect to the Internet. A communication configuration in which every computer has the same capabilities, and any computer can initiate a communication session. Also known as a peer-to-peer network or a computer-to-computer network. AES-CCMP Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol is the new method for privacy protection of wireless transmissions specified in the IEEE 802.11i standard. AES-CCMP provides a stronger encryption method than TKIP. BER CCX Bit Rate CA (certificate authority) Broadcast SSID BSSID Authentication Verifies the identity of a user logging onto a network. Passwords, digital certificates, smart cards and biometrics are used to prove the identity of the client to the network. Passwords and digital certificates are also used to identify the network to the client. Bit error rate. The ratio of errors to the total number of bits being sent in a data transmission from one location to another. The total number of bits (ones and zeros) per second that a network connection can support. Note that this bit rate will vary, under software control, with different signal path conditions. Used to allow an access point to respond to clients on a wireless network by sending probes. A unique identifier for each wireless client on a wireless network. The Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID) is the Ethernet MAC address of each adapter on the network. A corporate certification authority implemented on a server. In addition, Internet Explorers certificate can import a certificate from a file. A trusted CA certificate is stored in the root store. Cisco Compatible eXtension. Cisco Compatible Extensions Program ensures that devices used on Cisco wireless LAN infrastructure meet the security, management and roaming requirements. Used for client authentication. A certificate is registered on the authentication server (i.e., RADIUS server) and used by the authenticator. Cisco Key Integrity Protocol (CKIP) is a Cisco proprietary security protocol for encryption in 802.11 media. CKIP uses a key message integrity check and message sequence number to improve 802.11 security in infrastructure mode. CKIP is Cisco's version of TKIP. The computer that gets its Internet connection by sharing either the host computer's connection or the Access Point's connection. Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum. Technology used in radio transmission. Incompatible with FHSS. Short for Extensible Authentication Protocol, EAP sits inside of Point-to-
Point Protocols (PPP) authentication protocol and provides a generalized framework for several different authentication methods. EAP is supposed to head off proprietary authentication systems and let everything from passwords to challenge-response tokens and public-key infrastructure certificates all work smoothly. EAP-FAST, like EAP-TTLS and PEAP, uses tunneling to protect traffic. The main difference is that EAP-FAST does not use certificates to authenticate. Client computer DSSS Certificate EAP-FAST CKIP EAP EAP-GTC EAP-OTP EAP-SIM The EAP-GTC (Generic Token Card) is similar to the EAP-OTP except with hardware token cards. The request contains a displayable message, and the response contains the string read from the hardware token card. EAP-OTP (One-Time Password) is similar to MD5, except it uses the OTP as the response. The request contains a displayable message. The OTP method is defined in RFC 2289. The OTP mechanism is employed extensively in VPN and PPP scenarios but not in the wireless world Extensible Authentication Protocol-Subscriber Identity Module (EAP-SIM) authentication can be used with:
l Network Authentication types: Open, Shared, and WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise. l Data Encryption types: None, WEP and CKIP. EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS Encryption A SIM card is a special smart card that is used by GSM-based digital cellular networks. The SIM card is used to validate your credentials with the network A type of authentication method using EAP and a security protocol called the Transport Layer Security (TLS). EAP-TLS uses certificates that use passwords. EAP-TLS authentication supports dynamic WEP key management. A type of authentication method using EAP and Tunneled Transport Layer Security (TTLS). EAP-TTLS uses a combination of certificates and another security method such as passwords. Scrambling data so that only the authorized recipient can read it. Usually a key is needed to interpret the data. Frequency-Hop Spread Spectrum. Technology used in radio transmission. Incompatible with DSSS. A capability that allows a number of people to view, modify, and print the same file(s) from different computers. The threshold at which the wireless adapter breaks the packet into multiple frames. This determines the packet size and affects the throughput of the transmission. GHz Gigahertz. A unit of frequency equal to 1,000,000,000 cycles per second. Host computer The computer that is directly connected to the Internet via a modem or Fragmentation threshold File and printer sharing FHSS Infrastructure Network IEEE network adapter. A wireless network centered around an access point. In this environment, the access point not only provides communication with the wired network, but also mediates wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an organization involved in defining computing and communications standards. Internet Protocol (IP) address LAN LEAP MAC The address of a computer that is attached to a network. Part of the address designates which network the computer is on, and the other part represents the host identification. Local area network. A high-speed, low-error data network covering a relatively small geographic area. Light Extensible Authentication Protocol. A version of Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). LEAP is a proprietary extensible authentication protocol developed by Cisco, which provides a challenge-
response authentication mechanism and dynamic key assignment. A hardwired address applied at the factory. It uniquely identifies network hardware, such as a wireless adapter, on a LAN or WAN. Megabits-per-second. Transmission speed of 1,000,000 bits per second. Megahertz. A unit of frequency equal to 1,000,000 cycles per second. Mbps MHz MIC (Michael) Message integrity check (commonly called Michael). MS-CHAP An EAP mechanism used by the client. Microsoft Challenge Authentication Protocol (MSCHAP) Version 2, is used over an encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-
exposed TLS encrypted channel. Nanosecond. 1 billionth (1/1,000,000,000) of a second. Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing. Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) is an Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) draft protocol sponsored by Microsoft, Cisco, and RSA Security. PEAP creates an encrypted tunnel similar to the tunnel used in secure web pages (SSL). Inside the encrypted tunnel, a number of other EAP authentication methods can be used to perform client authentication. PEAP requires a TLS certificate on the RADIUS server, but unlike EAP-TLS there is no requirement to have a certificate on the client. PEAP has not been ratified by the IETF. The IETF is currently comparing PEAP and TTLS (Tunneled TLS) to determine an authentication standard for 802.1X authentication in 802.11 wireless systems. PEAP is an authentication type designed to take advantage of server-side EAP-
Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) and to support various authentication methods, including user's passwords and one-time passwords, and Generic Token Cards. A wireless network structure that allows wireless clients to communicate with each other without using an access point. The state in which the radio is periodically powered down to conserve power. When the notebook is in Power Save mode, receive packets are stored in the access point until the wireless adapter wakes up. One of the networks that has been configured. Such networks are listed under Preferred networks on the Wireless Networks tab of the Wireless Configuration Utility (Windows 2000 environment) or Wireless Network Connection Properties (Windows XP environment). ns OFDM PEAP Peer-to-Peer Mode Power Save mode Preferred network RADIUS RF Roaming Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is an authentication and accounting system that verifies users credentials and grants access to requested resources. Radio Frequency. The international unit for measuring frequency is Hertz
(Hz), which is equivalent to the older unit of cycles per second. One Mega-
Hertz (MHz) is one million Hertz. One Giga-Hertz (GHz) is one billion Hertz. For reference: the standard US electrical power frequency is 60 Hz, the AM broadcast radio frequency band is 0.55 -1.6 MHz, the FM broadcast radio frequency band is 88-108 MHz, and microwave ovens typically operate at 2.45 GHz. Movement of a wireless node between two micro cells. Roaming usually occurs in infrastructure networks built around multiple access points. RTS threshold The number of frames in the data packet at or above which an RTS/CTS Single Sign On Single Sign On feature set allows the 802.1x credentials to match your Shared Key SIM Silent Mode SSID TKIP
(request to send/clear to send) handshake is turned on before the packet is sent. The default value is 2347. An encryption key known only to the receiver and sender of data. Subscriber Identity Module card is used to validate credentials with the network. A SIM card is a special smart card that is used by GSM-based digital cellular networks. Silent Mode Access Points or Wireless Routers have been configured to not broadcast the SSID for the wireless network. This makes it necessary to know the SSID in order to configure the wireless profile to connect to the access point or wireless router. Windows log on user name and password credentials for wireless network connections. Service Set Identifier. A value that controls access to a wireless network. The SSID for your wireless network card must match the SSID for any access point that you want to connect with. If the value does not match, you are not granted access to the network. Each SSID may be up to 32 characters long and is case-sensitive. Temporal Key Integrity protocol improves data encryption. Wi-Fi Protected Access utilizes its TKIP. TKIP provides important data encryption enhancements including a re-keying method. TKIP is part of the IEEE 802.11i encryption standard for wireless LANs. TKIP is the next generation of WEP, the Wired Equivalency Protocol, which is used to secure 802.11 wireless LANs. TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a re-keying mechanism, thus fixing the flaws of WEP. TLS TTLS WEP WEP Key Wi-Fi Wireless Router WLAN Transport Layer Security. A type of authentication method using the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) and a security protocol called the Transport Layer Security (TLS). EAP-TLS uses certificates which use passwords. EAP-TLS authentication supports dynamic WEP key management. The TLS protocol is intended to secure and authenticate communications across a public network through data encryption. The TLS Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to provide mutual authentication and to negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is transmitted. Tunneled Transport Layer Security. These settings define the protocol and the credentials used to authenticate a user. In TTLS, the client uses EAP-
TLS to validate the server and create a TLS-encrypted channel between the client and server. The client can use another authentication protocol, typically password-based protocols, such as MD5 Challenge over this encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. TTLS implementations today support all methods defined by EAP, as well as several older methods (CHAP, PAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAPv2). TTLS can easily be extended to work with new protocols by defining new attributes to support new protocols. Wired Equivalent Privacy. Wired Equivalent Privacy, 64- and 128-bit (64-
bit is sometimes referred to as 40-bit). This is a low-level encryption technique designed to give the user about the same amount of privacy that he would expect from a LAN. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (WLANs) defined in the 802.11b standard. WEP is designed to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP aims to provide security by data over radio waves so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another. Either a pass phrase or hexadecimal key. The pass phrase must be 5 ASCII characters for 64-bit WEP or 13 ASCII characters for 128-bit WEP. For pass phrases, 0-9, a-z, A-Z, and ~!@#$%
^&*()_+|`-={}|[]\:";'<>?,./ are all valid characters. The hex key must be 10 hexadecimal characters (0-9, A-F) for 64-bit WEP or 26 hexadecimal characters (0-9, A-F) for 128-bit WEP. Wireless Fidelity. Is meant to be used generically when referring of any type to 802.11 network, whether 802.11b, 802.11a, or dual-band. A stand-alone wireless hub that allows any computer that has a wireless network adapter to communicate with another computer and to connect to the Internet. Also known as an access point. Wireless Local-Area Network. A type of local-area network that uses high-
frequency radio waves rather than wires to communicate between nodes. WPA WPA2 WPA-
Enterprise Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a security enhancement that strongly increases the level of data protection and access control to a wireless network. WPA is an interim standard that will be replaced with the IEEEs 802.11i standard upon its completion. WPA consists of RC4 and TKIP and provides support for BSS (Infrastructure) mode only. (Not compatible with WPA2.) Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2). This is the second generation of WPA that complies with the IEEE TGi specification. WPA2 consists of AES encryption, pre-authentication and PMKID caching. It provides support for BSS (Infrastructure) mode and IBSS (Ad hoc) mode. (Not compatible with WPA.) Wi-Fi Protected Access-Enterprise applies to corporate users. A new standards-based, interoperable security technology for wireless LAN
(subset of IEEE 802.11i draft standard) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. WPA is a Wi-Fi standard that was designed to improve upon the security features of WEP as follows:
l Improved data encryption through the temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP). TKIP scrambles the keys using a hashing algorithm and, by adding an integrity-checking feature, ensures that the keys have not been tampered with. l User authentication, which is generally missing in WEP, through the extensible authentication protocol (EAP). WEP regulates access to a wireless network based on a computers hardware-specific MAC address, which is relatively simple to be sniffed out and stolen. EAP is built on a more secure public-key encryption system to ensure that only authorized network users can access the network. WPA is an interim standard that will be replaced with the IEEEs 802.11i standard upon its completion. WPA-Personal Wi-Fi Protected Access-Personal provides a level of security in the small WPA-PSK network or home environment. Wi-Fi Protected Access-Pre-Shared Key (WPA-PSK) mode does not use an authentication server. It can be used with the data encryption types WEP or TKIP. WPA-PSK requires configuration of a pre-shared key (PSK). You must enter a pass phrase or 64 hex characters for a Pre-Shared Key of length 256-bits. The data encryption key is derived from the PSK. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Wireless Network Overview: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide About Wireless Network Technology l Select a Wireless Network Mode l Configure a Wireless Network l Identify a Wireless Network A wireless network connects computers without network cables. Instead computers use radio communications to send data between each other. You can communicate directly with other wireless computers, or connect to an existing network through a wireless access point. When you set up your wireless adapter, you select the operating mode for the kind of wireless network you want. You can use your Intel(R) PRO/Wireless Network Connections adapter to connect to other similar wireless devices that comply with the 802.11 standard for wireless networking. Select a Wireless Network Mode Wireless networks can operate with or without access points, depending on the number of users in the network. Infrastructure mode uses access points to allow wireless computers to send and receive information. Wireless computers transmit to the access point, the access point receives the information and rebroadcasts it to other computers. The access point can also connect to a wired network or to the Internet. Multiple access points can work together to provide coverage over a wide area. Device-to-Device mode, also called Ad Hoc mode, works without access points and allows wireless computers to send information directly to other wireless computers. You can use Device-to-Device mode to network computers in a home or small office or to set up a temporary wireless network for a meeting. Configure a Wireless Network There are three basic components that must be configured for an 802.11 wireless network to operate properly:
l Network Name: Each wireless network uses a unique Network Name to identify the network. This name is called the Service Set Identifier (SSID). When you set up your wireless adapter, you specify the SSID. If you want to connect to an existing network, you must use the name for that network. If you are setting up your own network you can make up your own name and use it on each computer. The name can be up to 32 characters long and contain letters and numbers. l Profiles: When you set up your computer to access a wireless network, Intel(R) PROSet/Wireless creates a profile for the wireless settings that you specify. If you want to connect to another network, you can scan for existing networks and make a temporary connection, or create a new profile for that network. After you create profiles, your computer will automatically connect when you change locations. l Security: The 802.11 wireless networks use encryption to help protect your data. Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) uses a 64- or 128-bit shared encryption key to scramble data. Before a computer transmits data, it uses a secret encryption key to scramble the data. The receiving computer uses this same key to unscramble the data. If you are connecting to an existing network, use the encryption key provided by the administrator of the wireless network. If you are setting up your own network you can make up your own key and use it on each computer. 802.1x authentication is independent of the 802.11 authentication process. The 802.1x standard provides a framework for various authentication and key-
management protocols. There are different 802.1x authentication types, each providing a different approach to authentication but all employing the same 802.1x protocol and framework for communication between a client and an access point Identify a Wireless Network Depending on the size and components of a wireless network, there are many ways to identify a wireless network:
l The Network Name or Service Set Identifier (SSID)Identifies a wireless network. All wireless devices on the network must use the same SSID. l Extended Service Set Identifier (ESSID)A special case of SSID used to identify a wireless network that includes access points. l Independent Basic Service Set Identifier (IBSSID)A special case of SSID used to identify a network of wireless computers configured to communicate directly with one another without using an access point. l Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID)A unique identifier for each wireless device. The BSSID is the Ethernet MAC address of the device. l Broadcast SSIDAn access point can respond to computers sending probe packets with the broadcast SSID. If this feature is enabled on the access point, any wireless user can associate with the access point by using a blank (null) SSID. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Security Overview: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide l WEP Encryption m Open and Shared Key authentication l 802.1x Authentication m How 802.1x Authentication Works m 802.1x Features l WPA/WPA2 m Enterprise Mode m Personal Mode m WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise m WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal m AES-CCMP m TKIP l MD5 l TLS l TTLS m Authentication Protocols l PEAP m Authentication Protocols l Cisco Features m Cisco LEAP m Cisco Rogue Access Point Security Feature m Fast Roaming (CCKM) m CKIP m 802.11b and 802.11g Mixed Environment Protection Protocol m EAP-FAST m Mixed Cell Mode m Radio Management WEP Encryption Use IEEE 802.11 Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption to prevent unauthorized reception of wireless data. WEP encryption provides two levels of security: 64-bit key
(sometimes referred to as 40-bit) or a 128-bit key (also known as 104-bit). For stronger security, use a 128-bit key. If you use encryption, all wireless devices on your wireless network must use the same encryption keys. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption and shared authentication provides protection for your data on the network. WEP uses an encryption key to encrypt data before transmitting it. Only computers that use the same encryption key can access the network or decrypt the encrypted data transmitted by other computers. Authentication provides an additional validation process from the adapter to the access point. The WEP encryption algorithm is vulnerable to passive and active network attacks. TKIP and CKIP algorithms include enhancements to the WEP protocol that mitigate existing network attacks and address its shortcomings. Open and Shared Key authentication IEEE 802.11 supports two types of network authentication methods: Open System and Shared Key. l When Open authentication is used, any wireless station can request authentication. The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management request that contains the identity of the sending station. The receiving station or access point grants any request for authentication. Open authentication allows any device network access. If no encryption is enabled on the network, any device that knows the Service Set Identifier (SSID) of the access point can gain access to the network. l When Shared Key authentication is used, each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802.11 wireless network communications channel. Shared key authentication requires that the client configure a static WEP key. The client access is granted only if it passes a challenge-based authentication. 802.1x Authentication How 802.1x Authentication Works 802.1x Features Overview 802.1x authentication is independent of the 802.11 authentication process. The 802.1x standard provides a framework for various authentication and key-management protocols. There are different 802.1x authentication types, each provides a different approach to authentication but all employ the same 802.1x protocol and framework for communication between a client and an access point. In most protocols, upon the completion of the 802.1x authentication process, the supplicant receives a key that it uses for data encryption. Refer to How 802.1x authentication works for more information. With 802.1x authentication, an authentication method is used between the client and a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server connected to the access point. The authentication process uses credentials, such as a user's password that are not transmitted over the wireless network. Most 802.1x types support dynamic per-user, per-session keys to strengthen the static key security. 802.1x benefits from the use of an existing authentication protocol known as the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). 802.1x authentication for wireless LANs has three main components:
l The authenticator (the access point) l The supplicant (the client software) l The authentication server (a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service server
[RADIUS]) 802.1x authentication security initiates an authorization request from the wireless client to the access point, which authenticates the client to an Extensible Authentication Protocol
(EAP) compliant RADIUS server. This RADIUS server may authenticate either the user (via passwords or certificates) or the system (by MAC address). In theory, the wireless client is not allowed to join the networks until the transaction is complete. There are several authentication algorithms used for 802.1x. Some examples are: EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, and Protected EAP (PEAP). These are all methods for the wireless client to identify itself to the RADIUS server. With RADIUS authentication, user identities are checked against databases. RADIUS constitutes a set of standards addressing Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA). Radius includes a proxy process to validate clients in a multi-server environment. The IEEE 802.1x standard is for controlling and authenticating access to port-based 802.11 wireless and wired Ethernet networks. Port-based network access control is similar to a switched local area network (LAN) infrastructure that authenticates devices that are attached to a LAN port and prevent access to that port if the authentication process fails. What is RADIUS?
RADIUS is the Remote Access Dial-In User Service, an Authorization, Authentication, and Accounting (AAA) client-server protocol, which is used when a AAA dial-up client logs in or out of a Network Access Server. Typically, a RADIUS server is used by Internet Service Providers (ISP) to perform AAA tasks. AAA phases are described as follows:
l Authentication phase: Verifies a user name and password against a local database. After the credentials are verified, the authorization process begins. l Authorization phase: Determines whether a request is allowed access to a resource. An IP address is assigned for the dial-up client. l Accounting phase: Collects information on resource usage for the purpose of trend analysis, auditing, session time billing, or cost allocation. How 802.1x Authentication Works A simplified description of 802.1x authentication is:
l A client sends a "request to access" message to an access point. The access point requests the identity of the client. l The client replies with its identity packet which is passed along to the authentication l The authentication server sends an "accept" packet to the access point. l The access point places the client port in the authorized state and data traffic is server. allowed to proceed. 802.1x Features l 802.1x supplicant protocol support l Support for the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) - RFC 2284 l Supported Authentication Methods:
m EAP TLS Authentication Protocol - RFC 2716 and RFC 2246 m EAP Tunneled TLS (TTLS) m PEAP l Supports Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2000 WPA or WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA or WPA2) is a security enhancement that strongly increases the level of data protection and access control to a wireless network. WPA enforces 802.1x authentication and key-exchange and only works with dynamic encryption keys. To strengthen data encryption, WPA utilizes Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). TKIP provides important data encryption enhancements that include a per-packet key mixing function, a message integrity check (MIC) called Michael an extended initialization vector
(IV) with sequencing rules, and a rekeying mechanism. With these improvement enhancements, TKIP protects against WEP's known weaknesses. The second generation of WPA that complies with the IEEE TGi specification is known as WPA2. Enterprise Mode: Enterprise Mode verifies network users through a RADIUS or other authentication server. WPA utilizes 128-bit encryption keys and dynamic session keys to ensure your wireless network's privacy and enterprise security. Enterprise Mode is targeted to corporate or government environments. Personal Mode: Personal Mode requires manual configuration of a pre-shared key (PSK) on the access point and clients. PSK authenticates users via a password, or identifying code, on both the client station and the access point. No authentication server is needed. Personal Mode is targeted to home and small business environments. WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise: Provide this level of security on enterprise networks with an 802.1x RADIUS server. An authentication type is selected to match the authentication protocol of the 802.1x server. WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal: Provide this level of security in the small network or home environment. It uses a password also called a pre-shared key (PSK). The longer the password, the stronger the security of the wireless network. If your wireless access point or router supports WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal then you should enable it on the access point and provide a long, strong password. The same password entered into access point needs to be used on this computer and all other wireless devices that access the wireless network. NOTE: WPA-Personal and WPA2-Personal are not interoperable. AES-CCMP - (Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol) It is the new method for privacy protection of wireless transmissions specified in the IEEE 802.11i standard. AES-CCMP provides a stronger encryption method than TKIP. Choose AES-CCMP as the data encryption method whenever strong data protection is important. NOTE: Some security solutions may not be supported by your computers operating system and may require additional software or hardware as well as wireless LAN infrastructure support. Check with your computer manufacturer for details. TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) is an enhancement to WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) security. TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a rekeying mechanism, which fixes the flaws of WEP. MD5 Message Digest 5 (MD5) is a one-way authentication method that uses user names and passwords. This method does not support key management, but does require a pre-
configured key if data encryption is used. It can be safely deployed for wireless authentication inside EAP tunnel methods. TLS A type of authentication method using the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) and a security protocol called the Transport Layer Security (TLS). EAP-TLS uses certificates which use passwords. EAP-TLS authentication supports dynamic WEP key management. The TLS protocol is intended to secure and authenticate communications across a public network through data encryption. The TLS Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to provide mutual authentication and to negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is transmitted. TTLS These settings define the protocol and the credentials used to authenticate a user. In TTLS
(Tunneled Transport Layer Security), the client uses EAP-TLS to validate the server and create a TLS-encrypted channel between the client and server. The client can use another authentication protocol, typically password-based protocols, as MD5 Challenge over this encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. TTLS implementations today support all methods defined by EAP, as well as several older methods (PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-
CHAPv2). TTLS can easily be extended to work with new protocols by defining new attributes to support new protocols. Authentication Protocols l PAP: Password Authentication Protocol is a two way handshake protocol designed for use with PPP. Authentication Protocol Password Authentication Protocol is a plain text password used on older SLIP systems. It is not secure. l CHAP: Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol is a three way handshake protocol which is considered more secure than PAP (Password Authentication Protocol). l MS-CHAP (MD4): Uses a Microsoft version of RSA Message Digest 4 challenge and reply protocol. This only works on Microsoft systems and enables data encryption. This authentication method causes all data to be encrypted. l MS-CHAP-V2: Iintroduces an additional feature not available with MSCHAPV1 or standard CHAP authentication, the change password feature. This feature allows the client to change the account password if the RADIUS server reports that the password has expired. PEAP PEAP is a new Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) IEEE 802.1x authentication type designed to take advantage of server-side EAP-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) and to support various authentication methods, including users' passwords and one-time passwords, and Generic Token Cards. Authentication Protocols l Generic Token Card (GTC): Carries user specific token cards for authentication. The main feature in GTC is Digital Certificate/Token Card-based authentication. In addition, GTC includes the ability to hide user name identities until the TLS encrypted tunnel is established, which provides additional confidentiality that user names are not being broadcasted during the authentication phase. l MS-CHAP-V2: Refer to MS-CHAP-V2 above. l TLS: The TLS protocol is intended to secure and authenticate communications across a public network through data encryption. The TLS Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to provide mutual authentication and to negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is transmitted. Refer to TLS above. Cisco Features Cisco LEAP Cisco LEAP (Cisco Light EAP) is a server and client 802.1x authentication through a user-
supplied logon password. When a wireless access point communicates with a Cisco LEAP-
enabled RADIUS (Cisco Secure Access Control Server [ACS]), Cisco LEAP provides access control through mutual authentication between client wireless adapters and the wireless networks and provides dynamic, individual user encryption keys to help protect the privacy of transmitted data. Cisco Rogue Access Point Security Feature The Cisco Rogue Access Point feature provides security protection from an introduction of a rogue access point that could mimic a legitimate access point on a network in order to extract information about user credentials and authentication protocols that could compromise security. This feature only works with Cisco's LEAP authentication. Standard 802.11 technology does not protect a network from the introduction of a rogue access point. Refer to LEAP Authentication for more information. Fast Roaming (CCKM) When a wireless LAN is configured for fast reconnection, a LEAP-enabled client device can roam from one access point to another without involving the main server. Using Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM), an access point configured to provide Wireless Domain Services (WDS) takes the place of the RADIUS server and authenticates the client without perceptible delay in voice or other time-sensitive applications. CKIP Cisco Key Integrity Protocol (CKIP) is Cisco proprietary security protocol for encryption in 802.11 media. CKIP uses the following features to improve 802.11 security in infrastructure mode:
l Key Permutation (KP) l Message Sequence Number 802.11b and 802.11g Mixed Environment Protection Protocol Some access points, for example Cisco 350 or Cisco 1200, support environments in which not all client stations support WEP encryption; this is called Mixed-Cell Mode. When these wireless networks operate in "optional encryption" mode, client stations that join in WEP mode, send all messages encrypted, and stations that use standard mode send all messages unencrypted. These access points broadcast that the network does not use encryption, but allow clients that use WEP mode. When Mixed-Cell is enabled in a profile, it allows you to connect to access points that are configured for "optional encryption."
EAP-FAST EAP-FAST like EAP-TTLS and PEAP, uses tunneling to protect traffic. The main difference is that EAP-FAST does not use certificates to authenticate. Provisioning in EAP-FAST is negotiated solely by the client as the first communication exchange when EAP-FAST is requested from the server. If the client does not have a pre-shared secret Protected Access Credential (PAC), it is able to initiate a provisioning EAP-FAST exchange to dynamically obtain one from the server. EAP-FAST documents two methods to deliver the PAC: manual delivery through an out-of-
band secure mechanism and automatic provisioning. l Manual delivery mechanisms are any delivery mechanism that the administrator of the network feels is sufficiently secure for their network. l Automatic provisioning establishes an encrypted tunnel to protect the authentication of the client and the delivery of the PAC to the client. This mechanism, while not as secure as a manual method may be, is more secure than the authentication method used in LEAP. The EAP-FAST method is divided into two parts: provisioning and authentication. The provisioning phase involves the initial delivery of the PAC to the client. This phase only needs to be performed once per client and user. Mixed-Cell Mode Some access points, for example Cisco 350 or Cisco 1200, support environments in which not all client stations support WEP encryption; this is called Mixed-Cell Mode. When these wireless network operate in "optional encryption" mode, client stations that join in WEP mode, send all messages encrypted, and stations that use standard mode, send all messages unencrypted. These access points broadcast that the network does not use encryption, but allows clients that use WEP mode to join . When Mixed-Cell is enabled in a profile, it allows you to connect to access points that are configured for "optional encryption."
Radio Management When this feature is enabled your wireless adapter provides radio management information to the Cisco infrastructure. If the Cisco Radio Management utility is used on the infrastructure, it configures radio parameters, detects interference and rogue access points. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Specifications: Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide l Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection l Intel PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection l Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection l Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection Form Factor Dimensions PCI Express (TM) Mini Card Height 200 in x 1.18 in x 0.18 in (50.95 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Antenna Interface Connector Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-
066 Dual Diversity Antenna On-board dual diversity switching Connector Interface 53-pin Mini Card edge connector Voltage 3.3 V Operating Temperature 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Humidity 50 to 92% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 55 C) Frequency Modulation 5 GHz (802.11a) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g) Frequency band 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 5 GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 4 to 12 non-overlapping, dependent on country 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz
(dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Channel 1-11 (US only) Channel 1-13 (Japan, Europe) 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Data Rates General Operating Systems Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000 Wi-Fi(R) Alliance certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Wi-Fi(R) certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, WPA, WPA2, WMM, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-
FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WLAN Standard IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11a Architecture Security Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-
Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit;
802.1x: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-
TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60590) Intel PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection Form Factor Dimensions PCI Express (TM) Mini Card Height 200 in x 1.18 in x 0.18 in (50.95 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Antenna Interface Connector Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-
066 Dual Diversity Antenna On-board dual diversity switching Connector Interface 53-pin Mini Card edge connector Voltage 3.3 V Operating Temperature 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Humidity 50 to 92% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 55 C) Frequency Modulation 5 GHz (802.11a) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g) Frequency band 5.15 GHz to 5.85 GHz BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 5 GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 4 to 12 non-overlapping, dependent on country 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz
(dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Channel 1-11 (US only) Channel 1-13 (Japan, Europe) 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Data Rates General Operating Systems Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000 Wi-Fi(R) Alliance certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Wi-Fi(R) certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, WPA, WPA2, WMM, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WLAN Standard IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b Architecture Security Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-
Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit;
802.1x: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-
TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60590) Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection Form Factor Dimensions Weight Mini PCI Type 3A Width 2.85 in x Length 1.75 in x Height 0.20 in (59.75 mm x 50.95 mm x 5 mm) 0.7 oz. (12.90 g.) Antenna Interface Connector Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 Dual Diversity Antenna Connector Interface Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Data Rates General Operating Systems On-board dual diversity switching 124-pin SO-DIMM edge connector 3.3 Volt 0 to +70 degrees Celsius 50 to 85% non-condensing 5 GHz (802.11a) 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 5 GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 4 to 12 non-overlapping, dependent on country 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g) 2.400 - 2.472 GHz
(dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Channel 1-11 (US only) Channel 1-13 (Japan, Europe) 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000 Wi-Fi(R) Alliance certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard Architecture Security Product Safety Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection Wi-Fi(R) certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, WPA, WPA2, WMM, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Cisco Compatible Extensions, v3.0 IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11a Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-
bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit. 802.1x: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-
TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60590) Form Factor Dimensions Weight Antenna Interface Connector Dual Diversity Antenna Connector Interface Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Channels Data Rates General Operating Systems Wi-Fi(R) Alliance certification Mini PCI Type 3B Width 2.34 in x Length 1.75 in x Height 0.20 in (59.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 5 mm) 0.7 oz. (12.90 g.) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board dual diversity switching 124-pin mini PCI edge connector 3.3 V 0 to +70 degrees Celsius 50 to 85% non-condensing OFDM with BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, DBPSK, DQPSK, CCK 2.400 - 2.472 GHz (US) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Japan) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Europe ETSI) OFDM with BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, DBPSK, DQPSK, CCK Full 14 channel support 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2000 Wi-Fi(R) certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, WPA, WPA2, WMM, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Cisco Compatible Extensions, v2.0 WLAN Standard IEEE 802.11g and 802.11b Architecture Security Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-TLS, EAP-
TTLS, AES (128-bit), WEP 128-bit and 64-
bit. Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60590) Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers Back to Contents Customer Support: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide Customer Support Intel support is available online or by telephone. Available services include the most up-to-
date product information, installation instructions about specific products, and troubleshooting tips. Online Support Technical Support: http://support.intel.com/support/go/wireless/wlan/pro3945abg.htm Network Product Support: http://www.intel.com/network Corporate Web Site: http://www.intel.com Back to Contents Back to Contents Regulatory Information: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide Supported on the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection, Intel(R) PRO/
Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection and Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection Hardware Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection and the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection l Information for the User l Regulatory Information Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection l Information for the User l Regulatory Information Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection l Information for the User l Regulatory Information Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection and the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection The information in this document applies to the following products:
Tri-mode wireless LAN adapters (802.11a/802.11b/802.11g ) Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (model WM3945ABG) Dual-mode wireless LAN adapters (802.11b/802.11g ) Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection (model WM3945BG) NOTE: Due to the evolving state of regulations and standards in the wireless LAN field (IEEE 802.11 and similar standards), the information provided herein is subject to change. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Information for the user Safety Notices The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency
(RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter meet the Human Exposure limits found in OET Bulletin 65, supplement C, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:
l Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. l Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. l Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged. l Use in specific environments:
directors of such environments. m The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety m The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). m The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. l Antenna use:
m In order to comply with FCC RF exposure limits, low gain integrated antennas should be located at a minimum distance of 20 cm (8 inches) or more from the body of all persons. m High-gain, wall-mount, or mast-mount antennas are designed to be professionally installed and should be located at a minimum distance of 30 cm (12 inches) or more from the body of all persons. Please contact your professional installer, VAR, or antenna manufacturer for proper installation requirements. l Explosive Device Proximity Warning (see below) l Antenna Warning (see below) l Use on Aircraft Caution (see below) l Other Wireless Devices (see below) l Power Supply (Access Point) (see below) Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: To comply with the FCC and ANSI C95.1 RF exposure limits, it is recommended for the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter installed in a desktop or portable computer, that the antenna for this device be installed so as to provide a separation distance of al least 20 cm (8 inches) from all persons and that the antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or radio transmitter. It is recommended that the user limit exposure time if the antenna is positioned closer than 20 cm (8 inches). Warning: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN products are not designed for use with high-gain directional antennas. Use of such antennas with these products is illegal. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: Refer to the documentation supplied with wireless Ethernet adapters or other devices in the wireless network. Local Restrictions on 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g Radio Usage Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. The device transmit power control (TPC) interface is part of the Intel(R) PROSet/
Wireless software. Operational restrictions for Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) are provided by the system manufacturer. Any deviation from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. For country-specific information, see the additional compliance information supplied with the product. Wireless interoperability The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection are designed to be interoperable with other wireless LAN products that are based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:
l IEEE Std. 802.11b compliant Standard on Wireless LAN. l IEEE Std. 802.11g compliant Standard on Wireless LAN. l IEEE Std. 802.11a compliant Standard on Wireless LAN. l Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification, as defined by the WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance). The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter and your health The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter wireless device operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the Intel
(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection wireless devices may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:
l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter equipment on board airplanes, or l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Intel(R) PRO/
Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection wireless devices before you turn it on. Regulatory information Information for the OEMs and Integrators:
The following statement must be included with all versions of this document supplied to an OEM or integrator, but should not be distributed to the end user. l This device is intended for OEM integrators only. l This device cannot be co-located with any other transmitter. l Please refer to the full Grant of Equipment document for other restrictions. l This device must be operated and used with a locally approved access point. Information To Be Supplied to the End User by the OEM or Integrator The following regulatory and safety notices must be published in documentation supplied to the end user of the product or system incorporating an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection or an Intel(R) PRO/
Wireless 3945BG Network Connection in compliance with local regulations. Host system must be labeled with
"Contains FCC ID: XXXXXXXX", FCC ID displayed on label. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio approvals. Intel Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Intel Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Intel Corporation and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. Local Restriction of 802.11a 802.11b, and 802.11g Radio Usage The following statement on local restrictions must be published as part of the compliance documentation for all 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g products. Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation from permissible settings and restrictions in the country of use could be an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. FCC Radio Frequency Interference Requirements This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and /or damage this device. l This device is intended for OEM integrators only. l This device cannot be co-located with any other transmitter. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:
l This device may not cause harmful interference. l This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: The radiated output power of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection wireless network device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN wireless network device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20 cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the computer. Interference statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:
l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. l Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE:The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection adapter or the Intel(R) PRO/
Wireless 3945BG Network Connection adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. CanadaIndustry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003, Issue 4, and RSS-210, No 4 (Dec 2000) and No 5 (Nov 2001). Cet appariel numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003, No. 4, et CNR-210, No 4 (Dec 2000) et No 5 (Nov 2001)..
"To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."
Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afinde fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Europe Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Europe ETSI) 5.15 - 5.35 GHz and 5.47-5.725 GHz (Europe ETSI) Low band 5.25 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only 5.47 - 5.725 GHz is current not allowed in Czech Republic and France. Declaration of Conformity This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. Czech Danish Dutch English Estonian Finnish French German Greek Intel(R) Corporation tmto prohlauje, e tento Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES."
Undertegnede Intel(R) Corporation erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hierbij verklaart Intel(R) Corporation dat het toestel Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Bij deze verklaart Intel(R) Corporation dat deze Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) voldoet aan de essentile eisen en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Hereby, Intel(R) Corporation, declares that this Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Kesolevaga kinnitab Intel(R) Corporation seadme Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Intel(R) Corporation vakuuttaa tten ett Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection
(Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Par la prsente Intel(R) Corporation dclare que l'appareil Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Par la prsente, Intel(R) Corporation dclare que ce Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions de la directive 1999/5/CE qui lui sont applicables. Hiermit erklrt Intel(R) Corporation, dass sich dieser/diese/dieses Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999/5/
EG befindet". (BMWi) Hiermit erklrt Intel(R) Corporation die bereinstimmung des Gertes Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG.
(Wien) I Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network E T N P A Intel(R) Corporation D Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) S I P I T S K S A S 1999/5/E S T S S L S D I O S S S T S O M H A R O U S H L W N E T U M M O R F W N E T A R O I O U S I W D E I P A I T H S E I A I O I P E C E T I K E I A T A X E I H D H G I A K Hungary Icelandic Italian Latvian Alulrott, Intel(R) Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak Intel lysir her med yfir a thessi bunadur, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection
(Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection), uppfyllir allar grunnkrofur, sem gerdar eru i R&TTE tilskipun ESB nr 1999/5/EC Con la presente Intel(R) Corporation dichiara che questo Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o Intel(R) Corporation deklar, ka Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel
(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem Malti Lithuanian Intel(R) Corporation deklaruoja, kad Intel(R) Pro/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) atitinka 1999/5/EC Direktyvos esminius reikalavimus ir kitas nuostatas". Hawnhekk, Intel(R) Corporation, jiddikjara li dan Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC Niniejszym, Intel(R) Corporation, deklaruj, e Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) spenia wymagania zasadnicze oraz stosowne postanowienia zawarte Dyrektywie 1999/5/EC. Polish Portuguese Intel(R) Corporation declara que este Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel
(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Intel(R) Corporation tmto vyhlasuje, e Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel
(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. iuo Intel(R) Corporation deklaruoja, kad is Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Por medio de la presente Intel(R) Corporation declara que el Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Hrmed intygar Intel(R) Corporation att denna Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection (Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945BG Network Connection) str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Slovak Slovenia Spanish Swedish France Pour la France mtropolitaine 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2.400 -2.454 GHz (canaux 1 7) autoris en usage extrieur Pour la Guyane et la Runion 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur . 2.420 - 2.4835 GHz (canaux 5 13) autoris en usage extrieur Pour tout le territoire Fan-cais:
Seulement 5.15 -5.35 GHz autoris pour le 802.11a Belgium Dans le cas d'une utilisation prive, l'extrieur d'un btiment, au-dessus d'un espace public, aucun enregistrement n'est ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 300m un enregistrement auprs de l'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter l'IBPT. In geval van priv-gebruik, buiten een gebouw, op een openbare plaats, is geen registratie nodig, wanneer de afstand minder dan 300m is. Voor een afstand groter dan 300m is een registratie bij BIPT vereist. Voor registraties en licenties, gelieve BIPT te contacteren. 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Japan Latvia A license is required for outdoor use for operation in 2.4 GHz band. Italia A general authorization is requested for outdoor use in Italy The use of these equipments is regulated by:
- D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105
(free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use.
- D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Luso degli apparati regolamentato da:
- D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attivit soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso privato;
- D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dellaccesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni. Greece A license is required for the outdoor use of band 5.470 5.725 GHz. Belarus 2.4 GHz OFDM (802.11g) is not allowed at this time. Indonesia 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Korea Kuwait 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Oman If the modules are less than 100 milliwatts they are unlicensed but if they are more than 100 milliwatts, the user is responsible for getting a license to operate from Telecommunications Regulatory Authority (TRA) in Sultanate of Oman. Taiwan Pakistan Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (PTA) Approved UAE 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Ukraine 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Radio approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed in the manufacture OEM Regulatory Guidance document. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Regulatory Warning For use in (or with) UL Listed personal computers or compatible. Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection The information in this document applies to the following products:
Tri-mode wireless LAN adapters (802.11a/802.11b/802.11g ) Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection (model WM3B2915ABG) Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection (model WM3A2915ABG) NOTE: Due to the evolving state of regulations and standards in the wireless LAN field (IEEE 802.11 and similar standards), the information provided herein is subject to change. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Information for the user Safety Notices The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency
(RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter meets the Human Exposure limits found in OET Bulletin 65, supplement C, 2001, and ANSI/
IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:
l Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. l Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. l Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged. l Use in specific environments:
directors of such environments. m The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety m The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). m The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. l Antenna use:
m In order to comply with FCC RF exposure limits, low gain integrated antennas should be located at a minimum distance of 20 cm (8 inches) or more from the body of all persons. m High-gain, wall-mount, or mast-mount antennas are designed to be professionally installed and should be located at a minimum distance of 30 cm (12 inches) or more from the body of all persons. Please contact your professional installer, VAR, or antenna manufacturer for proper installation requirements. l Explosive Device Proximity Warning (see below) l Antenna Warning (see below) l Use on Aircraft Caution (see below) l Other Wireless Devices (see below) l Power Supply (Access Point) (see below) Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: To comply with the FCC and ANSI C95.1 RF exposure limits, it is recommended for the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter installed in a desktop or portable computer, that the antenna for this device be installed so as to provide a separation distance of al least 20 cm (8 inches) from all persons and that the antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or radio transmitter. It is recommended that the user limit exposure time if the antenna is positioned closer than 20 cm
(8 inches). Warning: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN products are not designed for use with high-gain directional antennas. Use of such antennas with these products is illegal. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: Refer to the documentation supplied with wireless Ethernet adapters or other devices in the wireless network. Local Restrictions on 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g Radio Usage Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. The device transmit power control (TPC) interface is part of the Intel(R) PROSet/
Wireless software. Operational restrictions for Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) are provided by the system manufacturer. Any deviation from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. For country-specific information, see the additional compliance information supplied with the product. Wireless interoperability The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter is designed to be interoperable with other wireless LAN products that are based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:
l IEEE Std. 802.11b compliant Standard on Wireless LAN. l IEEE Std. 802.11g compliant Standard on Wireless LAN. l IEEE Std. 802.11a compliant Standard on Wireless LAN. l Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification, as defined by the WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance). The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter and your health The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter wireless device operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter wireless device may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:
l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter equipment on board airplanes, or l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Intel(R) PRO/
Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter wireless device before you turn it on. Regulatory information Information for the OEMs and Integrators:
The following statement must be included with all versions of this document supplied to an OEM or integrator, but should not be distributed to the end user. l This device is intended for OEM integrators only. l This device cannot be co-located with any other transmitter. l Please refer to the full Grant of Equipment document for other restrictions. l This device must be operated and used with a locally approved access point. Information To Be Supplied to the End User by the OEM or Integrator The following regulatory and safety notices must be published in documentation supplied to the end user of the product or system incorporating an Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection in compliance with local regulations. Host system must be labeled with "Contains FCC ID: XXXXXXXX", FCC ID displayed on label. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio approvals. Intel Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Intel Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Intel Corporation and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. Local Restriction of 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g Radio Usage The following statement on local restrictions must be published as part of the compliance documentation for all 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g products. Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation from permissible settings and restrictions in the country of use could be an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. FCC Radio Frequency Interference Requirements This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and /or damage this device. l This device is intended for OEM integrators only. l This device cannot be co-located with any other transmitter. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:
l This device may not cause harmful interference. l This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: The radiated output power of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter wireless network device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN wireless network device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20 cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the computer. Interference statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:
l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. l Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. CanadaIndustry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003, Issue 4, and RSS-210, No 4 (Dec 2000) and No 5 (Nov 2001). Cet appariel numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003, No. 4, et CNR-210, No 4 (Dec 2000) et No 5 (Nov 2001)..
"To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."
Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afinde fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Europe Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Europe ETSI) 5.15 - 5.35 GHz and 5.47-5.725 GHz (Europe ETSI) Low band 5.25 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only 5.47 - 5.725 GHz is current not allowed in Czech Republic and France. Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. Czech Intel(R) Corporation tmto prohlauje, e tento Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES."
Danish Dutch English Estonian Finnish French German Greek Hungary Icelandic Italian Latvian Undertegnede Intel(R) Corporation erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF Hierbij verklaart Intel(R) Corporation dat het toestel Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG Bij deze verklaart Intel(R) Corporation dat deze Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection voldoet aan de essentile eisen en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Hereby, Intel(R) Corporation, declares that this Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Kesolevaga kinnitab Intel(R) Corporation seadme Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Intel(R) Corporation vakuuttaa tten ett Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Par la prsente Intel(R) Corporation dclare que l'appareil Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Par la prsente, Intel(R) Corporation dclare que ce Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions de la directive 1999/5/CE qui lui sont applicables. Hiermit erklrt Intel(R) Corporation, dass sich dieser/diese/dieses Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet". (BMWi) Hiermit erklrt Intel(R) Corporation die bereinstimmung des Gertes Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. (Wien).=
E T A Intel(R) Corporation D N P Connection S S T S O S 1999/5/E K. Alulrott, Intel(R) Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Intel lysir her med yfir a thessi bunadur, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection , uppfyllir allar grunnkrofur, sem gerdar eru i R&TTE tilskipun ESB nr 1999/5/EC Con la presente Intel(R) Corporation dichiara che questo Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o Intel(R) Corporation deklar, ka Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. I Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network I P S K I T I O S T S O S A S L S S S Lithuanian Intel(R) Corporation deklaruoja, kad Intel(R) Pro/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connectionatitinka Malti Polish 1999/5/EC Direktyvos esminius reikalavimus ir kitas nuostatas". Hawnhekk, Intel(R) Corporation, jiddikjara li dan Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-
Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Niniejszym, Intel(R) Corporation, deklaruj, e Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection spenia wymagania zasadnicze oraz stosowne postanowienia zawarte Dyrektywie 1999/5/EC. M H A R O U S H L W N E T U M M O R F W N E T A R O I U S I W D E I P A I T H S E I A I O I P E C E T I K E D I A T A X E I H D H G I A Portuguese Intel(R) Corporation declara que este Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Intel(R) Corporation tmto vyhlasuje, e Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. iuo Intel(R) Corporation deklaruoja, kad is Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Por medio de la presente Intel(R) Corporation declara que el Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Hrmed intygar Intel(R) Corporation att denna Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Slovak Slovenia Spanish Swedish France Pour la France mtropolitaine 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2.400 -2.454 GHz (canaux 1 7) autoris en usage extrieur Pour la Guyane et la Runion 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur . 2.420 - 2.4835 GHz (canaux 5 13) autoris en usage extrieur Pour tout le territoire Fancais:
Seulement 5.15 -5.35 GHz autoris pour le 802.11a Belgium Dans le cas d'une utilisation prive, l'extrieur d'un btiment, au-dessus d'un espace public, aucun enregistrement n'est ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 300m un enregistrement auprs de l'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter l'IBPT. In geval van priv-gebruik, buiten een gebouw, op een openbare plaats, is geen registratie nodig, wanneer de afstand minder dan 300m is. Voor een afstand groter dan 300m is een registratie bij BIPT vereist. Voor registraties en licenties, gelieve BIPT te contacteren. Japan Latvia A license is required for outdoor use for operation in 2.4 GHz band. (Translation?) Italia A general authorization is requested for outdoor use in Italy The use of these equipments is regulated by:
- D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105
(free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use.
- D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Luso degli apparati regolamentato da:
- D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attivit soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso privato ;
- D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dellaccesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni. Greece A license is required for the outdoor use of band 5.470 5.725 GHz. Belarus 2.4 GHz OFDM (802.11g) is not allowed at this time. Indonesia 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Korea Kuwait 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Oman If the modules are less than 100 milliwatts they are unlicensed but if they are more than 100 milliwatts, the user is responsible for getting a license to operate from Telecommunications Regulatory Authority (TRA) in Sultanate of Oman. Taiwan Pakistan Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (PTA) Approved UAE 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Ukraine 5 GHz interface is not allowed at this time. Radio approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed in the manufacture OEM Regulatory Guidance document. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Regulatory Warning For use in (or with) UL Listed personal computers or compatible. Regulatory Information: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection Information for the User Regulatory Information Information for the user Safety Notices The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency
(RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection meets the Human Exposure limits found in OET Bulletin 65, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:
l Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. l Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. l Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged. l Use in specific environments:
m The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. m The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). m The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. l Explosive Device Proximity Warning (see below) l Antenna Warning (see below) l Use on Aircraft Caution (see below) l Other Wireless Devices (see below) l Power Supply (Access Point) (see below) Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: To comply with the FCC and ANSI C95.1 RF exposure limits, it is recommended for the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection installed in a desktop or portable computer, that the antenna for this device be installed so as to provide a separation distance of al least 20 cm (8 inches) from all persons and that the antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or radio transmitter. It is recommended that the user limit exposure time if the antenna is positioned closer than 20 cm (8 inches). Warning: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection product is not designed for use with high-
gain directional antennas. Use of such antennas with these products is illegal. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Local Restrictions on 802.11b and 802.11g Radio Usage All frequencies used by 802.11b and 802.11g are harmonized. Some countries though may not allow 802.11g. Wireless interoperability The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:
l IEEE Std. 802.11b-1999. Standard on Wireless LAN. l IEEE Std. 802.11g compliant. Standard on Wireless LAN. l Wireless Fidelity (WiFi(R)) certification, as defined by the WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance). The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN 2200BG Mini PCI adapter and your health The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless device operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless device may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:
l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter equipment on board airplanes, or l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Intel(R) PRO/
Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless device before you turn it on. Regulatory information The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio approvals. Intel Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Intel Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Intel Corporation and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:
l This device may not cause harmful interference. l This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: The radiated output power of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless network device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Intel PROSet/Wireless LAN wireless network device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 2 cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the computer. Interference statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:
l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. l Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. U.S. Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.462 GHz CanadaIndustry Canada (IC) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003, Issue 2, and RSS-210, Issue 4 (Dec. 2000). Cet appariel numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003, No. 2, et CNR-210, No 4 (Dec 2000). To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."
Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afinde fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity Europe Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Europe ETSI) Declaration of Conformity This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. English Finnish Dutch French Swedish Danish German Greek Icelandic Italian Spanish Hereby, Intel(R) Corporation, declares that this Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Intel(R) Corporation vakuuttaa tten ett Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hierbij verklaart Intel(R) Corporation dat het toestel Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Bij deze verklaart Intel(R) Corporation dat deze Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection voldoet aan de essentile eisen en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Par la prsente Intel(R) Corporation dclare que l'appareil Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Par la prsente, Intel(R) Corporation dclare que ce Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions de la directive 1999/5/CE qui lui sont applicables. Hrmed intygar Intel(R) Corporation att denna Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Undertegnede Intel(R) Corporation erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt Intel(R) Corporation, dass sich dieser/diese/dieses Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet". (BMWi) Hiermit erklrt Intel(R) Corporation die bereinstimmung des Gertes Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. (Wien) E T N P A Intel(R) Corporation D Connection S S T S O S 1999/5/E K. Intel lysir her med yfir a thessi bunadur, Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection , uppfyllir allar grunnkrofur, sem gerdar eru i R&TTE tilskipun ESB nr 1999/5/EC. Con la presente Intel(R) Corporation dichiara che questo Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Por medio de la presente Intel(R) Corporation declara que el Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. I Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network I P S K I T I O S T S O S A S L S S S Portuguese Intel(R) Corporation declara que este Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. M H A R O U S H L W N E T U M M O R F W N E T A R O I U S I W D E I P A I T H S E I A I O I P E C E T I K E D I A T A X E I H D H G I A Malti Hawnhekk, Intel(R) Corporation, jiddikjara li dan Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-
Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC New Member States requirements of Declaration of Conformity Estonian Hungary Slovak Czech Slovenia Latvian Kesolevaga kinnitab Intel(R) Corporation seadme Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Alulrott, Intel(R) Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak Intel(R) Corporation tmto vyhlasuje, e Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Intel(R) Corporation tmto prohlauje, e tento Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES."
iuo Intel(R) Corporation deklaruoja, kad is Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BGNetwork Connection atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Ar o Intel(R) Corporation deklar, ka Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem Lithuanian Intel(R) Corporation deklaruoja, kad Intel(R) Pro/Wireless 2200BG Network Connectionatitinka 1999/5/EC Direktyvos esminius reikalavimus ir kitas nuostatas". Niniejszym, Intel(R) Corporation, deklaruj, e Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection spenia wymagania zasadnicze oraz stosowne postanowienia zawarte Dyrektywie 1999/5/EC. Polish France Pour la France mtropolitaine 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2.400 -2.454 GHz (canaux 1 7) autoris en usage extrieur Pour la Guyane et la Runion 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2.420 - 2.4835 GHz (canaux 5 13) autoris en usage extrieur Pour tout le territoire Fan cais:
Seulement 5.15 -5.35 GHz autoris pour le 802.1 Belgique Dans le cas d'une utilisation prive, l'extrieur d'un btiment, au-dessus d'un espace public, aucun enregistrement n'est ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 300m un enregistrement auprs de l'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter l'IBPT. In geval van priv-gebruik, buiten een gebouw, op een openbare plaats, is geen registratie nodig, wanneer de afstand minder dan 300m is. Voor een afstand groter dan 300m is een registratie bij BIPT vereist. Voor registraties en licenties, gelieve BIPT te contacteren. Latvia A license is required for outdoor use for operation in 2.4 GHz band. Italia The use of these equipments is regulated by:
- D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105
(free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use.
- D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Luso degli apparati regolamentato da:
- D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attivit soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso privato;
- D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dellaccesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni. Belarus 2.4 GHz OFDM (802.11g) is not allowed at this time. Korea Taiwan Pakistan Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (PTA) Approved Radio approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed in the manufacture OEM Regulatory Guidance document. Back to Contents Back to Contents Warranty: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection User Guide Product Warranty Information One-Year Limited Hardware Warranty Limited Warranty Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection PCI Card (the Product), that the Product, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in material and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intels publicly available specifications for the Product for a period of one (1) year beginning on the date the Product was purchased in its original sealed packaging. SOFTWARE OF ANY KIND DELIVERED WITH OR AS PART OF THE PRODUCT IS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED "AS IS", SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDING ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-
INFRINGEMENT OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE), provided however, that Intel warrants that the media on which the software is furnished will be free from defects for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery. If such a defect appears within the warranty period, you may return the defective media to Intel for replacement or alternative delivery of the software at Intel's discretion and without charge. Intel does not warrant or assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of any information, text, graphics, links or other items contained within the software. If the Product which is the subject of this Limited Warranty fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will:
l REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR l REPLACE the Product with another product, OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the Product, l REFUND the then-current Intel price for the Product at the time a claim for warranty service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that the Product, whether purchased stand-alone or integrated with other products, including without limitation, semi-conductor components, will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited Warranty does NOT cover: (i) any costs associated with the replacement or repair of the Product, including labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs relating to the removal or replacement of any Product soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to any printed circuit board or integrated with other products; (ii) damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, abnormal, mechanical or environmental conditions, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, accident, abuse, alteration, repair, improper or unauthorized installation or improper testing, or (iii) any Product which has been modified or operated outside of Intels publicly available specifications or where the original product identification markings (trademark or serial number) have been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product; or (iv) issues resulting from modification (other than by Intel) of software products provided or included in the Product, (v) incorporation of software products, other than those software products provided or included in the Product by Intel, or (vi) failure to apply Intel-supplied modifications or corrections to any software provided with or included in the Product. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service for the Product, you may contact your original place of purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support ("ICS") center in your region
(http://support.intel.com/support/notebook/centrino/sb/CS-009883.htm) within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address, telephone numbers and, in the USA, valid credit card information;
(2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identification number found on the Product; and (4) an explanation of the problem. The Customer Service Representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem. Upon ICSs verification that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization ("RMA") number and provided with instructions for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid (within the USA), and assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intels property on receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations of liability and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTELS RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, LOSS OF GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION. ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE FOLLOWING LAWS:
FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL. IMPORTANT! UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED IN WRITING BY INTEL, THE INTEL PRODUCTS SOLD HEREUNDER ARE NOT DESIGNED, OR INTENDED FOR USE IN ANY MEDICAL, LIFE SAVING OR LIFE SUSTAINING SYSTEMS, TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS, NUCLEAR SYSTEMS, OR FOR ANY OTHER MISSION CRITICAL APPLICATION IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE INTEL PRODUCT COULD CREATE A SITUATION WHERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR.
1 2 3 | User Guide 2 | Users Manual | 3.11 MiB |
USERS GUIDE | REVISION -
MODEL X10 TABLET COMPUTER ARMOR X10 TRANSFLECTIVE Copyright 2008-2009, DRS Tactical Systems, Inc., Melbourne, Florida. All Rights Reserved. ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 2 PORT REPLICATOR VEHICLE DOCK WITH KEYBOARD PLATFORM VEHICLE DOCK BATTERY CHARGER BREAKOUT BOX DESK DOCK VEHICLE POWER SUPPLY To learn more about optional ARMOR accessories, please call 1-888-872-1100 COMPACT KEYBOARD 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 3 Trade Compliance Statement THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS TECHNOLOGY CONTROLLED UNDER THE U.S. EXPORT ADMINISTRATION REGULATIONS (EAR) AND MAY NOT BE EXPORTED OR TRANSFERRED TO ANY FOREIGN PERSON, FOREIGN COUNTRY OR FOREIGN ENTITY, BY ANY MEANS, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE, BUREAU OF INDUSTRY AND SECURITY (BIS) AND DRS TECHNOLOGIES. THE INFORMATION DISCLOSED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROPRIETARY DATA OF DRS TACTICAL SYSTEMS, INC., AND MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF DRS TACTICAL SYSTEMS, INC. DISTRIBUTION AUTHORIZED FOR USE PER DOCUMENT NUMBER 9120-02737-0100. VALIDATION REQUIRED FOR PLANNING, TESTING, INSPECTION, MANUFACTURING, PROCUREMENT AND QUOTES. NOTICE:
For body-worn operation, this computer has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with ARMOR supplied accessories, or accessories designed specifically for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. To comply with RF exposure requirements, DRS recommends that you keep a distance of at least 6 inches between the antenna and nearby persons. Please contact DRS Technical Support for certification information This X10 tablet computer has been tested for compliance with ATEX directive 94/9/EC for INTRINSIC SAFETY II 1 G. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003, Issue 4 June 7, 2004 and RSS-210, Issue No 7 (June 2007) and No 5 (Nov 2001). Cet appariel numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003, No. 4, June 7, 2004;
et CNR-210, No 7 (June 2007) et No 5 (Nov 2001).
[In Canada], this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service [in Canada], this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afinde fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 4 This Page Intentionally Left Blank 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 5 WARNING SUMMARY The ARMOR X10 complies with all applicable industrial health and safety requirements;
however there are certain safety considerations such as battery safety that you need to be aware of. Please read and comply with all warnings and cautions in this guide and in all other X10 documentation. A Warning! notice indicates a condition or action that could possibly result in injury or death to the user. A loss of data or damage to equipment. Caution! notice indicates a condition or action that could result in WARNING!
Do not drop or mishandle the batteries, immerse them in water, or subject them to high heat. Doing so could increase the risk of explosion or leakage, and possibly cause injury. WARNING!
The lithium-ion batteries used in this equipment contain material that is hazardous to your health. If battery contents come in contact with the eyes, IMMEDIATELY flush the affected area with clean water for 15 minutes and have someone else summon medical attention for you. Unaffected persons should assist the affected individual in the vital first flushing of the eyes. WARNING!
If battery material comes in contact with the skin, flush the affected area with clean water and seek immediate medical treatment. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 6 WARNING!
Place all shipping bags and packing materials safely out of the reach of small children, especially infants and toddlers. These items may pose a choking or suffocation hazard. WARNING!
Changes or modifications not performed by, or expressly authorized by, DRS Tactical Systems, Inc could be hazardous to your health, could cause damage to the equipment and could void your warranty, or could result in all of the above. WARNING!
The heat sink on the back of the X10 is protected with a plastic shield. Do not attempt to defeat its purpose as this could result in burns to the arm or hands. CAUTION!
Use this product only in vehicles with a voltage supply of +11 to +
16 VDC 2%. Voltages outside this range could cause unstable operation or result in permanent damage to the computer. CAUTION!
DO NOT connect the DC power supply from a Rapid Battery Charger into the computer or docking mechanism. This power supply is 24 VDC and will cause permanent damage to the computer. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 7 CAUTION!
DO NOT connect the computer to more than one power source at a time such as with the AC adapter connected to the computer and vehicle power connected to the docking station. Permanent damage to the X10 batteries or to the computer itself may result. Use this computer only with DRS battery P/N0300-15663-0001. CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Changing or recharging the battery must only be carried out in a non-hazardous area using the supplied AC adapter. The definition of hazardous areas can be found in Standard EN 60079-10. CAUTION!
DO NOT use this unit in classified areas unsuitable for its safety ratings. NE PAS UTILISER CETTE UNIT EN ZONES AINSI CLASSES IMPROPRES SA COTE DE SCURIT CAUTION!
When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN [in Canada], this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-
GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65 to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 8 This Page Intentionally Left Blank 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 9 Contents WARNING SUMMARY .............................................................................................................. 5 1. Welcome and Introduction ................................................................................................... 19 Your ARMOR X10 Purchase ................................................................................................... 20 ARMOR X10 Documentation ................................................................................................... 21 About This Guide ..................................................................................................................... 21 Viewing, Navigating, and Printing this Guide ........................................................................... 21 Terminology Used in this Guide ............................................................................................... 21 Please Help Us Maintain Top Quality Documentation ............................................................. 22 2. Getting to Know your ARMOR X10 ..................................................................................... 23 Key Features ........................................................................................................................... 23 Computer ............................................................................................................................ 23 Display ................................................................................................................................ 23 Batteries .............................................................................................................................. 23 PC Control Panel ..................................................................................................................... 28 Power On/Off Button ........................................................................................................... 28 Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) Button ................................................................ 28 Power Indicator ................................................................................................................... 29 Charging Status Indicator .................................................................................................... 29 Battery Gauge Indicators .................................................................................................... 29 Brightness Control ............................................................................................................... 29 Disk Activity Indicator .......................................................................................................... 29 Removable Components and Accessories .............................................................................. 30 Battery Pack ........................................................................................................................ 30 Hard Drive ........................................................................................................................... 30 AC Adapter .......................................................................................................................... 31 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 10 Optional Accessories for Your X10 .......................................................................................... 32 PCMCIA Cards .................................................................................................................... 32 Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Card ............................................................................... 32 Compact Keyboard ............................................................................................................. 32 Two-Bay External Battery Charger ..................................................................................... 33 Vehicle DC/DC Power Supply ............................................................................................. 34 Docking Stations and Port Replicators ................................................................................ 35 3. Getting Started ...................................................................................................................... 39 Installing the Battery Packs ..................................................................................................... 40 Power On/Off and Emergency Shutdown ................................................................................ 43 Turning the Tablet On and Off ............................................................................................ 43 Emergency Shutdown ......................................................................................................... 43 Touch Screen Operations ........................................................................................................ 43 Using the Stylus .................................................................................................................. 43 Configuring Your Touch Tablet for Screen Rotation ........................................................... 45 Pen Operations ........................................................................................................................ 46 Pen Adjustments ................................................................................................................. 47 Rotating the Screen ................................................................................................................. 47 Using the Intel Graphics Icon .............................................................................................. 48 Using the Intel Graphics Panel ............................................................................................ 48 Using a Keyboard Hot Key Combination .......................................................................... 49 Operating with a Second Display ............................................................................................. 49 Working with the Extended Desktop ................................................................................... 51 Using the Stylus or Pen with the Extended Desktop ........................................................... 52 Tips for Proper Use and Care Of Your Computer .................................................................... 52 4. Your ARMOR X10 Software .................................................................................................. 53 Windows XP Tablet Tutorials ................................................................................................... 53 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 11 Help with Microsoft Windows XP ........................................................................................ 54 Armor Utilities Program ............................................................................................................ 55 About Tab ............................................................................................................................ 55 Batteries Tab ....................................................................................................................... 56 Health Tab ........................................................................................................................... 57 Backlight Tab ...................................................................................................................... 58 Serial/OEM Tab ....................................................................................................................... 59 OEM Button Tab ................................................................................................................. 60 Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Utility ............................................................................... 61 Screen Selection Tab .......................................................................................................... 61 Calibration Tab .................................................................................................................... 62 Click Settings Tab ............................................................................................................... 63 Touch Settings Tab ............................................................................................................. 64 Tablet and Pen Settings Utility ................................................................................................. 65 Settings Tab ........................................................................................................................ 65 Display Tab ......................................................................................................................... 66 Pen Options Tab ................................................................................................................. 67 Intel PROSet Wireless Utility ................................................................................................... 68 IVT BlueSoleil Utility ................................................................................................................ 69 Realtek Audio Manager ........................................................................................................... 70 Special Software Applications ................................................................................................. 70 Quick Reference List ............................................................................................................... 71 5. Working with Your ARMOR X10 Tablet ............................................................................... 73 Entering Data Using the Input Panel ....................................................................................... 73 Writing Pad .......................................................................................................................... 73 Character Pad ..................................................................................................................... 73 On-screen Keyboard ........................................................................................................... 74 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 12 Customizing the Input Panel ............................................................................................... 74 Writing Documents Using Microsoft Windows Journal ............................................................ 74 Entering Data Using Speech Recognition ............................................................................... 75 6. Networking ............................................................................................................................ 77 Managing Your Bluetooth Connections ................................................................................... 77 Managing Your Wireless LAN Connections ............................................................................. 78 Turning Off the Wireless Card ............................................................................................. 79 Wireless Signal Quality ....................................................................................................... 79 Accessing a Network using an Ethernet Cable ........................................................................ 79 7. Optional Wireless Capabilities ............................................................................................ 81 Flexspace ................................................................................................................................ 81 Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) Capability .......................................................................... 81 Ease of Integration .............................................................................................................. 81 NMEA Standard Support ..................................................................................................... 81 GPS Specifications ............................................................................................................. 82 8. Backup and Restore Procedures for Spinning Media Hard Drives .................................. 85 Backup with QuickBack ........................................................................................................ 85 Disk Partitions ..................................................................................................................... 85 How to Access QuickBack for Initial Set-Up and Help Features ..................................... 86 Archive Backup ................................................................................................................... 86 User Backups ...................................................................................................................... 87 System Recovery CD .............................................................................................................. 87 9. Removal and Replacement .................................................................................................. 89 Removing and Replacing the Hard Drive ................................................................................ 89 Removing and Replacing an Optional PCMCIA Card ............................................................. 89 10. Display Management .......................................................................................................... 91 Adjusting the Display Brightness Manually .............................................................................. 91 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 13 Using the OEM Button ........................................................................................................ 91 Using the Armor Utilities Backlight Tab ............................................................................... 91 Adjusting the Brightness Automatically .................................................................................... 92 Setting the Advanced Backlight Control .............................................................................. 92 Touch Screen Calibration and Settings (Touch Tablets Only) ................................................. 94 Calibrating the Touch Screen .............................................................................................. 94 Adjusting the Click Settings for the Touch Screen Stylus ................................................... 97 Caring For the Touchscreen ............................................................................................... 99 Pen Screen Calibration and Settings (Pen Tablets Only) ...................................................... 100 Calibrating the Active Pen Screen .................................................................................... 100 Tablet and Pen Settings for Windows XP ......................................................................... 102 Caring for the Pen Tablet Screen ...................................................................................... 106 Monitoring the Health of Your ARMOR X10 .......................................................................... 107 Generating a Log of Temperature Variations .................................................................... 108 Configuring the OEM Button .................................................................................................. 109 Disabled ............................................................................................................................ 110 Ctrl/Alt/Del ......................................................................................................................... 110 Sleep Button ...................................................................................................................... 110 Inc. Backlight ..................................................................................................................... 110 Dec. Backlight ................................................................................................................... 110 Toggle Backlight ................................................................................................................ 110 Cycle LCD/Display ............................................................................................................ 110 Wi-Fi .................................................................................................................................. 110 11. Battery Management ......................................................................................................... 111 Safety and Handling Considerations for Your Batteries ........................................................ 112 When to Recharge Batteries .................................................................................................. 112 How to Recharge Your Batteries ........................................................................................... 113 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 14 Conditioning Your Battery ................................................................................................. 113 How to Tell When Batteries Have Finished Charging ............................................................ 113 Charging a Battery with an External 2-Bay Battery Charger ................................................. 114 Sequential Charger ........................................................................................................... 114 Smart (SmBus) Charger .................................................................................................... 114 What to Do for Over-discharged Batteries ............................................................................. 114 How to Increase Battery Service Time .................................................................................. 115 When to Replace a Battery .................................................................................................... 115 Where to Purchase Replacement Batteries ........................................................................... 116 How to Store Batteries When They Are Not in Use ............................................................... 117 Battery Tips for Best Performance ......................................................................................... 117 Disposing Of Your Batteries .................................................................................................. 118 Monitoring and Improving Battery Performance .................................................................... 119 Using the Power Meter Window ........................................................................................ 119 Using the ARMOR Utilities Batteries Tab .......................................................................... 120 Setting Low Level and Critical Battery Alarms .................................................................. 121 Turning Off Power-Consuming Peripherals ...................................................................... 122 Using Power Schemes to Conserve Batteries ....................................................................... 123 Selecting a Pre-Configured Power Scheme ...................................................................... 124 Customizing a Power Scheme .......................................................................................... 124 Activating Standby Power Mode ............................................................................................ 125 Activating Hibernation Power Mode ....................................................................................... 125 Enabling and Configuring Hibernation Mode .................................................................... 125 Manually Activating Hibernation Mode .............................................................................. 128 12. Frequently Asked Questions ........................................................................................... 129 1. What Options Are Available For Loading Software Onto The ARMOR X10? ......... 129 2. How Do I Install Drivers For Peripheral Devices Sold By DRS Technologies? ....... 129 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 15 3. How Do I Install Drivers For Peripheral Devices Not Sold By DRS Technologies? 129 4. What External Peripherals Does the ARMOR X10 Support? ................................. 129 5. 6. 7. How Do I Activate the On-Screen Keyboard? ......................................................... 130 How Can Hand Writing Recognition Be Disabled? ................................................. 130 How Can I Open the Windows Task Manager (Ctrl-Alt-Del) Without A Keyboard? 130 8. What Do I Do If My X10 Locks Up Or Freezes? ..................................................... 130 How Do I Clean The Docking (Champ) Connector On The Back Of The ARMOR 9. X10? 130 10. How Do I Clean The Display Surface? ................................................................... 131 11. What Do I Do When The Pen Gets Out Of Calibration? ......................................... 131 12. What If The Pen Still Will Not Align? ....................................................................... 131 13. What Can I Do When The Start Button Disappears? ........................................... 131 14. What Do I Do When The Battery Discharges and Will Not Charge In The Unit? .... 132 15. How is USB supported by The ARMOR X10? ........................................................ 132 16. What Are DRS Technical Support Hours Of Operation? ........................................ 132 13. DRS Technical Support .................................................................................................... 133 Before You Contact Us .......................................................................................................... 133 How to Obtain Warranty Service ........................................................................................... 133 If You Need Further Information ............................................................................................ 136 Warranty Information ............................................................................................................. 137 General Information .......................................................................................................... 137 Length of Warranty ............................................................................................................ 137 Terms and Conditions ....................................................................................................... 137 Additional Information ....................................................................................................... 138 14. Acronyms and Glossary ................................................................................................... 139 Acronyms ............................................................................................................................... 139 Glossary ................................................................................................................................. 140 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 16 Figures Figure 1. ARMOR X10 Components and Accessories .............................................................. 20 Figure 2. ARMOR X10 Key Features Front View ................................................................... 24 Figure 3. ARMOR X10 Key Features - Left Side View ............................................................. 25 Figure 4. ARMOR X10 Key Features - Right Side View ............................................................ 26 Figure 5. ARMOR X10 Key Features - Rear View ..................................................................... 27 Figure 6. ARMOR X10 Key Features - Bottom View ................................................................. 27 Figure 7. PC Control Panel ........................................................................................................ 28 Figure 8. ARMOR X10 Battery Pack .......................................................................................... 30 Figure 9. ARMOR X10 Hard Drive ............................................................................................. 30 Figure 10. ARMOR X10 AC Adapter ......................................................................................... 31 Figure 11. ARMOR X10 Compact Keyboard ............................................................................. 32 Figure 12. Two-Bay External Battery Charger ............................................................................ 33 Figure 13. Vehicle DC/DC Power Supplies ................................................................................ 34 Figure 14. ARMOR X10 Desk Dock ........................................................................................... 35 Figure 15. ARMOR X10 Port Replicator .................................................................................... 36 Figure 16. ARMOR X10 Vehicle Docks ..................................................................................... 37 Figure 17. ARMOR X10 Battery Compartments ........................................................................ 40 Figure 18. Battery Positioned for Insertion .................................................................................. 41 Figure 19. Battery Latch in Locked Position ............................................................................. 42 Figure 20. Intel Graphics Panel with Display Settings Option Selected ..................................... 48 Figure 21. Intel Graphics Panel with Hot Keys Option Selected ................................................ 49 Figure 22. Accessing Tablet PC Tutorials and Information ......................................................... 54 Figure 23. Armor Utilities Panel About Tab ............................................................................. 55 Figure 24. Armor Utilities Panel Batteries Tab ........................................................................ 56 Figure 25. Armor Utilities Panel Health Tab ............................................................................ 57 Figure 26. Armor Utilities Panel Backlight Tab ....................................................................... 58 Figure 27. Armor Utilities Panel Serial/OEM Tab .................................................................... 59 Figure 28. Armor Utilities Panel OEM Button Tab .................................................................. 60 Figure 29. Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Screen Selection Tab.................................... 61 Figure 30. Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Calibration Tab.............................................. 62 Figure 31. Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Click Settings Tab ......................................... 63 Figure 32. Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Touch Settings Tab ....................................... 64 Figure 33. Tablet and Pen Settings Window Settings Tab ...................................................... 65 Figure 34. Tablet and Pen Settings Window Display Tab ....................................................... 66 Figure 35. Tablet and Pen Settings Panel Pen Options Tab .................................................. 67 Figure 36. Intel PROSet/Wireless Panel .................................................................................... 68 Figure 37. IVT BlueSoleil Utility ................................................................................................. 69 Figure 38. Realtek Audio Manager Panel .................................................................................. 70 Figure 39. Input Panel with No Mode Showing (for illustration purposes only) ........................... 73 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 17 Figure 40. Writing Pad Mode ...................................................................................................... 73 Figure 41. Character Pad Mode .................................................................................................. 74 Figure 42. On-Screen Keyboard Mode ....................................................................................... 74 Figure 43. IVT BlueSoleil Utility ................................................................................................. 77 Figure 44. Wireless Network Access .......................................................................................... 78 Figure 45. QuickBack Graphical User Interface ..................................................................... 86 Figure 46. Armor Utilities Screen Backlight Tab ..................................................................... 91 Figure 47. Advanced Backlight Control Window. ...................................................................... 93 Figure 48. Settings Tab of the Tablet and Pen Settings Panel. .............................................. 102 Figure 49. Display Tab of the Tablet and Pen Settings Panel. ............................................... 104 Figure 50. Pen Options Tab of the Tablet and Pen Settings Panel. ....................................... 105 Figure 51. Armor Utilities Panel with Health Tab Displayed .................................................... 107 Figure 52. Armor Utilities Panel OEM Button Tab ................................................................... 109 Figure 53. ARMOR X10 Battery Label ..................................................................................... 116 Figure 54. Battery Charge Status in the Power Meter Window................................................ 119 Figure 55. Armor Utilities Batteries Tab ................................................................................... 120 Figure 56. Alarms Tab of the Power Options Properties Window ............................................ 122 Figure 57. Power Schemes Tab of the Power Options Properties Window ............................. 123 Figure 58. Power Schemes Tab Showing Available Power Schemes ..................................... 124 Figure 59. Hibernate Tab of the Power Options Properties Window ....................................... 126 Figure 60. Power Schemes Tab with Hibernation Mode Enabled ........................................... 127 Tables Table 1. Install the Battery Packs .............................................................................................. 41 Table 2. Stylus Actions. ............................................................................................................ 44 Table 3. Configure the X10 for Screen Rotation ......................................................................... 45 Table 4. Operate a Second Display with the X10 ...................................................................... 50 Table 5. Quick Reference List ..................................................................................................... 71 Table 6. Set up a Physical LAN Connection .............................................................................. 80 Table 7. Leadtek LR9548S GPS Receiver Specifications ......................................................... 82 Table 8. Boot the X10 from the Recovery CD ............................................................................ 88 Table 9. Remove and Replace the Hard Drive .......................................................................... 89 Table 10. Remove and Replace a PCMCIA Card ...................................................................... 89 Table 11. Calibrate the Touch Screen ....................................................................................... 95 Table 12. Adjust Stylus Click Settings for the Touch Screen ..................................................... 98 Table 13. Calibrate the Active Pen Screen .............................................................................. 101 Table 14. Generate a Temperature Variation Log ................................................................... 108 Table 15. Recover an Over-discharged Battery. ...................................................................... 115 Table 16. ARMOR X10 Battery Replacement Schedule .......................................................... 116 Table 17. Set Low Level and Critical Battery Alarms. ............................................................. 121 Table 18. Enable and Configure Hibernation Mode ................................................................. 126 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 18 Table 19. Manually Activate Hibernation Mode ....................................................................... 128 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Deleted: our specially designed Deleted: Its hot-swappable battery access means you can change the batteries without the need for tools and without interrupting normal computer operations. ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 19 1. Welcome and Introduction Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the ARMOR X10 Rugged Tablet with Intel Core Duo Mobile technology. Your X10 is one of the most durable, reliable, and easy-to-use tablet computers on the market today. The ARMOR new X10 is housed in magnesium alloy chassis with an aluminum insert for better heat dissipation. It comes with sealed external connector technology and meets IP 66 level protection from dust, dirt, water and other damaging elements. can computer The ARMOR X10 ruggedized tablet be mounted in a desk docking station or vehicle dock (shown here in a desk dock with a compact keyboard). The ARMOR X10 gives you the power of a desktop computer in a rugged portable tablet computer. The X10 can be mounted in a vehicle or it can be used on a desktop, on the ground, held on the lap, or held in the crook of the arm. You can write and perform operations directly on the screen, work with a virtual on-screen keyboard, or attach a USB keyboard (compact keyboard, standard-sized USB keyboard, or Bluetooth keyboard). We take pride in providing high-quality products and superior customer service. Thank you for choosing the DRS ARMOR X10 Tablet Computer, and for your trust in the ARMOR line of products. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 20 Your ARMOR X10 Purchase Your purchase includes the items and accessories shown in Figure 1. Please confirm that all of these items are present and in good condition. NOTE: Your hard drive is shipped already installed in the computer. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 1 Contact your ARMOR X10 Tablet Computer sales representative if any item is missing or damaged. ARMOR X10 TABLET COMPUTER SOFT CARRY CASE STYLUS WITH LANYARD BATTERY SHOULDER STRAP AC ADAPTER QUICK START GUIDE Figure 1. ARMOR X10 Components and Accessories 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 21 ARMOR X10 Documentation The following documents are contained on your ARMOR X10 Tablet Computer in PDF format. To access these documents, double-click on the appropriate icon on the desktop. ARMOR X10 Users Guide Provides operating information and descriptions of all controls and indicators. Contains necessary procedures to setup and operate the ARMOR X10. ARMOR X10 Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide provides information to help you get your ARMOR X10 computer up and running as quickly as possible. ARMOR X10 Maintenance Manual The Maintenance Manual provides list of system information, special maintenance tasks, and a troubleshooting specifications. About This Guide This manual and its complementary documents located on your hard drive will provide the majority of the information you will need to setup and maintain your ARMOR X10 Tablet Computer. However, should you need additional technical information, please visit our web site at:
www.drsarmor.com, or call DRS Technical Support toll-free at 1-888-872-1100. Viewing, Navigating, and Printing this Guide This guide can be viewed interactively on the tablet using Adobe Reader or printed to paper. To view this guide on the computer, click on the Users Guide icon on the desktop. The latest version of Adobe PDF Reader is available for downloading free from www.adobe.com. If you are viewing this guide on the tablet, you can click on the blue underlined text to navigate within the guide and to access resources on the Internet. To print the guide to paper, use the Adobe Reader Print menu options for best results. Terminology Used in this Guide As the result of long use and the evolution of the Windows operating system, some functions and buttons may be called by more than one name and some of these names are used interchangeably, which can lead to confusion. The following list provides some of the more common examples you may encounter in this manual:
Standby = Stand By = Suspend Hibernate = Sleep OEM Button = Side Button = Windows Security Key Button 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 22 Please Help Us Maintain Top Quality Documentation This guide was produced with the latest information available and verified for accuracy. However, mistakes are possible, and product updates may supersede the information in this guide. We encourage you to contact DRS Technical Support toll-free at 1-888-872-1100 with suggestions and corrections so that we can maintain the highest possible quality documentation for you and for future customers. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 23 2. Getting to Know your ARMOR X10 Key Features The following paragraphs and images describe the principal components, controls, indicators, connectors and accessories of the ARMOR X10. Please take a few moments to read through this section to become more familiar with your computer. Refer to the ARMOR X10 Maintenance Manual for a list of hardware and environmental specifications. All references to front/rear, left/right and top/bottom locations in this guide are relative to the front (or face-on) view of the computer as it appears when it is set up for operation. NOTE Computer The ARMOR X10 Tablet Computer (Figure 2) is equipped with an Intel Core Duo U2500 Ultra-
Low Voltage 1.2 GHz processor with up to 2 GB of random access memory (RAM). It comes configured with Windows XP Tablet SP2, Vista Business, or Linux #1 operating system. It has an integrated Wi-Fi 802.11 a/b/g wireless LAN and Bluetooth wireless network and can be equipped with an optional GPS receiver. Display The standard X10 display a 1024 x 768 ppi TFT LED screen. An optional LCD transflective screen is available for outdoor viewing in bright sunlight. This screen is optically bonded to enhance viewability. If your X10 is a touch tablet, the display surface is constructed of a touch-sensitive film over glass that is operated by the pressure of a stylus or fingertip. If your X10 is a pen tablet, the display surface is glass with a special digitizer screen bonded to the inside of the glass. The display is operated using an inductively coupled pen. Batteries The X10 batteries are high efficiency lithium-ion batteries that are hot swappable, That is, If you have two batteries installed, you can replace one battery while the tablet operates on the other battery. With this capability, you do not have to shut down the computer or interrupt your current operating session in order to replace a battery. The X10 can operate as long as 4 hours on two fully charged batteries. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 2 Deleted: comes equipped with ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 24 ACTIVE PEN OR TOUCH-
SENSITIVE SCREEN WI-FI AND BLUETOOTH ANTENNAS OPTIONAL GPS ANTENNA PC CONTROL PANEL Figure 2. ARMOR X10 Key Features Front View 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 25 PCMCIA SLOT COVER DC INPUT JACK DC INPUT JACK DUST COVER Figure 3. ARMOR X10 Key Features - Left Side View 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 26 SECONDARY WI-FI ANTENNA
(BEHIND COVER) SPEAKER USB PORT ETHERNET PORT Figure 4. ARMOR X10 Key Features - Right Side View 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 27 DOCKING CONNECTOR SERIAL NUMBER Figure 5. ARMOR X10 Key Features - Rear View DOCKING STATION MOUNT POINTS HARD DRIVE COVER BATTERY LATCH BATTERIES Figure 6. ARMOR X10 Key Features - Bottom View 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 28 PC Control Panel The PC Control Panel provides the primary controls and indicators for the ARMOR X10. POWER ON/OFF OEM BUTTON POWER INDICATOR CHARGING STATUS INDICATOR AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR DISK ACTIVITY INDICATOR BATTERY GAUGE INDICATORS Figure 7. PC Control Panel Power On/Off Button To turn the computer on or off, press the Power On/Off button for 1-3 seconds. This duration provides a safeguard against accidentally bumping the button during mobile use. In case of emergency, you can shut down the computer quickly by pressing and holding the Power On/Off button for 5 seconds or longer. However, this will result in an abnormal shutdown of the Windows operating system and any work in progress will be lost. Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) Button This button is also called the Side Button or Windows Security Key Button. It operates in a number of different ways depending on how it is configured in the ARMOR Utilities application. Its default setting invokes the Windows CTRL-ALT-DEL command, which opens the Windows Task Manager screen. It can also be programmed to do such tasks as switching between the tablet display and an external display, varying the display brightness, placing the computer in 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 29 hibernation mode, and turning the Wi-Fi card on and off. Complete instructions for configuring the OEM button can be found in Configuring the OEM Button in the Appendix. Power Indicator The Power indicator is a green LED that illuminates whenever the X10 is powered up. Charging Status Indicator The Charging Status indicator is a green LED that is lit whenever external power is available to charge the batteries. It blinks while the batteries are charging and is on steady when the batteries are fully charged. When the tablet is on batteries only, the Charging Status indicator is off. Battery Gauge Indicators The Battery Gauge consists of five LEDs that are used to indicate the charge remaining in your battery or batteries. Each light represents approximately 20% of the average charge of two batteries or the remaining charge of a single battery. When all five LEDs are lit and the charging status indicator is on steady, the batteries are fully charged. As the batteries are used, the LEDs will turn off from top to bottom to indicate the remaining charge. Each LED will blink upon transitioning to next lower charge level indicator. Brightness Control The brightness of the display is varied by controlling the intensity of the LCD backlight. You can control the brightness (backlight level) manually or let the computer control it automatically. The brightness can be manually adjusted by repeatedly pressing the OEM button or by adjusting the slider in the Backlight tab of the Armor Utilities panel. If you have a transflective screen, the effect of the brightness control when operating in bright sunlight will be minimal and the overall brightness will be the result of reflected light. When the automatic brightness control is enabled, an ambient light sensor measures the surrounding light level. If the surrounding light level decreases by a certain percentage, the screen brightness will also decrease correspondingly. If the ambient light increases by a certain percentage, the screen brightness will increase correspondingly. If you use the automatic brightness control function, you must keep the light sensor uncovered. NOTE Click on Start All Programs ARMOR Utilities and select the Backlight tab to adjust the backlight manually or to activate the light sensor for automatic brightness control. Refer to Brightness Adjustment for detailed information on adjusting the screen brightness. Disk Activity Indicator 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Highlight ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 30 The Disk Activity indicator is a red LED that flashes when the disk drive is being accessed. The flashes are intermittent and depend on the read and write cycles of the hard drive. Removable Components and Accessories Battery Pack Your ARMOR X10 comes can be equipped with 1 or 2 removable battery packs that are installed in compartments in the rear of the tablet (see Figure 5). These battery packs are hot-
swappable and can be removed one at a time without interrupting computer operation. Two fully-charged battery packs will provide up to 4 hours of operation depending on the workload on the computer. A single battery will provide 2-3 hours of operation depending on workload. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 5 Figure 8. ARMOR X10 Battery Pack Hard Drive The ARMOR X10 comes equipped with either a 2.5 SATA rotating media hard disk drive (HDD) or a 2.5 solid-state hard drive (SSHD). The hard drive houses the operating system and application software and provides non-volatile memory space for the CPU. A plastic tab is attached to the front of the drive to facilitate easy removal. For information on available hard drive capacities, please contact DRS Tactical Systems toll free at (888) 872-1100. The drive is located in a compartment in the bottom of the tablet, as indicated in Figure 6. This drive should only be removed or installed by a qualified technician. Deleted: Figure 6 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Figure 9. ARMOR X10 Hard Drive 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 31 AC Adapter Included with your ARMOR X10 is a +15 VDC, 4.8 amp power supply, or AC Adapter. This external power supply is used to recharge your computers battery packs and to provide power to the computer without draining the batteries. A European power cord is available. Figure 10. ARMOR X10 AC Adapter 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 32 Optional Accessories for Your X10 There are a number of optional accessories that extend the capabilities of the X10 or make it easier for you to use and maintain. PCMCIA Cards Your ARMOR X10 provides two PC/PCMCIA card slots that can accommodate either two Type II cards or a single Type III card. These cards can provide enhanced features such as extended communications capabilities and additional memory capacity. Contact your ARMOR sales representative or DRS Technical Support for information on available PCMCIA card options. Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Card Your X10 is equipped with a slot (see Figure 17) to enable use of a SIM card. A SIM card is a small electronic card that contains a cell phone subscribers unique ID, billing information, and network permissions. It allows users to easily transport their phone numbers and contacts to new phones simply by removing the card from the old phone and inserting it in the new one. This is a future capability that will allow you to receive and send cell phone calls and text messages through your X10 computer. Compact Keyboard A reduced-size USB keyboard (Figure 11) is available for use with the ARMOR X10 computer. The keyboard is approximately half the size of a standard keyboard and can be mounted on a special platform for use with a vehicle docking station or connected to a desk docking station to conserve space on a table or desktop. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 17 Deleted: Figure 11 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Figure 11. ARMOR X10 Compact Keyboard 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 12 ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 33 Two-Bay External Battery Charger A two-bay battery charger (Figure 12) is available for faster and more convenient charging. Each battery bay has a charging time of approximately 2.5 hours. The external charger is also handy for recharging spare battery packs or batteries kept in storage. Two types of external battery chargers are available from DRS: a sequential charger that rapidly charges each battery and a smart battery charger has an extra conditioning feature (see Smart (SmBus) Charger. A European power cord is available for both types, and a DC power cable is also available for use in a vehicle or other mobile environments. Smart Battery Charger with Battery Calibration In addition to conditioning the battery, this type of charger provides the capability to re-program the battery gauge chip inside the battery to ensure that the Battery Gauge LEDS on the X10 correctly reflect the charge level in the battery. Only one battery can be calibrated at a time (in the left slot only) and the total processing time (conditioning + calibration) is approximately 8 hours. The right bay can still be used for conditioning other batteries. Sequential Battery Charger without Battery Calibration This type of charger conditions the battery in approximately 2.5 hours per bay. It does not recalibrate the battery gauge chip inside the battery. Figure 12. Two-Bay External Battery Charger 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 34 Vehicle DC/DC Power Supply The DC/DC converter power supply takes 11-16 VDC vehicle power and converts it to a regulated 15VDC, 5 amp output. Two styles are available, as shown in Figure 13: a hard-wired version that can be directly connected to the vehicle fuse panel, and a plug-in version that can be plugged into the lighter socket. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 13 HARD-WIRED VERSION PLUG-IN VERSION Figure 13. Vehicle DC/DC Power Supplies 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 35 Docking Stations and Port Replicators There are a number of docking stations available to support and enhance your X10 either on the desk top or in a vehicle. Desk Dock The desk dock (Figure 14) holds the X10 at a comfortable viewing angle on a desktop or table and provides connections for a second display or external video device, a second USB port, three serial com ports and a parallel port, plus external power for the X10. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 14 Figure 14. ARMOR X10 Desk Dock 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 36 Port Replicator The Port Replicator provides essentially the same features as the desk dock in a more compact form. It has connections for a second display or external video device, a second USB port, two serial com ports and a parallel port, plus external power for the X10. It is attached to the X10 docking connector and supports the computer at a comfortable viewing angle, as shown in Figure 15. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 15 Figure 15. ARMOR X10 Port Replicator 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 37 Vehicle Docks Several types of vehicle docking stations, or vehicle docks, are available for use with the ARMOR X10. Some can be equipped with a platform to support a compact keyboard or even a joystick to make it easier to perform the functions of the stylus or pen while operating in a vehicle. Figure 16 shows two types of vehicle docks. One is shown equipped with a mounting platform for the compact keyboard. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 16 Figure 16. ARMOR X10 Vehicle Docks For information on these and any other ARMOR X10 accessories, please contact your ARMOR sales representative or call DRS Tactical Systems toll free at 1-888-872-1100. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 38 This Page Intentionally Left Blank 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 39 3. Getting Started CAUTION!
Use this product only in vehicles with a regulated voltage supply of
+11-16 VDC 2%. Voltages outside this range could cause unstable operation or result in permanent damage to the computer. CAUTION!
Use only the external AC Adapter provided with your ARMOR X10 or an equivalent model approved by DRS. Attempting to use a different model power supply could result in equipment damage. CAUTION!
DO NOT connect the computer to more than one power source at a time (such as an AC power supply and docking station) or permanent damage to the battery and/or computer may result. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 17 Deleted: Table 1 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 40 Installing the Battery Packs If your X10 has only one battery pack, install it in the Primary Battery compartment. NOTE The first step to getting your X10 operating is to install and charge the battery packs. The battery compartments are located on the rear of the unit, as shown in Figure 17. Follow the procedure in Table 1 to install the batteries. PRIMARY BATTERY COMPARTMENT
(BATTERY #1) SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY MODULE (SIM) CARD SLOT
(FUTURE CAPABILITY) SECONDARY BATTERY COMPARTMENT
(BATTERY #2) Figure 17. ARMOR X10 Battery Compartments 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 41 Table 1. Install the Battery Packs STEP ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION Locate the yellow latch between the two battery compartments on the back of the unit, as shown in Figure 17. This latch holds the battery packs in place and is designed so that only one battery can be inserted or removed at a time. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 17 Press a fingertip into the latch and turn it until a detent is felt and the notch lines up with the corner of the battery that is to be installed. CAUTION!
Do not force the battery into position. If the battery will not slip easily onto the connector, pull it slightly toward the yellow latch and press in gently. 3. Position the first battery as shown in Figure 18 and gently press down on the battery until the connector seats. Deleted: Figure 18 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue 1. 2. BATTERY CORNER Figure 18. Battery Positioned for Insertion BATTERY LATCH 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 42 STEP ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. If your X10 has only one battery, go to Step 7. If your X10 has two battery packs, turn the battery latch to line up with the edge of the second battery. Install the second battery and press down until the connector seats. Turn the battery latch to the position shown in Figure 19 to lock the battery (or batteries) in place. Connect the AC Adapter to the DC input jack on the left side of the tablet and allow the batteries to charge for 3-8 hours (total time depends on the current level of charge when the batteries were unpacked). Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 19 You can power up and operate the X10 while the batteries charge, but the total charging time may be longer due to power demands by the computer. Figure 19. Battery Latch in Locked Position 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 43 Power On/Off and Emergency Shutdown Turning the Tablet On and Off Turn the computer on by pressing the Power On/Off button on the PC Control Panel for 1-3 seconds and then releasing. The ARMOR X10 will perform self-checking routines during the start-up process. All units are configured at the factory to automatically boot to the Microsoft Windows desktop unless a custom configuration has been requested. Turn the unit off by pressing the Power On/Off button again for 1-3 seconds or select Start
Turn Off the Computer Turn Off. Windows will automatically shut down and the unit will turn off Emergency Shutdown If an emergency condition occurs where the tablet needs to be shut down immediately, press and hold the on/off button for more than four seconds. This procedure should only be used in emergencies because improperly shutting down Windows may result in corruption of the operating system and/or the loss of data. Should system corruption or loss of data occur, please contact DRS Technical Support. Touch Screen Operations Using the Stylus If your tablet is equipped with a touchscreen display, the stylus is the primary means of operating the computer. A fingertip can also be used but with less accuracy. The Windows XP Tablet operating system allows the stylus to duplicate the functions of an external 2-button mouse. Table 2 lists each stylus action, its purpose and the corresponding mouse action. NOTE Tapping with the stylus requires only light to moderate pressure. It is possible to damage the stylus and/or the display by pounding the tip against the surface with too much force. The terms click, tap and select refer to the same actions when using the stylus, or fingertip. NOTE 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 2 ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 44 Table 2. Stylus Actions. STYLUS ACTION PURPOSE CORRESPONDING MOUSE ACTION Tap once Select tabs or open submenus. Highlight a label or option. Fill selection boxes. Activate buttons. Deselect highlighted objects (tap next to the icon). Left-click Tap twice Start an application or open a folder. Double-click Press over an object, hold contact with display, drag stylus and release pressure. Press over icon or option and hold contact with display without moving stylus. Press and hold contact with display, drag box around objects. Move an object on the desktop. Drag-and-drop Open menu options. Right-click Selects multiple objects. Left-click and drag box to select. NOTE If you have a touch tablet, do not use the Tablet and Pen Settings window in Control Panel to calibrate the screen. Doing so could cause the loss of screen calibration. After a period of normal usage, the screen may need to be calibrated with the stylus to ensure the actual touch point matches the position of the cursor. To perform this calibration, refer to Calibrating the Touch Screen. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 45 Configuring Your Touch Tablet for Screen Rotation To rotate a touch tablet screen, you must have the TSHARC HTrayApp.exe program running in is displayed in the taskbar the background. When this application is running, a TSHARC icon tray. To execute the HTrayApp.exe file, follow the procedure in Table 3. Table 3. Configure the X10 for Screen Rotation STEP ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION 1. Click Start Run Browse and browse to your local disk (normally C:/ and select Program Files Tsharc. 2. Double-click on the HTrayApp.exe file or highlight the file and click Open and then OK. in the This will place a TSHARC icon taskbar tray. The icon will look like a finger pointing to a display. 3. Right click the TSHARC icon. An options menu is displayed as shown below:
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 3 4. Make sure the Autodetect Rotation option is checked. This will ensure that you maintain calibration when rotating the screen. NOTE In Autodetect Rotation mode, the rotation direction options are grayed out and the computer automatically rotates your screen in the counterclockwise direction. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 46 STEP 5. ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION If you plan on using the rotation function on a regular basis, select the Start Tray Application on Startup option. The TSHARC icon will be opened each time you start the computer. Pen Operations If your ARMOR X10 is a pen tablet, the pen is the primary screen navigation and data entry tool. Without a keyboard attached, the pen is the only means of communicating with the computer. The pen functions like a two-button mouse. There are two switches: one in the pen tip and another on the barrel of the pen. The tip switch performs the same functions as the left button on a mouse and the barrel switch performs the same functions as the right mouse button. Do not depress the barrel switch when writing on the display as this will adversely affect handwriting recognition. NOTE To activate the tip switch, simply press the tip of the pen against the display. This is similar to clicking the left button of a mouse. Double clicking is accomplished by double tapping with the pen. Move an icon by pressing the pen directly overhead and dragging the icon to the desired destination, keeping the pen in constant contact with the display. For right click functions, just depress the switch on the barrel of the pen. Windows XP Tablet PC Edition software also allows you to right click by pressing and holding the pen on the screen for 1-2 seconds. Press and hold is an optional feature. You can turn this feature on or off by going to the Control Panel, and then selecting Tablet and Pen Settings. NOTE If you have a pen tablet, do not use the Hampshire TSHARC panel to calibrate the screen. Doing so could cause the loss of screen calibration. After a period of normal usage, the screen may need to be calibrated with the pen to ensure accurate touches. To perform this calibration, refer to Calibrating the Active Pen Screen. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 47 Pen Adjustments If your X10 uses the Windows XP Tablet PC operating system, you can adjust attributes related to use of the pen (e.g. tap speed, left/right hand orientation, etc.). Refer to Tablet and Pen Settings for Windows XP for instructions. If you have the Windows XP Pro operating system, look in the PenOffice tools folder found in the Windows Program list. The location of the cursor on the display is the location of input regardless of the location of the pen tip. The cursor and the pen tip should be closely aligned when the pen is close to the surface of the display. After a period of normal usage, the screen may need to be calibrated with the pen to ensure accurate touches. To perform this calibration, refer to Calibrating the Active Pen Screen. Rotating the Screen Your ARMOR X10 supports the Windows XP Tablet function of rotating the screen layout between Portrait and Landscape modes. In Portrait mode, the long axis of the screen is along the left and right sides of the screen; in landscape mode (default orientation), the long axis is along the top and bottom of the screen. You can rotate the screen clockwise in four 90 degree steps, alternating between portrait and landscape orientation. If your X10 is a Touch tablet, refer to Configuring Your Touch Tablet for Screen Rotation before attempting to rotate the screen. NOTE NOTE If your X10 is a Pen tablet, do not use the Screen Orientation options in the Display tab of the Tablet and Pen Settings window. This could cause you to lose screen calibration. NOTE If you lose calibration when rotating the screen and cannot use the stylus to return to the default orientation, attach an external keyboard and press Ctrl+Alt+Up Arrow. This will return the display to the default landscape orientation. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 48 There are three ways to rotate the screen:
1. By using the Intel Graphics icon in the task tray 2. By using the Intel Graphics panel 3. By using a Hot Key combination with the keyboard. Using the Intel Graphics Icon in the task tray and select the Rotation option. Then Right-click the Intel Graphics icon select one of the four rotation angles. The Normal position is the default landscape mode as viewed with the PC Control Panel oriented to the upper right, as shown in Figure 2. Using the Intel Graphics Panel To open the Intel Graphics panel, right-click on the Intel Graphics icon in the task tray and select Graphics Properties Display Settings, or select Start Control Panel IntelGMA Driver for Mobile Display Settings. The Intel Graphics panel opens as shown in Figure 20. Select the rotation angle and click OK. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 2 Deleted: Figure 20 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Figure 20. Intel Graphics Panel with Display Settings Option Selected 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 49 Using a Keyboard Hot Key Combination Figure 21 shows a list of the default hot key combinations programmed into your ARMOR X10. You can view this listing by clicking on the Hot Keys option in the left pane of the Intel Graphics panel. The designations Up, Left, Down and Right refer to the arrow keys. You can use the on-screen keyboard or an attached USB keyboard to enter the hot key combinations. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 21 Figure 21. Intel Graphics Panel with Hot Keys Option Selected Operating with a Second Display The ARMOR X10 video circuits can drive both the built-in LCD display and a second external flat panel display or CRT monitor. The built-in LCD panel has a maximum screen resolution of 800 x 600 (SVGA) or 1024 x 768 (XGA) pixels per inch (ppi), while screen resolutions up to 1920 x 1440 ppi can be achieved using an external display. You can configure the X10 display and external display as follows:
Tablet (notebook) display only External (monitor) display only Cloned External display set to mirror the tablet display Cloned Tablet display set to mirror the external display Extended desktop Tablet is the primary display Extended desktop External monitor is the primary display 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 50 NOTE The X10 tablet does not have an external video connector. You must have a docking station or port replicator to connect a second display. Follow the procedure in Table 4 to connect and operate with a second display. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 4 STEP 1. Your last display selection remains when you shutdown and reboot the computer. NOTE Table 4. Operate a Second Display with the X10 ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION Shut down the X10 and connect the external displays video cable to the VGA connector on the rear of the docking station, the computer. reboot then 2. Power up the external monitor. The power light is lit but the display is off. NOTE Do not change the screen orientation settings. 3. Once the X10 has booted up, right click on the desktop to open the desktop menu and select Graphics Options Output To. Another menu opens with the following options:
Monitor. Notebook. Extended desktop. Intel Dual Display Clone. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 51 STEP ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION 4. To switch to the external monitor only, select the Monitor option. The X10 display turns off and the external monitor display turns on. Use the stylus on the X10 touch screen to steer the cursor on the external monitor. 5. 6. 7. To switch back to the X10 display only, right click on the X10 touch screen. This will open a desktop menu on the external monitor. Select Graphics Options Output To and tap on Notebook. The external monitor display turns off and the X10 display turns on. Both displays turn on. Now, any actions you take on the X10 display are mirrored on the external display. To operate both the X10 and the external monitor display, right click on the desktop and select Graphics Options Output To Intel Dual Display Clone and tap on Notebook
+ Monitor if you want the external monitor to be monitor #2; select Monitor + Notebook if the external monitor will be monitor #1. Working with the Extended Desktop When you have a second display, you can configure it as an extended desktop. That is, the second display is combined with your tablet desktop. You can move documents back and forth between the two displays as if they were a single display. To combine the external display with the X10 display and form a single or extended desktop, right click on the X10 display and select Graphics Options Output To Extended Desktop and tap on Notebook + Monitor if you want the external display to be monitor #2;
select Monitor + Notebook if you want the tablet display to be monitor #2. It is recommended that you attach a USB mouse when using the extended desktop rather than using the stylus. NOTE Using a mouse, you can sweep the cursor back and forth between displays as if the two displays were one desktop. Using the stylus with the extended desktop can be a challenge because the stylus can only be used on the tablet touch screen to control the cursor on both displays. However, we will discuss how this is done in the following paragraphs. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 52 Using the Stylus or Pen with the Extended Desktop Because the X10 is the only one of your two displays with a touch screen or active pen screen, you must make all cursor movements for both displays from the X10 tablet display. Mentally divide the X10 display in half. If you have the external monitor configured as display #2
(positioned to the right of the tablet), you should only operate the stylus on the right half of the X10 touch screen when the cursor is in the external display. If you have the external monitor configured for display #1 (positioned to the left of the tablet), you should only operate the stylus on the left half of the X10 screen when the cursor is in the external display. Assume you have the external monitor set up on the right side (as display #2). Touch the X10 screen and drag the cursor to the right edge of the display until it appears on the external monitor. If you now lift the stylus and touch the middle of the X10 screen, the cursor will appear at the left-most edge of the external monitor screen. Once you start moving the cursor on the external display, it is best to keep the stylus in contact with the X10 display until you complete the movement. Otherwise, the cursor may jump back to the X10 display. NOTE Drag the stylus to the right edge of the X10 and you will see that the cursor on the external monitor travels completely across the screen to the opposite edge. This means that the right half of the X10 screen corresponds to the entire screen of the external monitor when the cursor is in the external monitor part of the desktop. The opposite will be true if you set up the external monitor to be display #1. You can now control the cursor in the left-hand external display using the left half of the X10 screen. Tips for Proper Use and Care Of Your Computer There are certain precautions you should take to ensure that your ARMOR X10 Tablet Computer continues to provide you with reliable service:
Dont subject the computer to heat by placing it on the dashboard of a vehicle with the display facing the sun. Dont store the computer in temperatures below -40 degrees C. Dont pile tools or heavy objects on top of the computer. Avoid severe impacts, especially to the display. Dont try to take the computer apart. Disassembly of the unit by unauthorized personnel may void your warranty. Dont use excessive force when inserting PCMCIA cards. They are keyed to go in only one way and inserting the card incorrectly or using excessive force could result in damage to the cards or the computer. Keep your touchscreen clean and calibrated. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 53 4. Your ARMOR X10 Software Your ARMOR X10 comes with a variety of software and utility applications. Many of these are standard with the Windows XP operating system, some are provided by DRS to improve your configuration and control of the tablet and some may be custom software provided for your special requirements. The following paragraphs provide you with an introduction to those Windows and DRS software applications that you will need to properly configure and begin using your X10 tablet. These include:
Microsoft Windows XP Tablet Tutorials ARMOR Utilities Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Utility Realtek Audio Manager Intel PROSet Wireless Utility IVT BlueSoleil Utility Windows XP Tablet Tutorials The Windows XP Tablet operating system provides editing and authoring tools for entering data or writing on the tablet as if it were a sheet of paper. It has built-in tutorials for writing with the tablet, data entry, handwriting recognition, speech recognition, keyboard help information, and so on. To access tutorials on using these tools, click on Start All Programs Get Going with Tablet PC. The Welcome to tablet computing window opens, as shown in Figure 22. Follow the instructions on the screen to access the tutorials. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 22 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 54 Figure 22. Accessing Tablet PC Tutorials and Information Help with Microsoft Windows XP For information on using Microsoft Windows XP features and options, refer to the Microsoft help files and documentation on the X10 Tablet Computer by clicking on Start and selecting the Help and Support option. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 55 Armor Utilities Program This utility program is provided to help you manage your X10 computer. It contains settings and information about the batteries, the internal temperature of the computer, backlight (brightness) adjustment, optional cards and serial port settings, and configuration of the OEM button. To open the Armor Utilities window, click on the ARMOR Utilities icon select Start All Programs Armor Utilities. in the task bar tray or About Tab The About tab is displayed by default when the application opens, as shown in Figure 23. The Firmware Versions fields show the current firmware installed in the X10. The Serial Number field is not currently used. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 23 Figure 23. Armor Utilities Panel About Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 56 Batteries Tab The Batteries Tab is shown in Figure 24. This tab shows information for a primary and a secondary battery. If you have only one battery pack, it should be installed in the primary battery compartment. The primary and secondary battery compartment locations are shown in Figure 17. The Percent Remaining and the Cycles fields provide key information that you need to manage your batteries. The Percent Remaining fields give the percentage of charge in one or both batteries compared to a full charge. The Cycles fields show the number of discharge and recharge cycles the battery has experienced since it was installed. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 24 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 17 Figure 24. Armor Utilities Panel Batteries Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 57 Health Tab The Health tab displays the current internal temperatures of the X10 tablet and the batteries, as shown in Figure 25. It also provides options for recording (logging) temperature variations over time. Refer to Generating a Log of Temperature Variations for the procedure to set up a logging file. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 25 Figure 25. Armor Utilities Panel Health Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 58 Backlight Tab The Backlight tab (shown in Figure 26) provides options to adjust the brightness level manually or to select a built-in light sensor and control brightness automatically. In the automatic mode, if the surrounding (ambient) the screen brightness will decrease proportionally; if the surrounding light increases, the brightness will increase proportionally. The Advanced Backlight button permits custom settings of the brightness range for different lighting conditions or to suit visual preferences. Refer to Setting the Advanced Backlight Control for a procedure to configure custom brightness settings. level decreases, light Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 26 If you have a transflective screen, you should slect the Auto Off in Bright Light option. Formatted: Highlight Figure 26. Armor Utilities Panel Backlight Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 59 Serial/OEM Tab CAUTION!
These options are set at the factory for your particular configuration. Do not change these settings unless directed by DRS Technical Support personnel. Doing so could render your Flexspace or custom card inoperable. The Serial/OEM tab (Figure 27) provides a way of enabling custom circuit cards like GPS or GPRS cards that have been installed in the Flexspace of your X10. The Flexspace is a customizable interface inside the tablet that allows customer-selected or specially designed cards to work with the ARMOR X10. The top-level ON and OFF buttons enable or disable the Flexspace capability. The Current State toggles enable or disable the available connector ports. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 27 Figure 27. Armor Utilities Panel Serial/OEM Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 60 OEM Button Tab The OEM Button tab (Figure 28) provides a way to customize the operation of the OEM button located on the PC Control Panel. The button can be programmed to perform multiple functions depending on how long the button is pressed and the current power state of the computer. Refer to Configuring the OEM Button for a detailed description and instructions. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 28 Figure 28. Armor Utilities Panel OEM Button Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 61 Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Utility The TSHARC control panel provides options for configuring one or two displays, calibrating the touch screen, and adjusting the contact settings for the stylus. in the task bar tray or select Start To open the TSHARC panel, click on the TSHARC icon All Programs Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel. The Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel opens as shown in Figure 29. Refer to Touch Screen Calibration and Settings for detailed instructions in using these settings. The Capacitive tab is not used with the ARMOR X10. NOTE Screen Selection Tab The Screen Selection tab is only used when you have a second display configured. It allows you to select which display you want to calibrate. Refer to Operating with a Second Display for detailed instructions. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 29 Figure 29. Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Screen Selection Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 62 Calibration Tab The Calibration tab provides calibration options for an X10 equipped with a touch-sensitive screen. This calibration aligns the tip of the on-screen cursor with the touchdown point of the stylus. To use this tab in calibrating your display, refer to the procedure in Calibrating the Touch Screen. Figure 30. Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Calibration Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 63 Click Settings Tab The Click Settings tab is shown in Figure 31 and provides options to adjust the right-click and double-click functions. Refer to Adjusting the Click Settings for the Touch Screen Stylus for instructions on using these settings. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 31 Figure 31. Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Click Settings Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 64 Touch Settings Tab The options on this tab are currently not available with the ARMOR X10. Figure 32. Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Touch Settings Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 65 Tablet and Pen Settings Utility Windows XP Tablet lets you customize the tablet and the pen settings to suit the way you work with an active pen. To open the Tablet and Pen Settings window, select Start Control Panel
Tablet and Pen Settings. Refer to Tablet and Pen Settings for Windows XP for instructions on using these settings. Settings Tab The Settings tab is shown in Figure 33. With this tab, you can select whether you want to use the pen with the left hand or right hand, select menu positions, and calibrate the screen. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 33 Figure 33. Tablet and Pen Settings Window Settings Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 66 Display Tab The Display tab is shown in Figure 34. Refer to Tablet and Pen Settings for Windows XP for instructions in using these settings. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 34 NOTE It is recommended you do not use the Screen Orientation options to rotate the screen as this can cause the X10 to lose screen calibration. Instead, we recommend the procedures in Rotating the Screen. The Screen Brightness settings are not available from this window. To adjust the screen brightness, refer to Display Management. Figure 34. Tablet and Pen Settings Window Display Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 67 Pen Options Tab The Pen Options tab is shown in Figure 35. Use this tab to adjust pen settings such as double-
click, right-click, hover, and launch Input Panel. Refer to Tablet and Pen Settings for Windows XP for instructions in using these settings. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 35 Figure 35. Tablet and Pen Settings Panel Pen Options Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 68 Intel PROSet Wireless Utility This utility enables you to manage your wireless network connections. To open the utility, in the task bar tray or select Start double-click on the Intel PROSet Wireless Utility icon All Programs Intel PROSet Wireless. The Intel PROSet Wireless window opens as shown in Figure 36. Refer to Managing Your Wireless LAN Connections for procedures to configure and access your wireless network connections. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 36 Figure 36. Intel PROSet/Wireless Panel 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 69 IVT BlueSoleil Utility This utility helps you manage your Bluetooth connections to wireless devices. To access this icon on the task bar and select the Display Classic View utility, right-click on the BlueSoleil option. The BlueSoleil window opens as shown in Figure 37. Refer to Managing Your Bluetooth Connections for instructions on connecting to wireless devices. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 37 Figure 37. IVT BlueSoleil Utility 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 70 Realtek Audio Manager This application is loaded with the sound card drivers and is provided for users who have a desk or vehicle docking station. The ARMOR 10 audio card supports a stereo or monaural output to an external speaker system only through the docking station audio connectors. To activate the Audio Manager, click on the Audio Manager icon in the task bar tray or select Start Control Panel Realtek HD Sound Effect Manager. The Audio Manager panel opens as shown in Figure 38. Click on the Help option for information on configuring and using this application. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 38 Figure 38. Realtek Audio Manager Panel Special Software Applications You may have software programs other than those provided by DRS or the Windows XP Tablet operating system that were specially installed on your X10 for your operating needs. The operation and use of these applications is beyond the scope of this users guide. Please refer to the help resources supplied with each application or contact your IT personnel to receive any required training. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 71 Quick Reference List Table 5 provides a quick reference list of configuration or monitoring tasks and their corresponding software resources. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 5 Table 5. Quick Reference List TASK OBJECTIVE RESOURCES Power Settings Power Button options Monitor battery power, configure standby. Configure Power Button actions. Monitor Batteries View charge status and number of charge cycles for each battery. Monitor Internal Temperatures Monitor key system temperatures. Screen Calibration and Touch Settings Touch screen calibration, stylus touch settings for touch tablets only. Active pen screen calibration, pen touch settings for pen tablets only. Display Settings Adjust backlight (brightness). Video Settings Display settings, color corrections, hot keys. Start Control Panel Power Options Start All Programs ARMOR Utilities OEM Button tab Start All Programs ARMOR Utilities Batteries tab or Task Bar right click on Battery
(when on batteries only) icon Start All Programs Armor Utilities Health tab Start All Programs Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Start Control Panel Tablet and Pen Settings Start All Programs ARMOR Utilities Backlight tab or Task Bar Armor Utilities icon Right click on desktop Graphics Properties option or Start Control Panel Intel GMA Driver for Mobile and Start Control Panel Display 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 72 Audio Settings Set audio effects, input and output levels. Wireless LAN Settings Connect to/disconnect from a wireless network, turn wireless on/off, configure LAN settings. Start Control Panel Sounds and Audio Devices and Task Bar right click on master for menu options volume icon Start All Programs Intel PROSet/Wireless or Task Bar Intel PROSet Wireless icon and Start Control Panel Network Connections Bluetooth Settings Manage Bluetooth wireless device connections. Task Bar BlueSoleil icon Display Classic View
9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 73 5. Working with Your ARMOR X10 Tablet Entering Data Using the Input Panel Tap on the Input Panel icon Figure 39. on the task bar to open the Input Panel window, as shown in Mode Buttons Configuration Options and Help Figure 39. Input Panel with No Mode Showing (for illustration purposes only) Using the Input Panel, you can write notes in your own handwriting or enter data one character at a time with the digital pen or the stylus. The Input Panel has three modes for entering data: On-Screen Keyboard mode, Character Pad mode and Writing Pad mode. Each mode has a button on the left side of the panel. The Input Panel will always open in the last mode that was selected or used. Writing Pad Pressing the top mode button opens the Writing Pad (Figure 40) within the Input Panel. In this mode, you can enter text by using the stylus in your own handwriting, or ink. The Writing Pad is especially useful for tasks such as taking notes or adding text to an existing text file. As you write, the Input Panel expands to accommodate more text as needed. If you want to convert ink to text, the Input Panel does so dynamically. Figure 40. Writing Pad Mode Character Pad Pressing the middle button opens the Character Pad (Figure 41). The character pad can also convert your ink to text so that it can be inserted into a program, but this mode is used to enter one letter at a time using the stylus. The Character Pad is particularly useful when you need high accuracyfor example, when youre entering an email address or a URL. The characters that you enter into the character pad are immediately converted to text, so you can spot errors immediately. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Deleted: Figure 39 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 40 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 41 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 42 ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 74 Figure 41. Character Pad Mode On-screen Keyboard Use the on-screen keyboard (Figure 42) when you dont want to use ink but you do want to use the pen, or when youre using a Tablet Computer without an attached keyboard. Simply tap the letters on the keyboard to form words. The Input Panel enters the text directly in the field or at the insertion point of the active program. The on-screen keyboard is especially useful for entering small amounts of text, such as passwords and file names. Figure 42. On-Screen Keyboard Mode Customizing the Input Panel You can customize the Input Panel based on your personal preferences, such as automatic text insertion, changing the ink thickness, and adjusting the amount of space between lines in the writing area. Click on the icon to open a submenu and select Options. Writing Documents Using Microsoft Windows Journal Microsoft Windows Journal allows you to take notes or create documents in your own handwriting, just like on a sheet of paper, but with many capabilities of a word processor. You can later convert your writing to text if you wish or leave it as ink. Your hand-written entries are completely searchable just like typed text. To open Windows Journal, click on Start All Programs Windows Journal. See the Help options in the Windows Journal toolbar for instructions and tutorials on using Windows Journal. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 75 Entering Data Using Speech Recognition NOTE You must have a high-quality microphone to use speech effectively. Look for a microphone that is built specifically for speech recognition programs. With a USB microphone attached to the ARMOR X10, you can use your voice either to dictate information or give commands to the computer. For example, you can enter dictation as text into a program. You can use voice commands to cut, copy or paste text, format text that you have dictated, save documents, switch between programs, move around within a program, or perform other actions to control any Windows-based program. As you speak into your microphone, the Input Panel changes your spoken words into text. To activate speech recognition, click on the Input Panel on-screen instructions to train the software to recognize your voice. icon and select Speech. Follow the 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 76 This Page Intentionally Left Blank 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 77 6. Networking Your ARMOR X10 has two built-in wireless network capabilities: Bluetooth and Wi-Fi
(wireless fidelity). The Bluetooth network is primarily used for connecting wireless devices such as a wireless printer or scanner to your computer. It can also connect your X10 to a network entry point. The Wi-Fi network is primarily used for higher bandwidth connections such as Internet to a wireless LAN. The X10 can also be connected to a LAN using a standard Ethernet cable. Managing Your Bluetooth Connections Your ARMOR X10 is equipped with a Bluetooth network interface that enables you to connect your computer to a variety of wireless devices such as routers, printers, keyboards, mice and even headsets or cell phones. The range of these connections is approximately 30 ft or 10 meters. icon on the task To see what devices are available to connect to, right-click on the BlueSoleil bar and select Display Classic View. The IVT BlueSoleil window will open, as shown in Figure 43. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 43 For information on using the BlueSoleil application click on the Help option. Figure 43. IVT BlueSoleil Utility 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 78 Managing Your Wireless LAN Connections To access a wireless LAN or to verify a connection, click on the wireless icon in the task bar or click on Start All Programs IntelPROSet Wireless to open the Intel PROSet/Wireless window. Be sure the button in the lower left corner says Wireless On. If it says Wireless Off, click on it to turn on the wireless radio. The button label will change to Wireless On. Any networks in range will be shown as a separate entry in the Wireless Networks field with signal strength bars to the left of the entry, as shown in Figure 44. The range of connection for Wi-Fi is approximately 300 feet or 100 meters. To refresh the screen and search for additional networks, click on the Refresh button. To disconnect from a network, highlight it and click on Disconnect. Multiple connections of different types are possible. For additional information on using the Intel PROSet Wi-Fi application, click on the Help option. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 44 Figure 44. Wireless Network Access 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 79 Turning Off the Wireless Card Sometimes you may want to turn off the wireless card but keep working on your computer, as when travelling on an airplane the wireless transmitter can interfere with the aircrafts sensitive electronic systems. in the task bar and select the To shut off your wireless card, left-click on the wireless icon Wireless Off option, or click on Start All Programs IntelPROSet /Wireless to open the Intel PROSet/Wireless window and then click on the button in the lower left of the window and select Wireless Off. Note that the button is now labeled Wireless Off. To turn the wireless card back on, select the Wireless On option. Wireless Signal Quality Wireless signal quality is affected by several conditions:
Distance from the access point (wireless transmit and receive antennas). Access rights (set up through an administrator). Your security settings. Orientation of the wireless antennas. If you are having difficulty connecting to your network, try the following steps:
1. Left-click on the wireless icon in the task bar and verify that the Wireless On option has a check by it. If not, select the Wireless On option to turn on the wireless radio. 2. If your tablet is not locked in a vehicle mount, try turning the unit in various directions to improve signal quality. 3. Try to get closer to the access point. 4. Move away from obstacles such as trees and metal objects which may be between you and the Access Point. 5. Verify that the access point is operating. If none of these actions solves the problem, contact your Network Administrator for assistance. Accessing a Network using an Ethernet Cable The ARMOR X10 comes with an RJ-45 connector that allows a cable connection to an Ethernet LAN. This connection supports the 10/100 Base-T LAN standard. The connector is on the right side of the unit as shown in Figure 4. Follow the procedure in Table 6 to set up a physical LAN connection. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 4 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 80 STEP 1. Table 6. Set up a Physical LAN Connection ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION to contact your IT You will need department or internet provider to access the server and obtain an IP address for your X10. 2. When you obtain your IP address, click on Start Settings Network Connections. This will open the Network Connections window. 3. 4. Click on File New Connection. The New Connection Wizard opens. Click Next and follow the instructions to set up your connection per your IT department or internet provider. If you are having problems with your Ethernet LAN connection, check for a network icon in the
, and select Start Control Panel Network taskbar tray with a red x beside it Connections. Double-click on the Local Area Connection entry (not Wireless Network Connection) that has the red x. Note the error message and correct the problem or contact your network administrator. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 2 Formatted: Underline Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 81 7. Optional Wireless Capabilities Flexspace The ARMOR X10 has a special compartment with a flexible interface that can accommodate custom circuit cards for added capability. This flexible card interface, or Flexspace, uses a 40-
pin SMT stacking connector that provides power, 4 serial com ports, two USB ports and OEM connections. Cards can be designed by the customer or specially built by DRS. A separate space for a Flexspace card antenna is located behind the cover on the upper right side of the table (see Figure 2). For more information on the Flexspace and its capabilities, contact DRS Tactical Systems toll free at 1-888-872-1100. Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) Capability The ARMOR X10 can be equipped with a built-in GPS receiver and antenna that is capable of providing your position coordinates accurately to within 5 meters anywhere on the planet. The GPS engine is a Leadtek LR9548S 20-channel receiver that is based on the GPS signal search capabilities of the SiRFstarIII low power single chipset (GSC3f/LP-7879), SiRFs newest chipset technology. The GPS circuit board is housed internally in a unique flexible compartment that provides space for a number of custom configurations. Ease of Integration The X10 GPS is designed to allow quick and easy integration for a wide range of OEM applications such as:
PDA, Pocket PC, and other computing devices Car and marine navigation Fleet Management applications / Ocean Surveillance Information System Evolutionary Development Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL) application and Location-Based ServicesLBS Hand-held devices (HHDs) for personal positioning and navigation Satellite-based augmentation systems e.g. US WAAS or the European EGNOS system NMEA Standard Support The receiver supports the National Maritime Electronics Association (NMEA) standard, Version 2.20, January 1, 1997, and outputs the following sentences, depending on the applications selected:
GGA - Time, position and fix-related data GLL - Latitude and longitude of present position, time of position fix and status 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 82 GSA Receiver operating mode, satellites used in the position solution, and dilution of precision (DOP) values RMC Time, date, position, course and speed data VTG Actual course and speed relative to the ground For information and assistance with GPS capability, please contact DRS Tactical Systems toll free at 1-888-872-1100. GPS Specifications The following table provides technical specifications for the Leadtek LR9548S GPS receiver. Table 7. Leadtek LR9548S GPS Receiver Specifications ITEM PARAMETER SPECIFICATION Chipset General Accuracy Datum Time to First Fix
(TTFF) (Open Sky &
Stationary Requirements) GSC3f/LP-7879 SiRF StarIII low power single chip Frequency C/A code Channels Sensitivity Position Velocity Time Default Other L1, 1575.42 MHz 1.023 MHz chip rate 20
-159dBm 10 meters, 2D RMS 5 meters 2D RMS, WAAS corrected
<5meters(50%) 0.1 meters/second 1 microsecond synchronized to GPS time WGS-84 selectable for other Datum Reacquisition 0.1 sec., average Snap start Hot start 1 sec., average 1 sec., average typical TTFF 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 83 ITEM PARAMETER SPECIFICATION Dynamic Conditions Warm start Cold start Altitude Velocity 35 sec., average typical TTFF 42 sec., average typical TTFF 18,000 meters (60,000 feet) max. 515 meters/second (1000 knots) max. Acceleration 4g, max. Jerk 3 20 meters/second
, max. Power Main power input 3.3 ~ 5.0 VDC input Power consumption 165 mW (continuous mode) Supply Current 49 mA Backup Power 1.65 ~ 5.0 VDC input. Serial Port Electrical interface Two full duplex serial TTL interface. Protocol messages NMEA-0183@4800 bps (Default) Level TTL Pulse duration The 1PPS pulse width is 1 s, this 1PPS is NOT suited to steer various oscillators receivers, telecommunications system, etc).
(timing Time reference At the pulse positive edge. Measurement Aligned microsecond to GPS second, 1 Time-1PPS Pulse 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 84 This Page Intentionally Left Blank 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 85 8. Backup and Restore Procedures for Spinning Media Hard Drives Backup with QuickBack If your hard drive is a spinning media hard drive, QuickBack is included with your software package as a backup and restore feature. It allows you to make an exact copy of your hard disks contents on a hidden partition of your computer. You can then use this backup to restore your PC if the hard drive becomes partially corrupted. If the entire hard drive becomes corrupted or the hard drive is damaged, this restore feature may not work. NOTE ARMOR X10 ruggedized tablets implement the QuickBack functionality using the Acronis True Image OEM software package. The True Image application provides a number of useful System Backup features including the creation and storage of an Archival Backup, the ability to store up to two additional User created Backups, and the ability to create an Emergency Bootable CD for System Recovery. The QuickBack backup feature is only one part of a complete tablet backup strategy. As mentioned above, if the entire hard drive becomes corrupted or if the hard drive itself becomes defective then the QuickBack feature will not be able to restore the system. Even if the System Recovery CD is used, it looks for the backup data on the hard drive. The periodic use of an alternate backup tool is recommended to provide backups on external media in case of catastrophic hard drive failures. You may wish to purchase the upgraded full-featured Acronis True Image tool to be able to backup and recover all data saved from an external drive. Disk Partitions The hard drive is divided into several sections or Partitions. The C: partition is the primary partition that contains the Windows files, Application Program files, User files, etc. The C:
Partition is used as the primary system boot drive for normal operations. The D: partition contains space for QuickBack Backups of the C: Partition. The D: partition has been made large enough to contain at least two standard-sized compressed User-
generated backups. The compressed backup copy of a partition can only be stored in one of the other partitions for backup purposes. This allows you to overcome the most common disk corruption issues and to restore the system back to the last saved state. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 86 How to Access QuickBack for Initial Set-Up and Help Features Once installed, the QuickBack feature can be accessed by clicking on the Acronis True Image shortcut on the computers desktop. You can also access it by clicking on Start All Programs Acronis True Image. The program includes an easy to use wizard interface and detailed HELP features. The startup screen is shown in Figure 45. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 45 Figure 45. QuickBack Graphical User Interface Archive Backup The original Archive Backup is created automatically when you select the Install QuickBack icon on the Desktop. NOTE The QuickBack install is a lengthy process involving an automatic re-partitioning of the hard drive and the automatic backup process. A USB or other physical keyboard should be used for this operation. The initial installation takes approximately 25 minutes. Subsequent user initiated backups will take less time. The system should be connected to external power prior to the initial installation or any subsequent user backup in order to ensure the backup process completes without interruption. The Archive Backup contains the original C and D partitions and is stored in a compressed form in a hidden partition on the system hard disk. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 87 This hidden partition is not visible or accessible to you with the standard system file access toolset. To use the Archive Backup to restore the hard drive, press the F11 option (with external keyboard) when prompted during the system boot to immediately start the standalone True Image Application. NOTE If you choose the Restore Original System Installation option, any changes or additions to either of these two partitions since the initial QuickBack installation will be lost. This includes User Backups that have been placed in the D partition area. Within the True Image application, you can select the Restore Original System Installation button and follow the on-screen directions to restore the entire Archive Backup onto the C and D partitions of the System Hard Drive. User Backups You can create up to two User Backups of the C partition (Compressed copies of C are stored up to the available space in the D partition). Backups are typically created as desired by using the True Image application under Windows. Backups are stored into the D partition of the system hard drive. Currently, with the existing C partition size, the size of the D partition allows up to two Backups to be saved at one time. If you increase the C partition significantly with the addition of new software, then only one backup copy can be stored. With the addition of very large amounts of user data it is possible to grow the partition content large enough that it cannot be compressed into the available space on the D partition (In this case the True Image will inform you that no backup into the requested location is possible). System Recovery CD You can create a System Recovery CD using the True Image Application. For example, if the C drive becomes corrupted (system fails to boot normally), the Recovery CD allows you to boot the system to the True Image Application. You can then restore the C partition from one of the Backups. Note that you create the Recovery CD using Windows and an attached CD disk drive with write capability. To create the Bootable CD, please refer to your Windows documentation. To boot from the Recovery CD, follow the procedure in Table 8. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 8 ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 88 Table 8. Boot the X10 from the Recovery CD ACTION Connect a USB CD-ROM Drive to the USB port. Place the recovery CD in the CD drive. Select Boot Manager. Boot the system and press the <ESC> key when the ARMOR splash screen appears. STEP 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the CD drive (the exact text depends on the type of drive being used). The recovery disc can actually make a brand new backup, which can be handy if you want to copy a data partition on a PC thats no longer bootable. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 89 9. Removal and Replacement Removing and Replacing the Hard Drive This drive should only be removed or installed by a qualified technician. NOTE The hard drive is located in a slot in the bottom of the tablet. Follow the procedure in Table 9 to remove or replace the drive. Deleted: Table 9 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Table 9. Remove and Replace the Hard Drive STEP ACTION Remove the soft carry case cover, if installed and lay the ARMOR X10 tablet face up on a clean surface. Using a #1 Philips screwdriver, remove the four screws at the bottom right of the tablet securing the hard drive cover (see Figure 6) and remove the cover. Use the pull tab on the end of the drive to remove the drive from the tablet. Insert the replacement drive with the label down and press gently until it seats. Replace the cover and secure with the four screws. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Deleted: Figure 6 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Removing and Replacing an Optional PCMCIA Card The PCMCIA slots are located on the top left side of the tablet, as shown in Figure 3. Follow the procedure in Table 10 to remove or install a card. Table 10. Remove and Replace a PCMCIA Card Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 3 Deleted: Table 10 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue STEP 1. 2. ACTION Remove the four screws securing the PCMCIA slot cover. Grasp the card and pull to remove it. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 90 CAUTION!
Do not force the card into the slot. If it binds, remove the card and try again. Be sure the card is not cocked at an angle and spanning two slots. 3. Insert the replacement card carefully into the slot and press in until it seats. It should slide in smoothly. 4. Replace the cover. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 91 10. Display Management Adjusting the Display Brightness Manually Your ARMOR X10 Tablet Computer is configured for manual adjustment of screen brightness
(or backlight level) by default. The backlight level can be adjusted manually in two ways: by repeatedly pressing the OEM button or by adjusting the slider in the Backlight tab of the Armor Utilities panel. Using the OEM Button Your OEM button is pre-configured by default to adjust the backlight level in incremental steps starting with minimum brightness and increasing in 8 steps to maximum brightness. Once the maximum level is reached, pressing the OEM button again will repeat the cycle. You can change the operation of the OEM button to better suit your needs by following the procedures in Configuring the OEM Button in the Appendix. Using the Armor Utilities Backlight Tab Open ARMOR Utilities by clicking on Start All Programs Armor Utilities and selecting the Backlight tab. The Backlight tab opens as shown in Figure 46. Figure 46. Armor Utilities Screen Backlight Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 46 ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 92 Do not use the Auto Off in Bright Light setting as this could turn off your display under bright light conditions. NOTE The Brightness slider allows you to manually adjust the backlight brightness. Touch the tab on the bar and slide it to the left or right to achieve the desired brightness. The Manual LCD Brightness value represents the LCD brightness level as a number between 0 and 255. A setting of 127 is the mid point. This readout is a handy reference that you can use to quickly set the brightness to a desired value. If you have selected the Backlight Cycling option on the OEM tab (see Configuring the OEM Button in The Appendix), you can change the brightness in 32 increments by pressing the Security Key button repeatedly. Adjusting the Brightness Automatically When the X10 is configured for automatic brightness control, the backlight level is automatically adjusted by an ambient light sensor. If the ambient light decreases, the brightness also decreases proportionally; if the ambient light increases, the brightness increases. To enable automatic brightness adjustment, check the Light Sensor On/Off box in the Backlight tab. Setting the Advanced Backlight Control The Advanced Backlight control allows custom adjustments of the brightness range under different lighting conditions or for different personal preferences. To make custom modifications to the backlight settings, check the Light Sensor On/Off box and click on the Advanced Backlight button. The Advanced Backlight Control window opens, as shown in Figure 47. NOTE You must select the Light Sensor On/Off option on the Backlight tab to access the Advanced Backlight Control window. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 47 ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 93 Figure 47. Advanced Backlight Control Window. The labels at the bottom of the blue window in Figure 47 represent ambient light levels from completely dark to bright sunlight. This range is divided into two portions: Indoor/Night-time and Outdoor. Deleted: Figure 47 The Indoor/Night-time portion represents the range of light levels encountered in a lighted building or in a night-time setting. The Outdoor portion represents the range of light levels encountered outside in overcast conditions to clear sky conditions. The black slanted line, or ramp, indicates the currently configured brightness adjustment range. There are three slider adjustments for the advanced backlight control:
1) Backlight Minimum The Backlight Minimum slider sets the minimum level from which the backlight will automatically adjust. Set this slider to the minimum level you want the brightness to reach. 2) Start Ramp The Start Ramp slider sets the ambient light level at which the backlight begins to brighten from its minimum setting. Set this slider to the minimum level you want when the ambient light level for your location is at its minimum. 3) End Ramp The End Ramp slider sets the ambient light level at which the backlight reaches maximum brightness. Set this slider to the maximum brightness you want when the ambient light level for your location is at its maximum. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 94 Touch Screen Calibration and Settings (Touch Tablets Only) Calibrating the Touch Screen The stylus tip should be closely aligned with the cursor arrow when the stylus is in contact with the display. If the stylus and the cursor are not within approximately 1/8th inch of each other, perform the calibration procedure in Table 11. Refer to Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Utility for a description of the settings and options. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 11 This procedure is for ARMOR X10 touch tablets only. For pen tablets, refer to Calibrating the Active Pen Screen. CAUTION!
Use the stylus instead of a fingertip to calibrate the touch screen. NOTE 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 95 STEP 1. Table 11. Calibrate the Touch Screen ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION Select Start All Programs Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel and select the Calibration tab. A calibration target is displayed with arrows moving inward, as shown below. 2. Select the Configure button. The Calibration Options screen displayed, as shown below. is 3. Select the 4-point calibration pattern and click OK. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 96 STEP ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION NOTE Use care not to accidentally touch the screen with a finger or the palm of the hand while performing the calibration. 4. Touch the moving calibration target to begin. A calibration point appears in the upper left corner, as shown below:
TOUCH HERE Touch and hold each calibration point until the word RELEASE is displayed beside it. contracts and it Lift the stylus from the calibration point. The next calibration point appears. Continue until all calibration points have been touched. The message Touch the screen to verify the target moves to your finger appears. Touch and hold the stylus to the screen and drag the target when it appears. The target moves in response to the movement of the stylus. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Tap the Test button and touch at various points around the position of the cursor tip relative to the point of contact of the stylus tip. the screen. Note 10. Select OK to apply and save the new settings. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 97 ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION If the difference between the cursor arrow tip and the stylus tip is still too large, perform the calibration again using a higher number of the calibration is still off after 5 attempts, return the X10 for repair or call DRS Technical Support at 1-888-872-1100. test points. If STEP 11. Adjusting the Click Settings for the Touch Screen Stylus The Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel also provides adjustments for the touch actions of the stylus, such as the size of the touch area, right-click delay, double-click area, and double-click speed. Right-Click Area This slider adjusts the size of the right-click touchdown area. The larger the area, the less accurate the stylus tip has to be in proximity to the object you want to right-click. This is especially true if you use a fingertip instead of the stylus. However, this increases the chance of right-clicking on the wrong object when options or icons are closer together. Right-Click Delay This slider adjusts the time the stylus must remain in contact with the touch screen before the computer interprets it as a right-click. This must be long enough so that the computer does not mistake it for a left-click action. Double-Click Area This slider adjusts the size of the double-click touchdown area to accommodate different hand and finger movement styles. The larger the area, the more likely the computer is to detect both taps and correctly interpret them as a double-click. However, the area must not be too large or you could end up double-clicking on the wrong object. Double-Click Speed This slider adjusts the sample time between the first and second click. The higher the setting, the shorter the sample time and the faster you must tap to have the computer correctly interpret the action as a double-click. The setting must be fast enough so that the computer does not interpret the action as a left click. Follow the procedure in Table 12 to adjust these settings. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 12 ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 98 Table 12. Adjust Stylus Click Settings for the Touch Screen STEP ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION 1. Select Start All Programs Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel and select the Click Settings tab. The Click Settings tab opens, as shown below. 2. Check the Enable Right-Click box. 3. Move the Right-Click Area slider to the right to increase the right click touch-down area (default value is 6) and click on Apply. 4. Move the Right-Click Delay slider to the right to increase the time the stylus has to remain in contact with the screen and initiate a right-click action (default value is 5 tics from the left) and click on Apply. 5. Move the Double-Click Area slider to the right to increase the size of the touch-down area (default value is 25). The farther to the right, the larger the touch-
down area. This should be set to an area that is as large as your fingertip. The farther to the right, the longer the delay before the right-click action takes place. Adjust this area for a good double-click action using the fingertip. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 99 STEP ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION 6. Move the Double-Click Speed slider to the right to require a faster double-
click. The further to the right, the faster you have to double-click to generate a good action. Caring For the Touchscreen With minimal maintenance, the touch screen will last many years. When operating the touch screen, you should not use an abrasive or metallic pointer as this may damage the screen. We recommend using your fingertip or the plastic-tipped stylus that came with your tablet. Use a plastic cleaner such as Plexus to clean the stylus tip. CAUTION!
Do not exceed 60 psi when using compressed air to clean the display. Damage to the screen surface could result. Be careful not to let sand or grit stay on the screen. Be careful not to let sand or grit stay on the screen as this can scratch the surface if wiped with a cloth. Clean the display surface first with dry compressed air. Any non-ammonia based glass cleaner can be used to clean the touch screen. Always spray the glass cleaner on the cloth or towel and then wipe the touch screen. Use a lint-free swab or soft brush to remove stubborn foreign matter. If necessary use a small amount of alcohol or dish soap. Use a solution of dish soap and water to remove biological contaminants. If further cleaning is needed, use a solution of 5-10% chlorine bleach in clean water. Use this with caution as it could result in discoloration of material finishes. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 100 Pen Screen Calibration and Settings (Pen Tablets Only) The pen tablet utilizes a proximity-sensing electromagnetic digitizer. This component tells the computer the pens exact position relative to the screen. The computer senses the pen as it nears the display and the cursor appears when the pen is approximately an inch away. This allows visibility of the exact location of input before making actual contact with the display. Calibrating the Active Pen Screen The active pen screen should be calibrated using the procedure in Table 13 any time display options or pen settings are changed. Refer to Tablet and Pen Settings Utility for a description of the settings and options for the Tablet and Pen Settings window. CAUTION!
This procedure is for ARMOR X10 Pen tablets only. For Touch tablets, refer to Calibrating the Touch Screen. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 13 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 101 Table 13. Calibrate the Active Pen Screen STEP ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION 1. Go to: Start Control Panel Tablet and Pen Settings. The Tablet and Pen Settings window opens with the Settings tab displayed, as shown below. 2. Select Calibrate. Follow the on-
screen instructions for calibrating the screen. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 102 Tablet and Pen Settings for Windows XP Settings Tab The Settings tab is shown in Figure 48. The Handedness and Menu Location settings are set to Right-handed by default. To more efficiently use the pen with the left hand, select the Left-
handed option and then select Left-handed (menu appears on right). Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 48 Figure 48. Settings Tab of the Tablet and Pen Settings Panel. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 103 Display Tab The Display tab (Figure 49) allows you to select screen orientation and to adjust screen brightness. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 49 NOTE It is recommended you not use the Screen Orientation options to rotate the screen as this could cause the X10 to lose screen calibration. Instead, we recommend the procedures in Rotating the Screen. Screen Orientation Primary landscape This is the default orientation setting for your tablet. When used in this position, the PC Control panel is located to the upper right. Secondary landscape This setting rotates the screen 180 from the default position. Primary portrait This setting rotates the screen 90 counterclockwise from the default orientation. Secondary portrait This setting rotates the screen 270 counterclockwise from the default orientation. Sequence Use these settings to determine the sequence of screen orientations that will occur when you repeatedly rotate the screen. Screen Brightness These options are not available with the ARMOR X10. To adjust the screen brightness, refer to the Display Management section. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 104 Figure 49. Display Tab of the Tablet and Pen Settings Panel. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 105 Pen Options Tab Use this tab (Figure 50) to adjust pen settings such as double-click, right-click, hover, and launch Input Panel. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 50 Highlight the desired setting and click on the Settings button. Follow the instructions to make the appropriate adjustments and select available options. You can also elect to use the pen button (located on the barrel of the pen) to right-click instead of hovering at a point on the screen. You can also elect to use the top of the pen to erase if that feature is included with the pen. Figure 50. Pen Options Tab of the Tablet and Pen Settings Panel. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 106 Caring for the Pen Tablet Screen Keeping your display screen clean will improve resolution and brightness. Be careful not to let sand or grit stay on the screen as this can scratch the glass if wiped with a cloth. Clean surfaces first with dry compressed air. Any non-ammonia based glass cleaner can be used to clean the screen. Always spray the glass cleaner on the cloth or towel and then wipe the screen. Use a lint-free swab or soft brush to remove stubborn foreign matter. If necessary use a small amount of alcohol or dish soap. We recommend that you use a solution of dish soap and water to remove biological contaminants. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 107 Monitoring the Health of Your ARMOR X10 The X10 may be subjected to extreme temperature variations that can affect the internal operating temperature of the tablet. So long as these internal temperatures remain within the operating design parameters, the tablet should not experience any loss of functionality. If you are experiencing problems and suspect that they are temperature related, you can monitor the internal temperature of the X10. Click on Start All Programs Armor Utilities to open the Armor Utilities window (see Figure 51) and click on the Health tab. The Health tab displays the following internal temperatures of the X10 tablet:
CPU core temperature System temperature Primary battery temperature Secondary battery temperature Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 51 Figure 51. Armor Utilities Panel with Health Tab Displayed 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 108 Generating a Log of Temperature Variations If the problems are occurring over time, you can record system temperature variations over time by creating a temperature variation log file. Follow the procedure in Table 14 to set up the log file. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 14 Table 14. Generate a Temperature Variation Log STEP ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION 1. Select START All PROGRAMS ARMOR Utilities and click on the Health tab. The Health tab is displayed, as shown in Figure 51. Deleted: Figure 51 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Enter a name for the log file in the File Name field. The name should be xxxxx.txt in the format In the Path field, enter the path to the folder where you want the log file to reside or click on the Set Path button and select the folder. Select START TEMPERATURE LOG to begin generating a record of temperature changes over time. Select the STOP TEMPERATURE LOG option to stop recording temperatures. 2. 3. 4. 5. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 109 Configuring the OEM Button The OEM button is also referred to as the Side Button or the Windows Security Key Button. To configure the OEM Button, click on Start All Programs ARMOR Utilities, then select the OEM Button tab. Figure 52 shows the options available for the OEM button and the default values for each press. This button can be configured to perform up to three different tasks depending on the length of press and release of the button:
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 52 Short press-and-release option 1 second or less. Medium press-and-release option 1-2 seconds. Long press-and-release option 3-4 seconds. The available options are arranged in three columns by length of press. NOTE Currently, there is only one option selectable for the long press: Ctrl-Alt-
Del. The other options for long press cannot be implemented at this time without violating Microsofts certification requirements. Figure 52. Armor Utilities Panel OEM Button Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 110 Disabled When this option is selected, all actions for this press are disabled. Ctrl/Alt/Del Selecting this option invokes the Ctrl+Alt+Del command and opens the Task Manager window. Sleep Button When this option is selected, pressing the OEM button will either place the X10 into Standby or Hibernation mode, depending on whether one or both of these modes are enabled in Control Panel/Power Options. If the system is in Standby mode (not Hibernation mode), a medium press of the OEM button will wake up the tablet. A long press will put the tablet into Hibernation mode. Inc. Backlight When this option is selected, and the Light Sensor On/Off option in the Backlight tab of the Armor Utilities panel is not selected (brightness control is manual), pressing the OEM button will cause the display brightness to increase in steps until it reaches maximum brightness, then the cycle will start over from minimum brightness. Dec. Backlight When this option is selected, and the Light Sensor On/Off option in the Backlight tab of the Armor Utilities panel is not selected (brightness control is manual), pressing the OEM button will cause the display brightness to decrease in steps until it reaches minimum brightness, then the cycle will start over from maximum brightness. Toggle Backlight When this option is enabled, pressing the OEM button will turn off the display backlight. Pressing it again will turn on the backlight. Cycle LCD/Display When this option is enabled, and if a second display is connected to the X10, pressing the OEM button repeatedly will generate the following sequence: external display only both displays tablet display only. The X10 always defaults to the tablet display when started or rebooted. Wi-Fi When this option is enabled, pressing the OEM button turns off the Wi-Fi card. Pressing it again turns the card back on. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 111 11. Battery Management The Lithium Ion battery packs used in your ARMOR X10 computer offer the best technology available today. These Smart Batteries provide ARMOR X10 users with the greatest power density and the most accurate battery gauge possible. To achieve the best possible performance from your batteries, we recommend using and maintaining the batteries in accordance with the instructions provided in this section. Your ARMOR X10 Tablet Computer comes with one or two Lithium Ion battery packs that are shipped separately in the box with the tablet. Due to current regulations regarding shipment of Lithium Ion batteries, your batteries will arrive in a partially charged condition, typically with a maximum charge of 30% to 50%. We recommend that you fully charge your batteries before using the computer on batteries alone. If you do not plan to use your computer immediately, be aware that the batteries will discharge at a slow rate even when not in use. WARNING!
Do not drop or mishandle the batteries, immerse them in water, or subject them to high heat. Doing so could increase the risk of explosion or leakage, and possibly cause injury. WARNING!
The lithium-ion batteries used in this equipment contain material that is hazardous to your health. If battery contents come in contact with the eyes, IMMEDIATELY flush the affected area with clean water for 15 minutes and have someone else summon medical attention for you. Unaffected persons should assist the affected individual in the vital first flushing of the eyes. WARNING!
If battery material comes in contact with the skin, flush the affected area with clean water and seek immediate medical treatment. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 112 Safety and Handling Considerations for Your Batteries Please use the following safety rules when handling and using lithium-Ion batteries. Do not expose the batteries to very high temperatures such as an open flame. Do not short circuit the battery or reverse its polarity. Do not let children play with the batteries. Do not crush, dent or allow any deformation of the battery. Do not disassemble or open the batteries or try to alter or bypass the internal safety circuits. Avoid exposing the battery to wet or extremely humid conditions. Avoid exposing the batteries to electrostatic discharge. Avoid dropping the battery. Do not use in or connect the battery to any other devices. Do not allow batteries to remain discharged for more than 1 week. When to Recharge Batteries NOTE When the lowest indicator begins to flash, the battery charge is at less than 10% charge and the tablet could shut down at any time, resulting in the loss of any work in progress. The Battery Gauge LEDS on the PC Control Panel indicate the remaining charge of the battery
(or batteries). At full charge, all five LED indicators of the Battery Gauge will be on steady and the Charging Status indicator will also be on steady if external power is applied. At full discharge, the bottom Battery Gauge indicator will be flashing. At this point, the charge level is between 10% and 3% and the computer could shut down unexpectedly. To avoid a sudden shutdown and possible data loss, its best to recharge or replace a battery when the top four LEDs are off and the bottom (10%) LED of the Battery Gauge is on steady. However, a battery can be recharged at any charge level without degrading the battery performance. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 113 How to Recharge Your Batteries The X10 batteries automatically begin charging when installed in the ARMOR Tablet and you apply external power. CAUTION!
DO NOT connect the AC adapter from an external Rapid Battery Charger into the X10 computer or docking mechanism. This power supply is 24 VDC and will cause permanent damage to the computer. To recharge the batteries, plug the circular connector of the AC Adapter into the DC input connector on the left side of the ARMOR X10, or into the PWR connector on the port replicator or desk dock unit. The ARMOR X10 is fully functional while the batteries are charging. Using the unit while it charges the batteries will only slightly lengthen the recharge time. Dont be alarmed if batteries feel warm to the touch during this process. It is normal for a battery to become warm during charging and discharging. Conditioning Your Battery Lithium-ion batteries do not require a periodic deep discharge to maintain a full charge as with nickel-cadmium (Ni-Cad) batteries. However, you can help ensure the accuracy of the battery gauge and prolong battery life by periodically conditioning the battery. This involves allowing the battery to discharge to its lower limit (10%) and then fully recharging it. DRS recommends that you perform this battery conditioning approximately every 30 cycles for each battery. To check the number of cycles for each battery, click on the ARMOR Utilities icon in the task bar tray or select Start All Programs Armor Utilities Batteries. How to Tell When Batteries Have Finished Charging While the batteries are charging, the Battery Gauge LEDs will light to indicate the current level of charge and the green Charging Status indicator will flash at about a 1 second rate. When the batteries are fully charged, all five Battery Gauge LEDs and the Charging Status indicator will be on steady. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 114 Charging a Battery with an External 2-Bay Battery Charger CAUTION!
The ARMOR X10 battery packs are specially built for DRS. Do not use any other model external battery charger than that supplied by DRS to charge the X10 battery packs. Serious damage to the batteries could result. Sequential Charger If you are charging only one battery pack, be sure to place it in the left slot. Two battery packs will take approximately 2.5 hours to reach full charge. A single battery pack will often take less than 2 hours. Simply insert the battery and the charging process will begin automatically. An LED for each battery indicates the current status of the charging process. Smart (SmBus) Charger With this charger, you can charge two batteries at the same time in about 2.5 hours. However, the charger also has the capability to automatically condition, or calibrate a battery by fully discharging it first and then fully recharging it. This calibration feature is only available with the left slot. The total time to charge and calibrate a single battery is approximately 8 hours. Once the battery has been charged, place it in the left slot and press the button in the center of the front panel labeled Push Here to Recalibrate Left Battery Bay. This will start the calibration process. What to Do for Over-discharged Batteries The Armor Tablet X10 has an internal Level 2 smart battery charger. One of the features of this charger is that it will attempt to recover a battery that has been deeply discharged (10% or less). This is done by applying a trickle current of 80 milliamps for about 3 minutes. This process normally injects enough energy into the battery to allow normal re-charging to occur. If the recovery process is successful, the Charging Status indicator will flash and the 10% LED will be on steady or flashing. Allow the battery to charge normally. If this normal recovery process does not work (charging status indicator will not flash and the battery gauge LEDs will not light), perform the procedure in Table 15. Deleted: Table 15 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 115 Table 15. Recover an Over-discharged Battery. STEP ACTION 1. Remove both batteries. 2. Wait 5 seconds. 3. 4. 5. Reinstall both batteries. Repeat steps 1-4 up to a maximum of five times. If the batteries still fail to start re-charging, they will have to be replaced. The following suggestions will help to prevent an over-discharge condition from occurring. In Windows Control Panel, Power Options, ensure the low power alarm is set to 9% and the critical alarm is set to 3% with the Alarm Action set to shut down the system. Refer to Setting Low Level and Critical Battery Alarms. Do not store the Armor X10 Tablet Computer for long periods with the batteries installed. Even when the unit is powered off, the tablet still draws a small amount of power. Do not leave the Armor Table X10 batteries in a discharged condition for long periods of time. The X10 batteries self-discharge over time. The batteries should be periodically recharged to between 30-50% of full charge about every six months of disuse. How to Increase Battery Service Time The total service time, or the time that a full battery charge can support normal operations, for the ARMOR X10 is approximately 4 hours with two batteries installed. However, this is dependent on a variety of factors including temperature, backlight requirements and computer usage. To ensure maximum performance of the batteries, you will need to optimize your computers power management features. Click on Start Control Panel Power Options. This will open the Power Options Properties screen. Here you will find power-saving and alarm settings. You will also be able to configure stand-by and hibernate modes. When to Replace a Battery 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 116 Battery life is affected by the age of the battery, its operating temperature, and the number of discharge/charge cycles that it goes through over time. For optimum battery performance, it is recommended that you replace your batteries according to the following schedule (NOTE:
Normal ambient temperature is room temperature in the range of +50F to +73F (+10C to
+23C). Table 16. ARMOR X10 Battery Replacement Schedule NORMAL USAGE AT NORMAL AMBIENT TEMPS AT EXTREME AMBIENT TEMPS Stand alone or in a Desk Dock 1 yr or after 300-400 cycles 1 yr or after 200-300 cycles In a Vehicle Dock 2 yrs or after 300-400 cycles 2 yrs or after 200-300 cycles To determine the battery date, check the Lot number on the battery label (see Figure 53). This number is the date the battery was shipped. In the example shown, 0808 would represent September 2008 so the recommended replacement date would be September 2009. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 53 SHIPPING DATE Figure 53. ARMOR X10 Battery Label Where to Purchase Replacement Batteries Your ARMOR X10 uses long lasting Lithium Ion batteries that are custom made for DRS Tactical Systems, Inc. If you need to purchase replacement batteries, notify your sales representative or contact DRS Technical Support. Do not substitute any other batteries. Substituting batteries could damage the X10 and may void your warranty. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 117 How to Store Batteries When They Are Not in Use The following storage tips will help you optimize the capacity and performance of your batteries. If the battery will not be in use for longer than 30 days, it is recommended that it be removed from the computer for storage. Store batteries between temperatures of 32F to 95F (0C to 35C) and a humidity of 45-85%. The best place to store them is in a refrigerator or freezer. Do not leave batteries in direct sunlight or any other unusually hot location. Your battery may deteriorate more quickly if stored in high temperatures such as a vehicle in the hot sun. Do not expose battery terminals to metal objects or water, which may short-circuit your battery. For long-term storage, its best to recharge as necessary to keep the battery level between 30%50% of full charge (to check the battery charge, insert the battery in the computer, power up, and double-click on the Power Meter icon in the Task Bar). Battery Tips for Best Performance Recharge the batteries within 24 hours of a full discharge. Batteries remaining in a fully discharged state longer than 24 hours may deteriorate more quickly. Battery charging should be done at temperatures between 32F (0C) to 95F (35C), but preferably at room temperature. The battery could deteriorate more quickly when charged at high temperatures. Discharging should be done at temperatures between 10C to +60C, preferably room temperature. You should perform a full discharge to the 10% level for each battery in operation every in the task bar tray or select Start All 30 cycles (click on the ARMOR Utilities icon Programs Armor Utilities Batteries to see the number of accumulated charge cycles). Ideally you should fully discharge a battery pack every time before recharging it. By charging the battery only after it is fully discharged, you will reduce the number of charge cycles and thus extend the life of your battery. When operating your ARMOR X10 on external power for extended periods of time (1 week or longer), its best to remove the batteries and store them in a cool place until needed. If they will be removed for longer than 30 days, see How to Store Batteries When They Are Not in Use If possible, allow a battery to warm or cool to room temperature before installing it in the computer. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 118 Disposing Of Your Batteries Lithium-ion batteries are fully recyclable and should not be simply thrown away. Please help protect our environment by turning in your defective batteries to an authorized recycler, or send them back to DRS. DRS Tactical Systems, Inc, supports recycling of batteries and will take back your batteries using a Returned Material Authorization (RMA) form. Please contact the DRS Technical Support center toll-free at 1-888-872-
1100 for more information. Follow these precautions when handling or returning used batteries:
Insulate the battery contacts with tape. Do not disassemble the batteries. Do not expose the batteries to flame or high heat. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 119 Monitoring and Improving Battery Performance Using the Power Meter Window You can easily monitor the current charge level of each battery by opening the Power Meter window, as shown in Figure 54. To open the Power Meter window, double-click on the battery icon
(if external power is connected) in the Windows task bar. You can also open the window by selecting Start Control Panel Power Options and clicking on the Power Meter tab.
(if operating on batteries only) or the plug icon Battery #1 is the left-most battery when looking at the battery compartments from the back of the computer (see Figure 17). Battery #1 is also referred to as the primary battery. Battery #2 is the right-hand battery and is also referred to as the secondary battery. This window shows the total battery power remaining as a percentage of total charge. It also indicates the total operating time remaining for the current battery charge. You must check the Always show icon on the taskbar option in this window for the icon to appear in the task bar. NOTE Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 54 Deleted: Figure 17 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Figure 54. Battery Charge Status in the Power Meter Window 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 120 Using the ARMOR Utilities Batteries Tab You can also check the battery charge status by selecting Start All Programs Armor Utilities and select the Batteries tab to open the window shown in Figure 55. A description of this window is found in ARMOR Utilities Batteries Tab. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 55 Figure 55. Armor Utilities Batteries Tab 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 121 Setting Low Level and Critical Battery Alarms You can set a warning alarm that is activated when your battery falls below the levels you have defined as low level and critical. This is done through the Alarms tab of the Power Options window in Control Panel. Follow the procedure in Table 17 to set the low level and critical battery alarms. Table 17. Set Low Level and Critical Battery Alarms. STEP 1. ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION Select Start Control Panel and the Power Options double-click on icon. 2. Select the Alarms tab. 3. Under Low battery alarm and Critical battery alarm, specify the settings that you want by moving the sliders. The Alarms tab window opens, as shown in Figure 56. NOTE It is recommended that you set the low battery alarm point to 9% and the critical alarm point to 3%. 4. Click on Alarm Action to select the type of alarm notification and resulting action you want to occur for each alarm. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 17 Deleted: Figure 56 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 122 Figure 56. Alarms Tab of the Power Options Properties Window Turning Off Power-Consuming Peripherals Peripheral devices on your computer use power. For instance, your display draws significant power from the batteries as does your hard drive and your wireless adapter. USB devices such as external CD-ROM drives or printers can draw power even when not in use. Because these peripherals together can draw a significant amount of power, you should consider shutting them down when they are not needed, or temporarily disabling them in software after a set time delay. You can do this for your display and your hard drives in Control Panel/Power Options. in the task bar or click on Start To shut off your wireless card, click on the wireless icon All Programs IntelPROSet /Wireless to open the Intel PROSet/Wireless window. Click on the down arrow to the right of the Wireless On button, then select Wireless Off. To turn the wireless card back on, select the Wireless On option. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 123 Using Power Schemes to Conserve Batteries Power schemes are a collection of settings that manage the power usage of your computer. With the options in the Power Schemes tab of the Power Options Properties window, you can:
Select from a number of pre-configured power schemes that are available in Power Options in the Control Panel. Adjust individual settings of any available power scheme. Create your own power schemes to suit your particular system and preferences. To access the Power Schemes tab, select Start Control Panel Power Options. The Power Options Properties window opens with the Power Schemes tab displayed by default, as shown in Figure 57. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 57 Figure 57. Power Schemes Tab of the Power Options Properties Window 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 124 Selecting a Pre-Configured Power Scheme Click on the down-arrow to the right of the Power Schemes field and select one of the available power schemes, as shown in Figure 58. The setup parameters for that scheme will appear in the Plugged in and Running on batteries columns. Portable/Laptop is the default power scheme. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 58 Figure 58. Power Schemes Tab Showing Available Power Schemes Customizing a Power Scheme You can customize an available power scheme to fit your needs and then rename it and save it as your own scheme. Just select an available power scheme from the drop-down list and change the settings in the available fields. When you have the settings the way you want them, click on the Save As button and enter the name you want for your new power scheme, then click OK. Your new power scheme will appear in the Power Schemes listing. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 125 Activating Standby Power Mode Standby mode is a low-power state in which your LCD and CPU turn off after a period of inactivity. When you want to use the computer again, it comes out of standby quickly and your desktop is restored exactly as you left it. Use the standby power mode to save battery power when you will be away from the computer for short periods of time. NOTE The terms stand by and standby are used interchangeably. To enable standby mode, open the Power Schemes tab and select a time delay in both the Plugged in and Running on batteries columns. Your X10 will automatically go to standby mode after the preset time delays. To manually force the computer into standby, select Start Turn Off Computer and click on the Stand By button. Activating Hibernation Power Mode Hibernation mode is a state in which your computer shuts down to save power but first saves the any data in memory to your hard disk. When you restart the computer, your desktop is restored exactly as you left it and you can resume any work you had in progress. Use hibernation mode to save power when you will be away from the computer for an extended period of time. Enabling and Configuring Hibernation Mode To enable Hibernation power mode and configure it for your operations, follow the procedure in Table 18. NOTE Your ARMOR X10 will automatically go into Hibernation mode when the configured time delays expire. To resume from the hibernation mode, restart your computer using the Power On/Off button. Your desktop and any work in progress will be restored as you left it. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 18 ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 126 Table 18. Enable and Configure Hibernation Mode STEP ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION 1. Click on Start Control Panel the select and Power Options Hibernate tab. The Hibernate tab is displayed, as shown in Figure 59. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 59 2. In the Disk space for hibernation section, verify that you have sufficient free disk space remaining to use the hibernation mode. Figure 59. Hibernate Tab of the Power Options Properties Window 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 127 3. Check the Enable Hibernation option and click on the Apply button at the bottom of the window. 4. Click on the Power Schemes tab. The System hibernates settings are now available under the System standby settings. 5. Select the time delays for the System hibernates settings in the Plugged in and Running on batteries columns. 6. Click OK to save the settings. Figure 60. Power Schemes Tab with Hibernation Mode Enabled 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 19 ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 128 Manually Activating Hibernation Mode Follow the procedure in Table 19 to manually force the X10 into hibernation mode. Table 19. Manually Activate Hibernation Mode STEP ACTION CONDITION OR INDICATION 1. Click on the Input Panel icon in the Task Bar to open the Input Panel. 2. Select the on-screen keyboard by clicking on the bottom button on the left side of the panel. 3. On the Task Bar, Click on Start Turn Off Computer. The Turn off computer window will open. 4. Tap on activate it. the keyboard Shift key to The yellow Standby key label changes to Hibernate. 5. Click on the Hibernate button to place the computer in hibernation mode. The computer will do an orderly shutdown and turn off. Any work in progress will be saved in memory and you can resume where you left off when you restart the tablet. 6. Perform a normal startup to resume you session. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 129 12. Frequently Asked Questions Following is a list of frequently asked questions about the ARMOR X10. If you dont see an answer to your question here, please contact DRS Technical Support at 888-872-1100 and one of our representatives will be happy to help you. 1. What Options Are Available For Loading Software Onto The ARMOR X10?
Any USB storage device, i.e., CD-ROM/DVD drive, flash drive, floppy drive, etc. Wireless LAN Bluetooth wireless devices Direct Cable Connection 2. How Do I Install Drivers For Peripheral Devices Sold By DRS Technologies?
The device drivers for your peripherals were pre-installed on your hard drive prior to shipping. They are located on your C drive in a folder labeled Drivers. If you order a new peripheral, the device drivers will either be on a disk shipped with the device or DRS will provide you with a source to download the drivers. If you are not familiar with how to update drivers, request assistance from your IT support or contact DRS Technical Support at 888-872-1100. 3. How Do I Install Drivers For Peripheral Devices Not Sold By DRS Technologies?
First, contact the manufacturer or vender where you purchased your peripheral or search the internet for the latest drivers and instructions for loading the drivers. If you still cannot locate the correct driver(s), contact DRS Technical Support at 888-872-
1100 and we will attempt to help you. 4. What External Peripherals Does the ARMOR X10 Support?
Tablet only:
1 USB device CD-ROM/DVD drive, printers, flash drives, etc. 1 RJ45 device network printer 1-2 PCMCIA devices 1 Flexspace device Bluetooth wireless devices With a docking station or port replicator:
Up to 4 additional USB devices Up to 3 serial devices Second display or video device 1 Flexspace device 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 130 Bluetooth wireless devices 1 standard parallel port device Up to two audio speakers 5. How Do I Activate the On-Screen Keyboard?
Click on the Input Panel icon on the task bar and then select the bottom mode button on the left side of the panel, as shown in Figure 39. For additional information, refer to On-
screen Keyboard. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 39 6. How Can Hand Writing Recognition Be Disabled?
For XP Tablet Computer Edition, the handwriting recognition cannot be disabled. For MS Pen services, open the control panel applet for Hand Writer Settings. There is an option located under the Personal tab that will allow you to set the time delay for Switch from Ink to Text Selection. Set this adjustment to the left (0.0 seconds) to disable Hand Writer Recognition. For Calligrapher, the handwriting recognition is only active when the calligrapher program is running. 7. How Can I Open the Windows Task Manager (Ctrl-Alt-Del) Without A Keyboard?
Press and hold the OEM button on the PC Control Panel for 4-5 seconds. 8. What Do I Do If My X10 Locks Up Or Freezes?
Press and hold the OEM button on the PC Control Panel for 4-5 seconds to invoke the CTRL-ALT-DEL function. Select the Applications tab and highlight the offending application, then click on End Task. CAUTION!
Be careful shutting down SYSTEM processes. Killing the wrong process could render the X10 inoperative or cause an immediate shutdown. If shutting down the application does not work, select the Processes tab. Highlight the process that is locked and then click on End Process. If this does not fix the problem, press and hold the Power On/Off button for five seconds to force a hardware shutdown. Any work in progress will be lost. 9. How Do I Clean The Docking (Champ) Connector On The Back Of The ARMOR X10?
A non-metallic bristle brush can be used to clean out any dust or foreign particles. DRS recommends that you not lubricate the connector as this could interfere with data transmission and result in degraded performance. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 131 10. How Do I Clean The Display Surface?
When possible, remove loose dust and dirt from the display surface first with clean, dry compressed air. Do not use high pressure air (>60 psi) or any abrasive cleaner. Use a lint-
free cotton swab or soft bristle brush to remove foreign matter around the edges of the display. Wipe the display surface with any non-ammonia based glass cleaner. Always spray the glass cleaner on the cloth or towel first and then wipe the screen. 11. What Do I Do When The Pen Gets Out Of Calibration?
NOTE Use this procedure only for pen tablets. Follow the procedure in Calibrating the Active Pen Screen. 12. What If The Pen Still Will Not Align?
Check that the Windows Display settings have not been altered to a screen resolution other than factory default (1024 x 768 pixels, 32 bit color quality). If so, adjust the setting to factory default, reboot the unit and re-attempt pen alignment. 13. What Can I Do When The Start Button Disappears?
In pen computing, it is not uncommon for a user to inadvertently resize the task bar so that it is not visible on the screen. First, attempt to recover the start button and task bar by moving around the edges of the display to see if you will get a double arrow. If you get a double arrow, simply drag the task bar to the size you need. If not corrected, follow these directions (NOTE: you will need to attach a USB keyboard to perform this function. Do not attempt to use the pen during this process). a. Press and hold the <CTRL> key and then press the <ESC> key to display the Start menu. b. Press the <ESC> button and the menu will disappear. You have now placed the focus on the Start button. c. Press <ALT>, <SPACEBAR> keys in combination to display a context menu. d. Use the cursor keys to navigate in the context menu and highlight Size. e. Press <ENTER> and the pointer will move to the middle of the taskbar along the edge of the display and become a two-way arrow. f. Using the cursor key, size the task bar to your preference. g. Press the <ENTER> key to set the task bar size. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 132 h. To avoid this problem in the future, try sizing the task bar to a size larger than the default. This can be done at your discretion. Windows XP also gives you the option of locking the task bar so this will not happen. We highly recommend locking your taskbar if you are using Windows XP. To lock your taskbar:
1) Right click on the taskbar. 2) Select the Properties tab. 3) Under task bar tab menu, check Lock the taskbar. 14. What Do I Do When The Battery Discharges and Will Not Charge In The Unit?
First, try the recovery procedure described in What to Do for Over-discharged Batteries. Next, try to charge a known good battery (if available) in the same battery compartment. If this works, then the battery in question is defective. If a known good battery fails to charge, then the internal battery charger has failed and the ARMOR X10 needs to be returned for service. 15. How is USB supported by The ARMOR X10?
The ARMOR X10 is manufactured with a single USB connection on the side of the unit. This USB connection can be used for a wide variety of USB devices. The ARMOR X10 supports USB 1.1 and 2.0 functionality. DRS Tactical Systems can provide docking stations with a USB port that communicates with the ARMOR X10 via the docking connection. An externally powered USB Hub may be used on the X10 USB port. 16. What Are DRS Technical Support Hours Of Operation?
DRS Tactical Systems Inc. staffs the Technical Support call center 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 133 13. DRS Technical Support Before You Contact Us Please have your local technical personnel check for network or custom software problems before contacting DRS Technical Support with a problem. How to Obtain Warranty Service Before proceeding, please read the Warranty Information. Notice: DRS reserves the right to charge a No Fault Found (NFF) fee for any unit returned for repair that is found to be fully operational. 1. Immediately notify DRS. Inform DRS of your problem at one of the numbers below, or notify an authorized DRS Reseller. In North America, call:
(888) 872-1100 or (321) 309-0599 24 hrs, 7 days a week In the UK, call:
44-(0)-1252-730716 In Europe, call:
49-2246-915-99-77 2. Obtain a Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) Number. If it is determined that your product needs to be returned for replacement or repair, a customer service representative will give you an RMA number. The RMA number is required to return any product to DRS, regardless of the reason for the return. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 134 If you already have a customer User Name and Password:
You can choose to fill out our online RMA form in lieu of calling:
1.Go to www.drsarmor.com. 2.Click on the Support tab and select Online RMA. 3.At the login screen, enter the following:
Username: drs Password: drs 4.Click on Send. 5.Fill out the online form. 6.Print a copy of the form for your records. 7.Select Send. 3. Include the Following Required Information with Your Product(s):
Company name, address and telephone number. RMA number received from DRS (if applicable). Serial number of the product. Date of purchase. Your ship-to address and any special shipping requirements. A detailed description of the problem. 4. Prepare your Products for Shipment. Use the original shipping container if possible to return your product. Remove the batteries and package them separately. If the original container is not available, wrap each item securely with bubble wrap or suitable cushioning material. Enclose a copy of the RMA form. Enclose a description of the problem and any special notes for the repair technician. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 135 5. Ship Your Product(s). Ship your products to one of the addresses listed below:
NOTE Transportation and insurance costs must be prepaid. DRS is not responsible for loss or damage which may occur in transit. NOTE Before you ship any product(s) to DRS, be sure to back up the data on any hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s). Remove any confidential, proprietary or personal information and any removable media such as floppy disks, CDs or PC Cards. DRS is not responsible for any confidential, proprietary or personal information, lost or corrupted data, or damaged or lost removable media. Ship to:
In North America, ship to:
In Europe, ship to:
or:
DRS Tactical Systems, Inc. 1110 West Hibiscus Boulevard Melbourne, Florida 32901 USA ATTN: Service DRS Tactical Systems, LTD. The Trading Estate Farnham Surrey, GU9 9NN UK ATTN: Brian Perkins International Markus Breuch Rathausstr. 10 53797 Lohmar, Germany ATTN: Silke Zaigler 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 136 Once your product(s) are repaired or replaced under the terms specified in the warranty, DRS will return your product(s), with shipping pre-paid, to the address included with your RMA. If You Need Further Information Please call us, fax us, email us, or visit our website. Call us:
Fax us:
Email us:
For Support:
For Sales and Information Or Visit our website at:
In North America, call: (888) 872-1100 or (321) 309-0599 In the UK, call: 44-(0)-1252-730716 In Europe, call: 49-2246-915-99-77 In North America: 321-725-0496 In the UK, fax: 44-(0)-1252-730522 In Germany, fax: 49-2246-915-99-78 In North America or UK: support@drs-ts.com In Europe: sales@drsarmor.eu In North America or UK: Sales@drsarmor.com In Europe, email: Sales@drsarmor.eu www.drsarmor.com For translation in German, click on Deutsch at the top of the page. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 137 Warranty Information DRS TACTICAL SYSTEMS, INC. LIMITED WARRANTY HARDWARE ARMOR PRODUCTS General Information DRS Tactical Systems, Inc. (DRS) warrants for the duration of this warranty that the DRS ARMOR product(s) (Product(s)) produced by DRS will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service, subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein. This warranty applies to the Products only and excludes, but is not limited to, all other products and accessories supplied and/or distributed but not manufactured by DRS. This warranty extends only to the original purchaser of Products from DRS or a DRS Authorized Reseller (Original Purchaser). It is not transferable to anyone who subsequently purchases or obtains the Products from the Original Purchaser. Length of Warranty The warranty is valid for a period of three (3) years from the original date of the packing slip from DRS and/or an Authorized Reseller. During this period, DRS will, at its option and expense, either repair or replace with new or reconditioned (of equal or better quality) parts of any of the Products which prove to be defective, provided that such Products are returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. All exchanged parts and Products replaced under this warranty will become the property of DRS. If repair or replacement is not feasible, DRS will, at its option, refund the purchase price of the Product(s) on a three year straight line depreciation basis. Any replacement part or Product will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. Terms and Conditions This warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship in the Products, as follows:
Term 3 years standard Technical Assistance Yes Shipping Costs Shipping costs of a Product to DRS are not included as part of this Warranty. Shipping costs of a Product to the Original Purchaser after a warranty repair is included as part of this warranty. If after receipt of a Product for repair under this warranty, it is later determined to be a non-warranted repair, all shipping costs are to be paid by the Original Purchaser. This warranty does not cover:
Non-DRS ARMOR products (accessories) under the original manufacturers warranty including, but not limited to, the carrying case, PCMCIA cards, etc. Non-DRS ARMOR branded products are not covered under an extended warranty period. Software, including the operating system and software added to the DRS ARMOR hardware products through our factory-
integration system, third-party software, or the reloading of software;
Scratches or abrasions to the Products LCD screen/display, and abusive wear of the LCD screens;
Consumables and High Wear Items. Batteries, Keyboards, Touch Pad, Touch Screen, AC Adaptor, and liquid crystal display
(LCD) are covered under the Limited Warranty for one (1) year. Problems that result from external causes such as accident, fire, floods, or acts of God; abuse; misuse; or problems with electrical power; servicing not authorized by DRS; failure to follow the Product instructions or failure to perform preventative maintenance; problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by DRS; improper installation (to 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 138
include the absence of surge protection in vehicle installations), testing, operation, use or handling of the Product; or unauthorized alteration of Products Products with missing or altered service tags or serial numbers. Products for which DRS has not received payment. DRS is not responsible for and shall not be liable for transportation and insurance charges incurred in or damages resulting from transporting the Products, Accessories and/or Replacement Products to DRS for warranty service. DRS is not responsible for any third-party software created for use in the integration and/or operation of any Products, Accessories and/or Replacement Products whether or not such third party software was installed by DRS. Maintenance and support service for third-party software is the sole responsibility of the creator thereof. Additional Information The agents, dealers, DRS Authorized Resellers and employees of DRS are not authorized to make any modifications to this warranty, or additional warranties binding on DRS about or for Products, Accessories and/or products sold or supplied by DRS. Additional statements, whether oral or written, except signed written statements from an officer of DRS, do not constitute warranties and should not be relied upon. The Product is not designed or certified for use in high risk applications including, but not limited to, the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or air traffic control systems, communications systems in which a failure thereof could cause death or serious injury or property damage (e.g., emergency or 911 communications systems), medical systems, life support, weapons systems or any other potentially life critical uses. Original Purchaser understands and agrees that DRS makes no assurances or warranties that the Product is suitable for any such high risk uses. DRS SOLE LIABILITY, AND ORIGINAL PURCHASERS SOLE REMEDY, FOR ANY MALFUNCTIONS AND DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCTS IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY STATED HEREIN, DRS DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OTHERWISE ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR TRADE. NO WARRANTIES WILL APPLY AFTER THE WARRANTY PERIOD HAS EXPIRED. DRS HEREBY DISCLAIMS, AND THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER HEREBY AGREES, THAT DRS DOES NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES PROVIDED FOR IN THIS WARRANTY OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY LIABILITY FOR THIRD PARTY CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE, OR FOR LOST DATA OR LOST SOFTWARE. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING CONTAINED HEREIN, DRS TOTAL LIABILITY FOR ANY ALLEGED OR ACTUAL BREACH OF WARRANTY WILL BE NO MORE THAN THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF ANY SUCH CLAIM. THIS IS THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT FOR WHICH DRS SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 139 14. Acronyms and Glossary Acronyms ACRONYM AC BIOS DEFINITION alternating current basic input/output system CD-ROM compact disk read only memory CPU DC DVD GB GPS HDD I/O LCD LED OEM PC central processing unit direct current digital video disk gigabytes global positioning satellite system hard disk drive Input/Output liquid-crystal display light-emitting diode original equipment manufacturer personal computer PCMCIA personal computer memory card international association ppi RAM SIM card SmBus SODIMM pixels per inch random access memory subscriber identity module system management bus small outline dual in-line memory module 9711-40132-0001 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev B ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 140 SSHD SVGA TFT USB VAC VDC VGA XGA solid-state hard drive super VGA (maximum of 800 x600 ppi) thin-film transistor universal serial bus volts AC volts DC video graphics array extended VGA (1024 x 768 ppi) Glossary TERM DEFINITION ambient temperature The temperature of the air surrounding an object fully depleted battery A lithium-ion battery that has discharged to a level of 3 % or below. fully charged battery A lithium-ion battery that has reached 100% of charge as indicated by a steady 100% LED on the Battery Gauge on the PC Control Panel. fully discharged battery A lithium-ion battery that has discharged to a level between 10%
and 3% of charge, as indicated by a flashing 10% LED on the Battery Gauge. Flexspace device A custom circuit card that is mounted in a special compartment in the computer and connected to the X10 with a flexible communications interface. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 141 RECORD OF CHANGES Rev ECO# Description Of Change 58633 Initial Release. 73341 Reorganized manual. Updated front and back covers. Updated tablet images and logos. 74704 See detailed record of changes following this page.
A B 9711-40132-0001 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev B ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 142 DETAILED RECORD OF CHANGES Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
NOTE: Page numbers in this listing are based on the previous revision. Page numbering has changed significantly in this new revision. NOTE: Referenced Figure and Table numbers in this list may be different from those shown in the manual. Check attached copy of manual for latest updates. 1. Global Underlined all Figure and Table references and changed font color to blue. 2. Global Replaced DC Power Supply with AC Adapter. 3. Global Realigned page breaks - note new page numbering. All Heading 1 (numbered sections) should start on an odd page. 4. Global Changed ARMOR Technical Support to DRS Technical Support. 5. Global Removed periods after all Table and Figure titles. 6. Global Changed bulleting tab spaces from 0 to .5. 7. Global Changed list spacing to 3 pt before/3 pt after, single spacing. 8. Global Updated all figure, table, and hyperlinked references. 9. Page 2: ARMOR Accessories image, inside cover Updated image and labels. 10. 11. Page 3: Moved Special Notes from page 51 to after the Trade Statement. Special Notes changed to NOTICE:
Added compliance statements for Industry Canada. Added compliance with ATEX directive. Page 6: Warning Summary, second CAUTION -Changed SmBus Pro to Rapid Battery. Third CAUTION - Changed such as an AC power supply and docking station to such as with the DC power supply connected to the computer and vehicle power connected to the docking station. Last WARNING - Revised first part of sentence: Changes or modifications not performed by, or expressly authorized by, DRS ~. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 143 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Additions / Corrections / Changes:
Added four new CAUTIONs. Page 15: Figure description revised to read: The ARMOR X10 ruggedized tablet computer can be mounted in a desk docking station or vehicle dock (shown here in a desk dock with a compact keyboard). Last sentence of last paragraph changed to following: You can write and perform operations directly on the screen, work with a virtual on-screen keyboard, or attach a USB keyboard (compact keyboard, standard-sized USB keyboard, or a Bluetooth keyboard). Added 3rd paragraph: We take pride in providing high-quality products and superior customer service. Thank you for choosing the DRS ARMOR X10 Tablet Computer, and for your trust in the ARMOR line of products. Page 16: Figure 1 Deleted one battery. Changed label from Batteries to Battery. Changed stylus label to: Stylus with Lanyard. Added shoulder strap image and label and rearranged accessories. Replaced other images with higher resolution images. Page 17: ARMOR X10 Documentation, 1st sentence: Revised: The following documents are contained on your ARMOR X10 Tablet Computer in PDF format. To access these documents, double-click on the appropriate icon on the desktop. Added new bullet #1 ARMOR X10 Users Guide Provides operating information and descriptions of all controls and indicators. Contains necessary procedures to setup and operate the ARMOR X10. Last paragraph, last sentence Revised text in parentheses to: (compact keyboard shown above, standard-sized USB keyboard, or Bluetooth keyboard). Page 18: Deleted extra carriage return before page 19 which caused following page numbers to be off by 1. Help Us Maintain Top Quality Documentation title Added Please before Help. Deleted last paragraph. Page 20: Key Features section, 1st sentence Revised to read: The following paragraphs and indicators, connectors and accessories of the ARMOR X10. the principal components, controls, images describe 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 144 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
Added three new paragraphs after the NOTE. Key Features section, 1st paragraph Modified 1st sentence to read: The following paragraphs and images describe the principal components, controls, indicators and connectors, and included and optional accessories. Changed Touch-Sensitive Screen label to Active Pen or Touch-Sensitive Screen and moved label to top of figure. Changed Optional GPS/GPRS Antennas label to Optional GPS Antenna. Moved PC Control Panel label to top of figure. 17. Page 22: Added label: Secondary WI-FI Antenna (Behind Cover). 18. Page 23: Added Serial Number label to Figure 5. 19. Page 24: Reduced arrowhead sizes to medium size. Page 25: Power Indicator section - Changed whenever power is applied to whenever the X10 is powered up. Battery Gauge Indicators section Revised first paragraph to read: The Battery Gauge consists of five LEDs that are used to indicate the charge remaining in your battery or batteries. Each light represents approximately 20% of the average charge of two batteries or the remaining charge of a single battery. Revised second paragraph to read: When all five LEDs are lit and the charging status indicator is on steady, the batteries are fully charged. As the batteries are used, the LEDs will turn off from top to bottom to indicate the remaining charge. Each LED will blink upon transitioning to next lower charge level indicator. Brightness Control section - Deleted or from an attached keyboard from second sentence. title Removable Components Page 26: Changed main section Components and Accessories". Changed section title Removable Batteries to Battery Pack. 1st paragraph, 3rd sentence Revised: Two fully-charged battery packs will provide up to 4 hours of operation depending on the workload on the computer. Figure 8 label Changed Battery to Battery Pack. Hard Drive section - 1st sentence, changed is equipped to comes equipped. to Removable 20. 21. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 145 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
Last sentence of 1st paragraph - Changed sizes to capacities. Added sentence after last sentence: This drive should only be removed or installed by a qualified technician. 22. Page 27: Added AC Adapter section and figure ahead of PCMCIA card section. Added new Heading 2 title: Optional Accessories for your X10 with description ahead of PCMCIA card section. Renamed PCMCIA Card (Optional) section to PCMCIA Cards 1st sentence rewritten to: Your ARMOR X10 provides two PC/PCMCIA card slots that can accommodate either two Type II cards or a single Type III card. Added second sentence: These cards can provide enhanced features such as extended communications capabilities and additional memory capacity. Added Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Card section with description. Added Compact Keyboard section with description and figure. Added Two-Bay External Battery Charger section with figure. Added Vehicle DC/DC Power Supply section with figure. Added Docking Stations section with figure. Added Port Replicator section with figure. Added Vehicle Docks section with figure. Added sentence at end of optional accessories section: For information on these and any other accessories, please contact your ARMOR sales representative or call DRS Tactical Systems toll free at 1-888-872-1100. 23. Page 28: Figure 7 - Redrew Battery Gauge Indicators arrows. Page 30: Added NOTE after Installing the Battery Packs heading: If your X10 came with only one battery, install it in the Primary battery compartment. Changed battery compartment labels to place battery #s in parentheses. Added SIM card label to Figure 10. Page 33: Added new title Using the Stylus ahead of 1st paragraph. Revised 1st sentence of 1st paragraph of Touch Screen Operations If your tablet is equipped with a touchscreen display, the stylus is the primary means of operating the 24. 25. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 146 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
computer. Added NOTE after Table 2 If you have a touch tablet, do not use the Tablet and Pen Settings window in Control Panel to calibrate the screen. Doing so could cause the loss of screen calibration. Added following sentence after NOTE: After a period of normal usage, the screen may need to be calibrated with the stylus to ensure the actual touch point matches the position of the cursor. To perform this calibration, refer to Calibrating the Touch Screen. Added new section Configuring Your Touch Tablet for Screen Rotation. Added new Table 3. 26. Page 34: Moved Screen Rotation section after Pen Operations section. 27. Page 35: Pen Operations section, 1st sentence changed to read: If your ARMOR X10 is a pen tablet, the pen is the primary screen navigation and data entry tool. 2nd paragraph, 2nd sentence Deleted on the pen. Pen Adjustments section - Changed beginning of 1st sentence to read: If your X10 uses the Windows XP Tablet PC operating system, you can adjust attributes related to use of the pen (e.g. tap speed, left/right hand orientation, etc.) by ~
Replaced second sentence with Refer to Tablet and Pen Settings for Windows XP for instructions. Moved second paragraph to Pen Screen Calibration and Settings (Pen Tablets Only) section in Display Management section. Last paragraph, last sentence, changed to read: To perform this calibration, refer to Calibrating the Active Pen Screen. Inserted Screen Rotation section after Pen Adjustments section and renamed title to Rotating the Screen. Rotating the Screen section was completely revised (see revised manual). 28. Page 36: Operating with a Second Display section, 2nd sentence, revised first part of sentence: The built-in LCD panel has a maximum screen resolution of 800 x 600 (SVGA) or 1024 x 768 (XGA) pixels per inch (ppi), while ~
First NOTE changed as follows: The X10 tablet does not have an external video connector. You must have a docking station or port replicator to connect a second display. Table 3 is now Table 4. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 147 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
29. 30. 31. Additions / Corrections / Changes:
Page 37: Working with the Extended Desktop section - Moved last paragraph to 2nd paragraph. Now last paragraph, changed the first sentence to read: Using a mouse, you can sweep the cursor back and forth between displays as if the two displays were one desktop. Page 38: Changed Using the Stylus with the Extended Desktop section title to Using the Stylus or Pen with the Extended Desktop. Using the Stylus with the Extended Desktop section, 1st sentence, revised to read:
Because the X10 is the only one of your two displays with a touch screen or active pen screen, you must make all cursor movements for both displays from the X10 tablet display. 2nd paragraph Removed double period from end of last sentence. Page 41: Added two introductory paragraphs. Changed Windows XP Tablet PC Edition Operating System heading to Windows XP Tablet Tutorials. Revised 1st paragraph into two paragraphs. Added Microsoft in front of Windows in Help With Windows XP section. 32. Page 42 et al: Armor Utilities Panel section, changed Panel to Program in title. Revised 1st paragraph into two paragraphs. Added figures and descriptions for each tab. 33. 34. Page 43: Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Utility section - Revised description and added note. Added figures and descriptions for each tab. Added Tablet and Pen Settings section with figures and descriptions for each tab. Intel PROSet Wireless Utility section Added three new sentences to description. Page 44: Revised BlueSoleil description. Revised Realtek Audio Manager description. Changed title of last section to Special Software Applications. Revised beginning of first sentence to read: You may have software programs other than 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 148 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
those provided by DRS or the Windows ~. 35. Page 45: Quick Reference Guide section Changed title of section to Quick Reference List. Deleted second sentence in description. Changed title of Table 4 (now Table 5) to Quick Reference List. Row 1 - Separated Power Settings and Power Button Options into two separate entries. Row 3 - Changed task to Monitor Internal Temperatures. Display Settings task, changed title to Screen Calibration and Touch Settings. Same task, under OBJECTIVE column, for touch screen calibration cell, added for touch tablets only at end of sentence. Same task, under OBJECTIVE column, for active pen screen calibration, added :for pen tablets only at end of sentence. Deleted Serial Port Settings and Tablet and Pen Settings rows (last two rows). 36. Page 47: Writing Pad section, 1st sentence - Added (Figure 40) between Pad and within. Character Pad section, 1st sentence Added (Figure 41) at end of sentence. On-screen Keyboard section, 1st sentence Added (Figure 42) between keyboard and when. 37. Page 49: 1st paragraph, 2nd sentence Revised to read: For example, you can enter dictation as text into a program. 38. Page 51: Changed section title from Wireless Networking to Networking. 1st paragraph, revised 2nd and 3rd sentences: The Bluetooth network is primarily used for connecting wireless devices such as a wireless printer or scanner to your computer. It can also connect your X10 to a network entry point. Added 2nd paragraph: The X10 can also be connected to a LAN using a standard Ethernet cable. Moved Special Notes to ahead of Warning Summary section. Added Managing Your Bluetooth Connections section. Changed title Accessing a Wireless Network to Managing Your Wireless LAN Connections. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Deleted: Figure 40 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 41 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 42 ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 149 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
Revised paragraph into two paragraphs (see manual) Added final paragraph: For additional information on using the Intel PROSet Wi-Fi application, click on the Help option. 39. Page 52: Turning Off the Wireless Card section, second paragraph Revised second in the sentence to read: To shut off your wireless card, left-click on the wireless icon task bar and select the Wireless Off option, or click on Start All Programs IntelPROSet /Wireless to open the Intel PROSet/Wireless window and then click on the button in the lower left of the window and select Wireless Off. Added third paragraph: Note that the button is now labeled Wireless Off. To turn the wireless card back on, select the Wireless On option. Page 53: Second paragraph and list Deleted 1st bulleted item. Changed list from bulleted to numbered. 40. in the task bar and verify that Revised item 1 to read Left-click on the wireless icon the Wireless On option has a check by it. If not, select the Wireless On option to turn on the wireless radio. Item 4 Changed Avoid to Move away from. Accessing a Network Using an Ethernet Cable section Change RG45 to RJ-45. Revised description into two paragraphs (second paragraph is after Table 6) (see manual). 1st paragraph, last sentence Revised to read: Follow the procedure in Table 6 to set up a physical LAN connection. Table 5 (now Table 6) - Renumbered steps. Revised step 1 You will need to contact your IT department or internet provider to access the server and obtain an IP address for your X10. Revised step 4 Click Next and follow the instructions to set up your connection per your IT department or internet provider. 41. Page 55: Added new Flexspace section at beginning of page. NMEA Standard Support section, second paragraph - Revised sentence to read: For information and assistance with GPS capability, please contact DRS Tactical Systems toll free at 1-888-872-1100. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Normal, Space Before: 6 pt, After:
6 pt Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted:
Table 6 Page Break ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 150 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
42. Page 56: Corrected Chipset entry under PARAMETER column to GSC3f/LP-7879. 43. Pages 58-62: Deleted General Packet Radio System section. 44. Page 61: Changed USSD phrase to USSD phase. 45. Page 63: 3rd paragraph, 3rd sentence revised: Even if the System Recovery CD is used, it looks for the backup data on the hard drive. 4th paragraph: Added all data saved between the words recover and from. Disk Partitions section, first sentence: Replaced several with multiple. Deleted 3rd paragraph beginning with The DRS-Acronis ~ . 46. Page 64: How to Access QuickBack ~ section, revised last sentence: The startup screen is shown in Figure 45. 47. Page 65: Change title Emergency Bootable CD to System Recovery CD. 1st sentence, replace an Emergency Bootable CD with a System Recovery CD. 2nd sentence, replace Emergency Bootable CD with Recovery CD. 2nd paragraph, replace Bootable with Recovery. For CD/DVD, delete /DVD. Page 67: Added Adjusting and before Maintaining in section title. Added new section heading Removal and Replacement ahead of Removing and Replacing the Hard Drive section. Removing and Replacing the Hard Drive section Added NOTE after title: This drive should only be removed or installed by a qualified technician. Table 9 Renumbered steps. Step 1(formerly step 6) - changed over to carry case cover. Step 2 Revised sentence to read: Using a #1 Philips screwdriver, remove the four screws at the bottom right of the tablet securing the hard drive cover (see Figure 6) and remove the cover. 48. Table 10 - added caution after Step 2 Do not force the card into the slot. If it binds, remove the card and try again. Be sure the card is not cocked at an angle and spanning two slots. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 45 Deleted: Figure 6 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 151 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
Changed 3rd step to read: Insert the replacement card carefully into the slot and press in until it seats. It should slide in smoothly. 49. Page 68: Moved Caring for the Touchscreen to after Adjusting the Click Settings for the Touch Screen Stylus section. Moved the Monitoring the Health of Your ARMOR X10 section to after the Caring for the Pen Tablet Screen section. 50. Page 70: Moved the Configuring the OEM Button section from Appendix A and placed it after the Monitoring the Health of Your ARMOR X10 section. Page 71: Consolidated first paragraph (formerly under Manual Brightness Adjustment) with description under new heading Adjusting the Display Brightness Manually. Changed heading Adjusting the Backlight Level Manually Using the OEM Button section title to Using the OEM Button Modified first part of 1st sentence to read: Your OEM button is pre-configured by default to
Changed Adjusting the Backlight level manually Using the ARMOR Utilities Backlight Tab section title to Using the Armor Utilities Backlight Tab. Using the Armor Utilities Backlight Tab section, 1st sentence Changed select to selecting. Last sentence Replaced below with in Figure 48. Page 72: First paragraph, 1st sentence Removed the word in at the end of the sentence. Changed Automatic Brightness Control section title to Adjusting the Brightness Automatically. Changed Advanced Automatic Brightness Control section title to Setting the Advanced Backlight Control. Moved Setting the Advanced Backlight Control section from Appendix A and placed it in the Setting the Advanced Backlight Control section. 51. 52. 53. Page 73: Changed Calibrating the Touch Screen section title to Touch Screen Calibration and Settings (Touch Tablets Only). 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 152 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
1st paragraph added sentence to end of paragraph: Refer to Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel Utility for a description of the settings and options. Added CAUTION: This procedure is for ARMOR X10 touch tablets only. For pen tablets, refer to Calibrating the Active Pen Screen. Added NOTE following CAUTION: Use the stylus instead of a fingertip to calibrate the screen. Table 12 (now Table 11), Step 1 Changed sentence in Condition or Indication column to read: A calibration target is displayed with arrows moving inward, as shown below. Deleted Figure 27 and inserted the image into Step 1 Condition or Indication cell below text. Step 2, In Condition or Indication column - Added sentence: The Calibration Options screen is displayed, as shown below. Added Calibration Options image to Step 2 in Condition or Indication cell below text. Reversed Steps 10 and 11. Step 11 At end of last sentence, remove period and add or call DRS Technical Support at 1-888-872-1100. 54. Page 75: Adjusting the Click Settings ~ section, 1st paragraph Deleted last sentence. Added description of click setting options. Added last sentence: Follow the procedure in Table 12 to adjust these settings. Table 12, Step 1, Condition cell Replaced in Figure 28 with as shown below. Inserted the Caring for the Touchscreen section from original page 68. 55. Page 76: Deleted Figure 28 and inserted image into Condition cell for Step 1. Table 13 (now Table 12) Step 6 - Bolded Double-Click Speed. 56. Page 77: Added new top-level heading (Heading level 2): Pen Screen Calibration and Settings (Pen Tablets Only). All other headings in section demoted accordingly. Added paragraph moved from Pen Operations / Pen Adjustments section. Calibrating the Active Pen Screen section - Added CAUTION after title: This procedure is for ARMOR X10 Pen tablets only. For Touch tablets, refer to Calibrating the Touch Screen. Table 14 (now Table 13) Deleted Step 2 row. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 12 ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 153 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
57. Additions / Corrections / Changes:
Delete NOTE row in Table 14. Page 78 et al: Tablet and Pen Settings for Windows XP section, figures 29, 30, and 31 -
Corrected label to Tablet and Pen Settings Panel. Settings Tab section - Added new 1st sentence: The Settings tab is shown in Figure 48. Deleted NOTE. 58. Page 79: Revised entire Display Tab section. 59. Page 80: Revised 1stt sentence Figure 31 is now Figure 50. 2nd paragraph, second sentence inserted available between select and options. Inserted new section Caring for the Pen Tablet Screen. Inserted Monitoring the Health of Your ARMOR X10 section from page 68 and updated figure and table numbers. Inserted Configuring the OEM Button section and updated figure number. 60. Page 81: 1st paragraph, end of last sentence Replaced below with in this section. Split 2nd paragraph into paragraphs 2 and 3. 3rd paragraph 1st sentence Revised sentence to read: We recommend that you fully charge your batteries before using the computer on batteries alone. 61. Page 82: 1st paragraph Deleted 1st and 2nd sentence. Remaining sentence Changed Lithium ion to lithium-ion 1st bullet Revised to read: Do not expose the batteries to very high temperatures such as an open flame. When to Recharge Batteries section - Revised entire section (see manual). Capitalized title How to recharge your batteries. How to Recharge Your Batteries section Revised entire section (see manual). 62. Page 83: 1st paragraph, 1st sentence Replaced DC power supply with AC Adapter. Same sentence - Replaced in the ARMOR X10 with on the left side of the ARMOR X10, 1st paragraph, last sentence Changed recharging to recharge. How to Tell When Batteries Have Finished Charging section Revised entire paragraph. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 154 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
Added new Charging a Battery with an External 2-Bay Battery Charger section before What to Do for Over-discharged Batteries section. What to Do for Over-discharged Batteries section, 1st paragraph, last sentence, revised to read: If the recovery process is successful, the Charging Status indicator will flash and the 10% LED will be on steady or flashing. Added new last sentence to 1st paragraph: Allow the battery to charge normally. Last two paragraphs Consolidated to one sentence as follows: If this normal recovery process does not work (charging status indicator will not flash and the battery gauge LEDs will not light), perform the procedure in Table 15. 63. Page 84: First bulleted item, revised sentence to: In Windows Control Panel, Power Options, ensure the low power alarm is set to 9% and the critical alarm is set to 3% with the Alarm Action set to shut down the system. How to Increase Battery Service Time section, 1st sentence Changed 3 hours to approximately 4 hours. 2nd sentence - Added the age of the batteries, between including and temperature. Completely revised When to Replace a Battery section. 64. Page 85: Completely revised How to Store Batteries When They Are Not in Use section. Completely revised Battery Tips for Best Performance section:
65. Page 86: Disposing of Your Batteries section Added new first paragraph: Lithium-ion batteries are fully recyclable and should not be simply thrown away. Please help protect our environment by turning in your defective batteries to an authorized recycler, or send them back to DRS. Page 87: Changed Monitoring Your Battery Status to Using the Power Meter Window. Revised first paragraph You can easily monitor the current charge level of each battery by opening the Power Meter window, as shown in Figure 54. To open the Power Meter
(if operating on batteries only) or the plug icon window, double-click on the battery icon 66.
(if external power is connected) in the Windows task bar. Revised NOTE to read: You must check the Always show icon on the taskbar option in this window for the icon to appear in the task bar. Moved NOTE after 2nd paragraph. Added Using the ARMOR Utilities Batteries Tab title ahead of 3rd paragraph. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Table 15 Deleted: Figure 54 Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 155 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
67. 68. 69. Additions / Corrections / Changes:
Page 89: Table 16 (now Table 17) Deleted row 3. Added NOTE to CONDITION column for Step 2. Row 5 (now row 4) Revised sentence: Click on Alarm Action to select the type of alarm notification and resulting action you want to occur for each alarm. Page 90: Using Power Schemes to Conserve Batteries section Revised 1st sentence:
Power schemes are a collection of settings that manage the power usage of your computer. With the options in the Power Schemes tab of the Power Options Properties window, you can:
Revised last sentence: To access the Power Schemes tab, select Start Control Panel
Power Options. The Power Options Properties window opens with the Power Schemes tab displayed by default, as shown in Figure 57. Page 93: Added Activating before Standby Power Mode heading. Added Activating before Hibernation Power Mode heading. Made it a 2nd level heading. After section title Enabling and Configuring Hibernation Mode, added NOTE - Your ARMOR X10 will automatically go into Hibernation mode when the configured time delays expire. To resume from the hibernation mode, restart your computer using the Power On/Off button. Your desktop and any work in progress will be restored as you left it. 70. Page 95: Deleted last two sentences and made them a note at the beginning of the Activating Hibernation Power Mode section. Page 97: Frequently Asked Questions section:
Changed bulleting and numbering tab spaces from 0 to .5. 1st paragraph, 1st sentence Revised: Following is a list of frequently asked questions about the ARMOR X10. 2nd sentence Change able to happy. Change Representatives to lower-case r. Assigned numbers to FAQs.
#1 What Options ~ Changed 1st and 2nd bulleted answers as follows:
71. Any USB storage device, i.e., CD-ROM/DVD drive, flash drive, floppy drive, etc. Wireless LAN
#2 How Do I Install Drivers for Peripheral Devices Sold by DRS?
Removed bulleting. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 57 ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 156 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
Revised answer as follows:
The device drivers for your peripherals were pre-installed on your hard drive prior to shipping. They are located on your C drive in a folder labeled Drivers. If you order a new peripheral, the device drivers will either be on a disk shipped with the device or DRS will provide you with a source to download the drivers. If you are not familiar with how to update drivers, request assistance from your IT support or contact DRS Technical Support at 888-872-1100.
#3 How Do I Install Drivers for Peripheral Devices Not Sold By DRS?
Deleted first sentence. 2nd bulleted answer Replaced ARMOR with DRS. Deleted and we will attempt to help you. Removed bulleting.
#4 (formerly item 14) What External Peripherals Does the ARMOR X10 Support?
Replaced thumb with flash. Revised as follows:
Tablet only:
1 USB device CD-ROM/DVD drive, printers, flash drives, etc. 1 RJ45 device network printer 1-2 PCMCIA devices 1 Flexspace device Bluetooth wireless devices With a docking station or port replicator:
Up to 4 additional USB devices Up to 3 serial devices Bluetooth wireless devices Second display or video device 1 Flexspace device 1 standard parallel port device Up to two audio speakers Removed bulleting.
#5 (formerly item 4) How Do I Activate the On-Screen Keyboard? Revised answer as follows:
Click on the Input Panel icon on the task bar and then select the bottom mode button 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 157 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
on the left side of the panel, as shown in Figure 39. For additional information, refer to On-
screen Keyboard. Formatted: Underline, Font color: Blue Deleted: Figure 39 72. Page 98: #6 (formerly item 4) How Can Hand Writer Recognition Be Disabled?
Changed Writer to Writing.
#7 (formerly item 6) How Can I Open Windows Task ~ ? - Replaced 3-4 with 4-5.
#8 (formerly item 7) What Do I Do if My X10 Locks up or Freezes?
1st bulleted answer Revised: Press and hold the OEM button on the PC Control Panel for 4-5 seconds to invoke the CTRL-ALT-DEL function. Select the Applications tab and highlight the offending application, then click on End Task. Added CAUTION before 3rd bullet: Be careful shutting down SYSTEM processes. Killing the wrong process could render the X10 inoperative or cause an immediate shutdown. 2nd bulleted answer Revised: If shutting down the application does not work, select the Processes tab. Highlight the process that is locked and then click on End Process. 3rd bulleted answer Bold Power On/Off.
#9 (formerly item 8) How Do I Clean the Champ ~ ? - Replaced Champ with Docking
(Champ). Removed bulleting.
#10 (formerly item 9) How Do I Clean the Display Surface? Removed bulleting. Revised first and second paragraphs (see manual).
#13 (formerly item 12) What Can I Do when the Start Button Disappears? Revised bulleting. Revised item h (formerly item 8). 73. Page 99: #11 (formerly item 10) What Do I Do When the Pen Gets Out of Calibration?
Removed bulleting. Revised answer: Follow the procedure in Calibrating the Active Pen Screen.
#12 (formerly item 11) What if the Pen Still Will Not Align? Removed bulleting. Deleted second answer.
#13 (formerly item 12) What Can I Do ~ ?, item 11, capitalize lock. 74. Page 100: What Do I Do When The Battery Discharges and Will Not Charge In The Unit?
9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 158 Document No: 9711-40132-0001 Title: ARMOR X10 Users Guide New Revision: B
Additions / Corrections / Changes:
1st bullet - Replaced paragraph 0 with What to Do for Over-discharged Batteries 2nd bullet Revised 1st sentence: Next, try to charge a known good battery (if available) in the same battery compartment. If this works, then the battery in question is defective. 75. Page 101: 13. DRS Technical Support - Revised entire section (see manual). 76. Page 108: Added the following terms and their definitions: ambient temperature, fully charged battery, fully discharged battery, Flexspace device. Page 109: Moved Configuring the OEM Button and Setting the Advanced Backlight Control sections to section 9 Maintaining Your Computer. Figures and headings adjusted accordingly. 77. 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 159 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
ARMOR USERS GUIDE Page 160 This Page Intentionally Left Blank 9711-40132-0004 Export Controlled See Page 3 Rev -
1 2 3 | Users Guide BT | Users Manual | 916.95 KiB |
(MS-6837D) Bluetooth 2.0+EDR USB Module Users Guide FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. CAUTION:
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Important Note In the event that these conditions can not be example certain laptop configurations or colocation with another transmitter), then the FCC authorization is no longer considered valid the FCC ID can not be used on the final product. In these circumstances, OEM integrator will be responsible for re-evaluating the end product (including thetransmitter) and obtaining a separate FCC authorization. End Product Labeling This transmitter module is authorized only for use in device where antenna may b e installed such that 20 cm may be maintained between antenna and users (for example access points, routers, wireless ADSL and similar equipment). The final end produc t must be labeled in a area with the following: Contains TX FCC ID: I4L-MS6837D. Manual Information for End Users The end user must not have manual instructions to remove or install device. The user manual for end users must include the following information in a prominent location:
IMPORTANT NOTE: To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, the antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. as a result of e-mail transmission. Important Safety Precautions Always read and follow these basic safety precautions carefully when handling any piece of electronic component. 1. Keep this Users Guide for future reference. 2. Keep this equipment away from humidity. 3. Lay this equipment on a reliable flat surface before setting it up. 4. The openings on the enclosure are for air convection hence protects the equipment from overheating. 5. All cautions and warnings on the equipment should be noted. 6. Never pour any liquid into the opening that could damage or cause electrical shock. service personnel:
7. If any of the following situations arises, get the equipment checked by a Liquid has penetrated into the equipment The equipment has been exposed to moisture The equipment has not work well or you can not get it work according to User s Manual The equipment has dropped and damaged If the equipment has obvious sign of breakage 8. DO NOT LEAVE THIS EQUIPMENT IN AN ENVIRONMENT UNCONDITIONED, STORAGE TEMPERATURE ABOVE 70O C OR BELOW -35OC, IT MAY DAMAGE THE EQUIPMENT. iii Introduction
>>> 1.1 BT2RM (MS-6837D) Bluetooth Module MSI Bluetooth 2.0+EDR USB module, BT2RM, is a USB 1.1 Full Speed Module compatible with USB 2.0, being used to integrate with systems such as notebook, Barebone computer, PDA, portable PC, Smart Phone. With MSI BT2RM embedded inside, a system could provide users with the ability and flexibility to link with peripherals wirelessly through EDR (Enhanced Data Rate) technology in Bluetooth v2.0+EDR speeding up to 3Mbps, advanced AFH
(Adaptive Frequency Hopping) techniques in Bluetooth v1.2 to minimize interference and enhance performance when linking with Bluetooth v1.1 devices and eSCO (extended SCO) techniques in Bluetooth v1.2 optional supported for enhancing the audio performance. 1
>>> 1.2 How BT2RM Works 1.2.1 In Bluetooth Connection The term Bluetooth refers to a worldwide standard for th e wireless exchange of data between two devices. In order to ex-
change data, two Bluetooth devices must establish a connection. Before a connection is established, one device must request a connection with another. The second device accepts (or rejects) the connection. The originator of the request is known as the client. The device that accepts (or rejects) the request is known as the server. Many Bluetooth devices can act as both client and server. Every Bluetooth device that provides a service must be prepared to respond to a connection request. Bluetooth soft- ware is always running in the background on the server, ready to respond to connection requests. BT2RM Bluetooth Module Bluetooth -enabled Device s 2
>>> 1.3 Specifications Bluetooth Specifications Radio Standard Frequency Band Data Rate Channel Transmission Modulation Antenna Type Temperature Bluetooth Class II v2.0+EDR 2.400-2.4835 GHz Up to 2169kbps 79 sub-channels FHSS (Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum) GFSK@1Mbps, /4 DQPSK@2Mbps, 8DPSK@3Mbps Printed Circuit Antenna or One antenna connector support
-35 to 70C Operating Temperature Storage Temperature
-20 to 70C Humidity Power Consumption Output Power Max Input Level Receiver Sensitivity Range Baseband Physical Links Network Capabilities 10%-90% (non-condensing) 61.37mA in continue Tx 12mA in Standby mode 0~4dBm 0dBm
-82 dBm @ BER<0.1%
Up to 10m operating range Support ACL and SCO link Support piconet point-to-
point and point-to-multipoint connections 3 Link Manager 3-slot Packets 5-slot Packets Slot Offset Timing Accuracy Switch Hold Mode Sniff Mode Test Mode Park Mode RSSI Power Control Authentication Encryption System Support Profile Support Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Windows 2000/ME/98SE/XP Generic Access Profile/Service Discovery Profile/Serial Port Profile/Dial-Up Networking Profile/Fax Profile/LAN Access Profile/Generic Object Exchange Profile/File Transfer Profile/Object Push Profile/Synchronization Profile/Personal Area Network Profile/Hard Cable Replacement Profile/Basic Image Profile/Generic Audio Video Distribution Profile/Advanced Audio Distribution Profile/Audio Video Remote Control Profile 4
>>> 1.4 System Requirements Before installing BT2RM, your PC should meet the following items:
- One desktop/notebook PC with an available MiniPCI slot.
- Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP operating system.
- Minimum 5MB free disk space for installing the driver and utilities.
- One CD-ROM drive, double speed or higher.
>>> 1.5 Package Contents Unpack the package and check all the items carefully. If any item contained is damaged or missing, please contact your local dealer as soon as possible. Also, keep the box and packing materials in case you need to ship the unit in the future. The package should contain the following items:
- One Bluetooth module. 5
>>> 1.6 Product View Bluetooth antenn a Connecto r USB Connecto r Connect to your notebook using the provided USB cable. 6 Hardware Installation The following diagrams provide you a basic installation for your BT2RM . The instruction below is suitable for most com
puters with USB slot. For more information about the USB module, please refer to your computers manual. Installing BT2RM:
1. Connect one end of the USB cable to the eight
-pin USB connector on BT2RM , and the other end to the USB connector located on your notebook. 7 Software Installation This chapter describes the procedures of installing the driver and utility. Follow the instruction step by step to finish the installation. If you use Windows 98SE/ME, please prepare the Windows Setup CD at hand before installing the driver; because the system will ask you to insert the Setup CD to copy files during the installation. Please NOTE that the BT2RM should be installed int o your computer before installing the driver and utility
. Then, the operating system will detect a new device and start Cancel here to start to con- figure the new device. Click installation from the InstallShield Wizard. The adapter model you installed Clic k Tip: The BT2RM adapte r should be installed into your P C before installing the driver an d utility . 8 STEP 1 Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and the Setup program should launch automatically. If the Autorun program doesnt launch automatically, click Start at the taskbar and select Run.... Type E:\setup.exe (where E OK to launch is your CD-drive) in the Open box and click the Setup program manually. The main screen of Setup program will appear as below. STEP 2 1.Click the Install Bluetooth Driver button. 2.The welcome screen of InstallShield Wizard appears. Click Next. folder. 5.Click 3.Read and accept the License Agreement; then, click Next. 4.Click Next to install the driver in the default destination Install and the program will copy the necessary files to the system. The progress indicator shows the installing status. 6.Click Finish when the bluetooth driver installation is completed. 9 STEP 3 Click the Exit button. The Wireless LAN icon and Bluetooth icon will appear in the status bar. Bluetooth icon 1 0 FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. CAUTION:
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2009-11-19 | 5180 ~ 5240 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Original Equipment |
2 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
3 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 | Effective |
2009-11-19
|
||||
1 2 3 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
DRS Tactical Systems, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0015305246
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
1110 West Hibiscus Blvd
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Melbourne, Florida 32901
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
||||
1 2 3 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 | Grantee Code |
UGL
|
||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Product Code |
980026010
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Name |
A****** F********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Title |
Test Engineer
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
321-7******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
321-6********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
A******@drs-ts.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 01/03/2010 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Class | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||||
1 2 3 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 3 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 3 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | ARMOR X10 TABLET | ||||
1 2 3 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 3 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Grant Comments | Power Output listed is Conducted. Device is restricted to indoor-use only for 5.15-5.25 GHz. Use in portable RF exposure conditions is limited to the specific product and antenna configurations evaluated in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device except as described in this filing with FCC ID: I4L-MS6837D. End users must be provided with operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. Highest reported body SAR values per band are: 2.4 GHz: 0.63 W/kg; 5.15-5.35 GHz 0.32 W/kg; and 5.8 GHz: 0.36 W/kg. This device complies with the Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) requirements of Report and Order FCC 03-287 as a Client only without Radar Detection | ||||
1 2 3 | Power listed is conducted. Use in portable RF exposure conditions is limited to the specific product and antenna configurations evaluated in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device except as described in this composite filing with FCC ID: I4L-MS6837D. End users must be provided with operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. Highest reported body SAR values per band are: 2.4 GHz: 0.63 W/kg; 5.15-5.35 GHz, 0.32 W/kg; and 5.8 GHz: 0.36 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 | Power listed is conducted. Use in portable RF exposure conditions is limited to the specific product and antenna configurations evaluated in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except as described in this composite filing with FCC ID: PD9WM3945ABG.. End users must be provided with operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. Highest reported body SAR values per band are: 2.4 GHz: 0.63 W/kg; 5.15-5.35 GHz 0.32 W/kg; and 5.8 GHz: 0.36 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
Nemko Dallas, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 | Name |
M******** C****
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
972-4******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
972-4********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
m******@nemko.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15E | CC | 5180.00000000 | 5240.00000000 | 0.0480000 | 16M5G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.318 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15C | CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0010000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC